Home

Matrix StIM/SIM User Manual

1. i a M L T i N Vo i f a 5 274 NN YY 287 i J 5 T of gt Eee PEN S 192 a 276 468 Figure 7 1 StIM Front Dimensions lA Figure 7 2 StIM Side Dimensions Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 7 5 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 7 Specifications CH 1S TIE Figure 7 3 Electronic Module Dimensions 7 7 Environment Operating Environment Non Operating Environment Temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F with relative humidity varying between 0 to 95 Vibration 074Grms 10 500Hz 15 minutes all axes 7 6 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 7 Specifications 7 8 Standard and Optional Components Due to continuing research specifications are subject to change without notice Specifications apply to all models unless otherwise noted 7 8 1 Standard Components e Line Cord North American and European rated e Digital input card e User Manual 7 8 2 Optional A
2. SJBUUBYD IV 9 9 9C Ajud peyoo uA 938 8q jauueYyD 9 9 9q jauueyy Adod j uueyo IPF uolje19do jauueYyy 399 9S suyas ebew psoueapy Ajepuogsas S 9 AQ jNduj AWepuodas suoldo oapi Aiepuodas g0edS 10 09 p N S Y ss uzyfug JSCIJUOD suizas Hewj Aepuos sg TNO TWO OF JouUeYD PJOM y BpNjoul zou OP 9 9 9q Adod jIpa pue suondo jauueyyD SI L GSO JENUIA S q M 84 UO FILON Bulyuejg Avepuossas dnjas ony uC p dsy d y UOHISOd UO SOd H OSEUd l Xld JEJL Xld 49 31 S EDS ZI S S ld ZIS H UOI ISOd 9 9ZIS AlepuodaS TN OTTO OF CO OD JOJOD JEPsOg did UPIM JEP40g did UOH SOd A dd UOHISOd H did 8ZIS MOPUIM did TNO TWO O S S Jd UONSOd did suo dO MOpUIM did j uueyo e uo lt 1 UJ gt SS ld 5u 1 S WeLJJNIJY Z weIynooy jqeug a 40 2 f01d SI 104 p u p awelj nosVy uaaq Aey Jey sjauueyo OY 40 IJE JO SI SI SIV dnjas jauueyy ainjesadwa 10 09 Z wes4nooy yu wzsnfpy 10109 199S penjasey Y sBuljyjas 10 09 peAjasey G SHuNaS 10 09 y Jay uUonoN 944 9 sbuljes Bis it SSION E JayI14 UONOW 8A3 u 19S In eee ral d UBBIOS PIAS y UORINp Y SION OJNb
3. Indicates the current projector capability with respect to the selected color target and the target white point The information format is R 999 9 G 999 9 B 999 9 W 999 9 1999 9 R G B Indicates the percentage achieved of the red green and blue target gamut W Indicates the percentage achieved of the product of the RGB brightness and the target brightness Indicates the percentage achieved of the product of the IR brightness and the target brightness Target Red x y Target Green x y Target Blue x y Displays the color values associated with the selected target color space e Only values for user defined color spaces User 1 through 4 can be changed Changes to these values update the associated color space chromaticity e When the Target Color Space is set to Maximum the values reflect a color space larger than capable for the best array color saturation Target White x y Displays the white x y values associated with the Select White Point option e Only values for user defined white points User White 1 through 4 can be changed e When Set White Color to Color Temperature is checked the values are calculated based on the specified White Color Temperature Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 51 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CHix IS TIE i Copy Color Space From Updates the Target Red x y Green x y Blue x y values based on the color space selected from the list This option is avail
4. MSP MENU LOCATION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the default menu position on the screen Valid options are 0 4 3 TopLeft 1 4 3 Inset 1 2 4 3 Inset 2 3 16 9 TopLeft 4 16 9 Inset 1 5 16 9 Inset 2 6 Center SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLES MSP Get current menu position preset MSP 0 Set main menu position to 4 3 TopLeft the top left corner of screen MSP 6 Set menu position to the center of the screen NAM CHANNEL NAME CONTROL GROUP Channel SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Channel Name is optional text assigned to a channel and can appear in the Channel Setup menu Channel Edit menu the channel list and the Status menu SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE COxx Set the channel name for the channel xx channel number from 01 to 99 Set the channel name for the channel being used by main PIIP Set the channel name for the channel being used by main D 44 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference NAM CHANNEL NAME Cont d EXAMPLES NAM Get current active channel name for main video NAM MAIN Get channel name being used by main video NAM PIIP Get channel name being used by main video NAM Test Set channel name being used by main video to Test NAM PIP Test Set channel name being used by ma
5. EBB CNTV 100 Set black level blend offset of center zone to 100 EBB LFTW 200 Set black level blend width of left zone to 200 EBB RHTW Get black level blend width of right zone EBL EDGE BLENDING CONTROL GROUP Config Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control the edge blending settings so that any of the four edges can be blended with an adjacent projector to achieve an overlapped and seamless image SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Enables or Disables standard edge blending mode or choose a saved TWIST blending preset LFTW Changes edge blending width of the left edge LFTM Changes edge blending curve midpoint of the left edge LFTS Changes edge blending curve slope at the midpoint on the left edge Changes edge blending width of the right edge Changes edge blending curve midpoint of the right edge Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 23 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE EBL EDGE BLENDING Cont d RHTS Changes edge blending curve slope at the midpoint on the right edge TOPW Changes edge blending width of the top edge TOPM Changes edge blending curve midpoint of the top edge TOPS Changes edge blending curve slope at the midpoint on the top edge BTMW Changes edge blending width of the bottom edge BTMM Changes edge blending curve midpoint of the bottom edge BTMS Changes edge blending curve slope
6. 3 2 4 Using Slidebars and Other Controls 3 8 Most of the function menus allow you to change settings by using slidebars check boxes and drop down lists Navigating options Enter the menu option number corresponding to the setting you wish to change for example press MENU13 to select Vertical Stretch in the Size and Position menu Move the highlight to the option desired and press ENTER Move the highlight to the option desired and press LEFT RIGHT arrow key to adjust immediately Both the number and the length of Filter 95 the bar change accordingly See Figure 3 2 Hold for continuous Figure 3 2 Example of a Slidebar adjustment For options that have their own key such as Contrast Brightness and Gamma you can bypass the menus entirely and press the corresponding GAMMA BRIGHTNESS or CONTRAST key to immediately access an adjustment during your presentation For blind access hide the entire menu system see OSD On screen display on page 3 5 and access using the proper sequence of key presses Slidebars in menus The current value for a given parameter such as size or vertical stretch appears to the left of its slidebar icon adjustment window This number often expresses a percentage or 1t may have units associated with it such as pixels depending on the specific option e Press LEFT RIGHT arrow key to gradually adjust the setting up or down e Press ENTER to activate a slidebar text box for specif
7. Contrast Contrast increases or decreases the perceived difference between light and dark areas of your image 0 100 For best results keep close to 50 For best 4 Right Blank Left PIP blanking ___ Example With Blanking Ww H 1400 Figure 3 9 Blanking of a Primary Image 1050 Similar to a zoom function Main Menu Image Settings Sate 0 0 100 0 Contrast 50 0 Brightness 0 0 100 0 YCbCr SDTV ITU R BT 601 M Color Space Video Options Input Levels Advanced Image Settings Figure 3 11 Image Settings Menu results start with a low value and increase so that whites remain bright but are not distorted or tinted and that light areas do not become white NOTE f the environment lighting changes an adjustment of Gamma is recommended see below 3 20 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Brightness Increases or decreases the amount of black in the image 0 100 For best results keep close to 50 Start with a high value and decrease so that dark areas do not become black Conversely high brightness changes black to dark gray causing washed out images Reserved This selection is reserved for future use Color Space Determines how the color components of an analog input signal are decoded for accurate color in the display Useful only for analog signals and certain digital sources Al
8. HDC SL10 Get the current dual link mode for DHDIC on Slot 1 HLP SERIAL HELP CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Query a list of all available serial commands with brief descriptions and current enabled states SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Request entire command Help listing or list for a single command EXAMPLES HLP Retrieve entire command Help listing HLP BRT Retrieve all subcodes descriptions enables for BRT control D 32 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference HLT PROJECTOR HEALTH CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Any system health errors are placed on the troubleshooting queue The queue which contains the problems and a suggested solution for each one is read only All problems in the queue are read using their index number which starts from 0 Problems are assigned priorities 1 Critical Will result in failure to operate or shutdown 2 High Will result in significant loss of functionality but the projector may continue to run 3 Low Will result in minor loss of functionality which will not seriously affect projector SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE LSOL List solutions LALL List one or all problems and solutions EXAMPLES HLT Returns all queued problems HLT 3
9. ACE AUTO COLOR ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Automatically select Color Enable based on the control being adjusted If enabled this control allows the projector to automatically change the color enable control when the user is using the OSD interface to adjust controls such as Input levels odd pixel and brightness uniformity This is an unsaved control which can only be set when powered on and only affects the operation of the On Screen Menus SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable Disable auto color controls EXAMPLES ACE 0 Disable Auto Color ACE 1 Enable Auto Color ACF ACCUFRAME CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This controls the settings for AccuFrame AccuFrame is used to reduce image artifacts such as smearing and double image perception in high speed simulation environments SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Enable 0 OFF 1 ON Strength parameter which controls the effect of AccuFrame Higher values will reduce artifacts but will also reduce image brightness Expressed as a percentage 0 100 EXAMPLES ACF SLCT 1 Enable ACF PARM 35 Set strength to 35 ACO ADAPTIVE CONTRAST CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adaptive Contrast Enhancement dynamically expands the contrast of the output image producing vibrant imag
10. RTE G XXXXXXX description PWR 1 turn ON the projector if we receive any GPIO Input RTE G description PWR 1 turn ON the projector if we receive any GPIO Input RTE G XX description PWR 1 turn ON the projector if we receive any GPIO Input RTE G XXXXXLH description PWR 0 turn OFF the projector if pin 6 is set to low and pin 7 is high RTE G HH description FRZ 0 freeze the image if pins 1 and 2 are set to high RTE G XXHHXXH description FRZ 0 freeze the image if pins 3 4 7 are set to high RTE G LLHXX description FRZ 0 freeze the image if pins 1 2 are set to Low and pin 3 is set to high RTE G LLH description FRZ 0 freeze the image if pins 1 2 are set to Low and pin 3 is set to high D 60 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference SIN SELECT INPUT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Select the active Input for the video in control VIC The VIC can be main or picture in picture To specify a new Input routing enter the number of the Slot followed by the Input The projector will switch to that Input location and automatically select the channel best suited to the incoming signal For example 1 2 would indicate Slot 1 Input 2 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Set the active Input for the main video PIIP Set the active Input for the
11. TFN OTTO OF CO jobie ssoujybug go giqeuy Weed S9 g qeuz 10 09 ony WOl4 JUlOd ayy Adog SINJEJOGW9 10 09 SYA SINJEIOAWIA 10 09 0 SUA 19S JUIOd SHUM JIVE wo a0eds 10 09 Adod Ayiqedey Aey yobue 104109 Aey ayy yobue X SHUM pJe A anjg yebue x njg yebe K uaas yobue x UBdID Jobe A pay jebue X poy jebue g0eds 10 09 jobue Lb 94 SL vl l cl LL OL NO AF LO OR CO OD Ayiqedey soyoeloid sn e s Aey OOOO AUB dnog sJojop jybug pjoysaiy yjnweg Bulwe pjouseiu sseujubug BuiuIeM sulue M ajqeug ynwed wnwluln sseuyybug wnwuiy jobie ssouyybug gow ssoujybuig g9 uoljeinbiyuoy NO WO OOAUbiIg uoneunByuoDg DO WeuY 6 yuawysnfpy 10109 yOelOud S yebe 10 09 Aeuy Y uone yuog DOWOOOAYUBIG E Joyoaloig SIU 0 ZIUOJYJU Z spol DOLOE OO AUB 90 TAeuy GONeU Jo Vendy E sBumes pied uondo L BOIAIBS Q uoneuqied 9 sonsoubelq 10109 9 AJOWOSS SUOIJCOIUNWILWOY s 9u 1 Jd NUS SUI 8 3ed yu wapeueN J8MOd SUOIdO nd no o6enbue7 uoljeinbiyuog lt O OF CO O N UJBHEd S L 6 a6enbue7 9g did 9 Bulyoyims yndu Z SN E S 9 UONeINBYUOD y dnjas jauueyy e suas obeu z uoISod pue 9ZIS nus ule Matrix StIM SIM User Manual
12. V Position Keep Aspect On Auto Setup Blanking Figure B 5 View Previous Menu IMPORTANT When a menu option is modified through the Virtual OSD menu the projector setting takes effect immediately Entering a number in a numeric field 1 Position your mouse pointer within the numeric field that you wish to edit Click to highlight the field entry NOTE Zf you click the menu option the field cannot be edited 2 3 Edit the field entry 4 Press Enter to save your changes Output Options 0 000 59 94 lt Menu option selected 0 000 Figure B 6 Select Numeric Field Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 59 94 Numeric field selected B 5 Appendix B WebUI CH 1S TIE Selecting an option from a drop down list 1 Click the option drop down arrow to open the drop down list 2 Locate and select the desired option Menu Preferences Large Menu Font E Display Channel List Display Slidebars iv Display Error Messages Serial ports Menu Type Splash Screen Cascading Menus Figure B 7 Types of Menu Elements Selecting or clearing a check box To select or clear a check box click the check box with your mouse pointer This enables or clears the option respectively Clock setting 1 Click within the field i e Lamp Regeneration Start Time option to arama allow access y 2009 09 YF 14 2 Change the Hour Minute and Seconds fields double digit fiel
13. DESCRIPTION The red drive level is used to compensate for different amounts of attenuation between the Red Green and Blue in the signal Available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting achieves maximum contrast without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each source SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the red drive on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 MAIN Set the red drive on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PHP Set the red drive on the main video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 55 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE RDD RED DRIVE Cont d EXAMPLES RDD 128 Set red drive to 128 on main video RDD MAIN 128 Set red drive to 128 on main video RDD PIIP 100 Set red drive to 100 on main video RDD IN32 100 Set red drive to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 RDD Returns the current red drive value on main video RDD PIIP Returns the current red drive value on main video RDD IN12 Returns the current red drive v
14. H P v 45 EE i Recz Fim F 001 110980 o 10 DB15 DB15 o 7 safe als go _ alg Electronic Module EM z oon ED Aka 001 111038 xx P s EM Power e ae 2 016 103176 xx Blue D DC id pol Image Processor Card a If Optional Kara Onto 0 BEC YS SIPC DIPC Module Module Module Module ETETETT TETTET eeeecccecces y P1 DB37M Projector Head Module PHM 001 111146 xx IR Keypad Cc D 002 100005 xx 001 100705 xx JOY4C81G YOUMS PBP Backplane 001 100465 xx Front IR Senso 001 111001 om Fan 2 Fan 1 J2 ee 001 100730 xx IR Remote QDPC 001 101130 xx 001 110911 xx 3 3 r Inl MNA Link B gt eee DIN E Temp1 001 111093 xx L ik 001 111034 E J i i 001 100585 xx i e fej 001 111005 xx B25 fE AE ee c 001 100473 2x 001 110909 xx LED Status Module 001 110994 xx 016 103186 xx EM Network Sal aa 001 100730 xx Ir Ai r d e 0 vr td 001 100502 xx 001 1004 72 XX_ DIVID Panel GPIO bs LINKA TKA hae h s een 001 111097 xx EM Network sr Gd an i r pO i Ethernet 1 o fess m o E o Ga A ciy XLR Status Displa Air Inlet 001 111093 xx Le N O Ethernet 0 RS422 GPIO RS232 RS232 pe OOA 100565 SI Ethernet 0 PHM Network i IN oy me
15. NOTES 1 Section 7 Specifications for all cable requirements and other connection details 2 Some commands are operational only when projector is powered up C 2 Understanding Message Format Messages can be one of three types e Set A command to set a projector parameter at a specific level such as changing to a certain channel e Request A request for information such as what channel is currently in use e Reply The projector returns the data in response to a request or as confirmation of a command All Remote Control information passes IN and OUT of the projector as a simple text message consisting of a three letter command code an optional 4 letter subcode and any related data When a parameter for a specific source is being accessed the 4 letter subcode will be added on to the Command code A number of optional features message acknowledges checksums and network addressing can be included Generally most commands include 0 or data fields or parameters Where applicable a message may expand to include additional parameters of related details The smallest step size for any parameter is always 1 For some controls i e Size the value displayed on the screen has a decimal point e g 0 200 to 4 000 In this case the values used for the serial communications is an integer value e g 200 to 4000 not the decimal value seen on the screen Regardless of message type or origin all messages use the same basic f
16. Set routing to full daisy chaining OPP ODD PIXEL PHASE CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adds an offset to the pixel phase setting on this card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A and D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLES OPP SL10 1 Set a pixel phase offset to 1 on Slot 1 OSD ON SCREEN DISPLAY DESCRIPTION SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLES OSD Get current state of OSD 0 when OSD is hidden 1 when OSD is displayed OSD 0 Turn OFF OSD display The OSD will run in the background even though it is not visible OST OSD TRANSPARENCY CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enable or Disable on screen display transparency SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable Disable OSD transparency EXAMPLE OST 1 Enable OSD transparency Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 47 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE PBC BORDER COLOR CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control lets you choose the color of the optional border around the picture in picture image The border can be disabled by setting t
17. Under the Main tab select the General secondary tab to view general information about Inputs Channels Projector Information Test Pattern and Color Enable see B Logging On on page B 1 For detailed information refer to B 3 2 Main Tab Status Under the Main tab select the Status secondary tab to view the 12 Category LED status lights which indicate the projector s highest critical state See Figure B 4 The LED color of the category indicates that it is in one of the following states e Green Good e Yellow Warning e Red Error For more information about each LED click an LED button for details Alarms Configuration System Signal 2 r Lamp Info Versions Temperatures 2 2 Cooling Peripherals Serials Figure B 4 Category Status Example Matrix StIM SIM User Manual B 3 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Appendix B WebUI B 3 3 Tools Tab Virtual OSD The Tools tab defaults to the Virtual OSD secondary tab C CHRISTIE main X Tools Admin _ Dp Main Menu Size amp Position Image Settings Channel Setup b gt 4 Configuration Lamp a Status b Secondary Input amp Switching Language English Test Pattern off G N D om A O DN BB Virtual OSD The following table describes each area found in the Tools window The Maximize Minimize button toggles depending on the curr
18. exclamation symbol without a space Other details to remember about data e All values returned by the projector reply messages have a fixed length regardless of the actual value For a specific parameter the length will always be the same e g contrast is always returned as 3 characters projector number is always returned as 5 characters The minimum parameter size is 3 characters Values that are less than the pre defined size will be padded with leading zeros as needed Parameters which have negative signs are zero padded after the negative sign and will have one less digit to make space for the sign e If entering a negative number there must be a space between the code subcode and the value For example CRM3 and CRM 3 can both be used when the number is positive CRM 2 is acceptable but CRM 2 is not Matrix StIM SIM User Manual C 3 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix C Serial Communication CH 1S TIE e Data in set messages to the projector do not require padding with zeros e Within each message multiple parameters of data must be separated by one space character e Text parameters such as channel names are enclosed in double quotes following the data as in Name Text Parameters Most data is simply a numerical value however some messages also require text For example a channel naming message typically includes a text based name Enclose this text in double quotation marks as in Tilt
19. lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES SPT 1 Turn ON split screen to the side SPT 0 Turn OFF split screen SST SYSTEM STATUS CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Status DESCRIPTION Retrieve the various system status groups SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Returns information on all status groups with one message per item ALRM Returns a summary of any active alarms CONF Returns configuration data model sn build date etc VERS Returns version numbers Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 63 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE SST SYSTEM STATUS Cont d EXAMPLES SST ALRM returns SST ALRM 000 002 101 Prism temperature where parameters are P1 index number P2 error level P3 value P4 description Error level is 0 no errors or warnings 1 warning 2 error 3 error and warning STD VIDEO STANDARD CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control displays or sets the current video standard that is decoding the Input signal You can allow the projector to automatically determine the standard or you can specify a specific standard from the selection list 0 Auto Automatically determined by decoder 1 PAL is a commonly used format in much of Europe China Australia and some South American and African countries 2 NTSC is a commonly used format in N
20. 0 0 100 0 O S 0 100 50 a 0 100 off Applies texture detail enhancement based on adaptive horizontal vertical and diagonal large edge and small edge enhancement processes Detail Threshold Selects a filter sensitivity to noise A higher value may improve noisy sources especially for higher settings of detail Detail Overshoot Minimizes ringing on the enhanced edges detail and texture effects Split Screen Allows a snap shot of the main image to be presented on the right side of the screen to allow evaluation of advanced image processing features All resizing controls are honoured on both images however image processing controls only happen on the left side image Changing inputs channels or test patterns will disable this control NOTE PIP operation must be disabled prior to enabling this control Noise Reduction Settings Noise Reduction Selects a filter sensitivity to noise A higher value may improve noisy sources but it will soften the image Block Artifact Reduction Locates and reduces block edges produced by Discrete Cosine Transform DCT based compression processing Mosquito Noise Reduction Advanced Image Settings Noise Reduction Settings 1 Noise Reduction Block Artifact Reduction Mosquito Noise Reduction Split Screen Full Screen Eye Motion Filter Eye Motion Filter gl 71 Reduces mosquito artifacts around sharp edges in DCT based compression by dynamically
21. 2 3 4 J 6 f 8 9 Red Part Of Blue Red Part Of White Adjustments are specific to the target color Green Part Of White space If the color space is changed for the array projector adjustments can be copied from the old target color space and fine tuned again Reset current adjustments to defaults Blue Part Of White Clear Adjustments See also Managing Colors with ArrayLOC Auto Color Enable a on page 497 _ Test Pattern Enable Copy Adjustments From Maximum z Target Color Space White Brightness Adjustment 100 0 s 1000 4 Use this option to change the color space Changing this option applies the red green blue x y values associated with the selected option It also updates the red green blue components of each color on this menu Selecting one of the user defined color spaces displays the last saved adjustment values The Target Color Space option is enabled only on the master projector All other projector specific color adjustments on this menu are available on all projectors at all times Red Part Green Part Blue Part of Each Color Use these options to make projector specific color adjustments to the selected Target Color Space Clear Adjustments Use this option to reset the color values to the color adjustment default values 0 or 100 Reset Current Adjustments to Default Use this option to reset the red part green part blue part of each color to the default values set at the factory dur
22. CLR Returns the current color saturation value on main video CLR IN12 Returns the current color saturation value on Slot 1 Input 2 CNM CHANNEL INFO NUMBER CONTROL GROUP Channel SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE Select a new number for channel xx channel number from 01 to 99 EXAMPLE D 18 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference CON CONTRAST CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control sets the image contrast by adjusting the gain applied to the Input signal It has exactly the same effect as adjusting the Input levels except that 1t operates an all 3 colors and can be used to make quick adjustments For precise control the Input level adjustments should be used If the setting is too high bright portions of the image that are not quite at peak white are displayed as peak white and detail is lost in the brightest parts of the image This condition is known as crushing If the setting is too low the image will be dimmer than it need be Start from a lower setting and adjust upwards until just below the point where white is crushed SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the contrast on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 0 1000 MAIN Set the contrast on the main video to the specified value in the range 0 1000 PIIP Set th
23. D50 5 User 1 3 6500K D65 6 User 2 4 7500K D75 7 User 3 8 User 4 x decimal places WHxY Adjusts the y coordinate of the white color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places WHxT Sets user set color temperature and adjusts the white point x and y coordinates Available for user settings if SWxT is set to l SWxT Selects whether user presets are generated from white point values 0 or from a color temperature value 1 COPY Copy white point settings from preset to current Value 0 8 for source preset EXAMPLES TWP SLCT 5 Select User setting 1 TWP WH6X 290 Set User 2 target white x point to 0 290 TWP WH2Y Return value of 6500K setting white y point TWP SWCT 1 Derive x and y from color temperature setting TWP WHCT 8000 Set color temperature to 8000K TWP COPY 4 Copy settings from 9300K to current TXE TEXTURE ENHANCEMENT CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Applies texture detail enhancement based on adaptive horizontal vertical and diagonal large edge and small edge enhancement processes SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE Set the texture enhancement for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the texture enhancement for main video PIIP Set the texture enhancement for main video EXAMPLE TXE 50 Set the texture enhancement to 50 for main video D 70 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHKISTIE Appendix D Seria
24. Introduction CH IS TIE i 1 4 5 1 4 6 1 4 7 1 4 Independent curve control for each path RGB and IR allows video transforms such as gamma and power curves to be applied independently to the RGB and the IR frames Key Features e Native WUXGA 1920 x 1200 resolution 10 bit image processing module Display of RGB NTSC PAL and SECAM video inputs and HDTV formats Picture in Picture PIP display Edge Blending ability using software for seamless displays Dual frequency IR sensor for use with standard IR remote and optional long range dual frequency remote Memory for up to 99 custom channels source setups Intuitive on screen menu system Built in GPIO port to enable active control of external devices LED display for projector status monitoring Multiple control options including RS 232 and RS 422 On board ChristieNET software Universal AC input 100 240 VAC 50 60Hz Dual Image Processing Card DIPC InfraRGB mode interleaves 2 independent RGB and IR inputs How the Projector Works Sequential RGB color primaries are generated by the light module This colored light illuminates a single DMD located in the projector head module In addition to the RGB color primaries an IR LED can be turned on to illuminate the DMD The reflected light from the DMD chip then passes through the projection lens to the screen to display the image List of Components Make sure these components were received with the pr
25. LO O N oN O 145rH 48SHO Y 497 SHO E woog JOSYO Z dol SHO S S JO JOSIND auojsAay az anig JO Wed U09 N7 anig jo Hed pay NT yuewysni py g9 enuen ng jo Wed N NI u 19 JO Hed nig NWI u 195 JO Ped pey NI UBB JO Ped U39319 W7 pey jo Hed enig NI pay JO Hed U 919 NWI pay jo Hed psy NI SPO 10 09 l cl Lb OL TNO TWO OF CO OD juowabeueyy JOMOd p U01 DAIIOD AsJaWIOay UO SOd UOHSOd H SJOSHO JOSIND auc shey QZ sBunjes uozs y Jesey auojshey qz isnipy auojshey jeolwe ysn py uo s y Je UOZIOH snfpy UJa ed Se UOI D9IIOTD AJJ WUOSS TN OAT OF CO OD juawjsnipy gow enuen dn fulll OL Bulpusig 19497 y9e g Z yu wyzsnfpy 10 09 10 23f01d 9 p1e 1 10105 Aeuy G Bulpua g ebpz y ApwuuopunN sseujybug E UOND9IIOD AJOWOS Z UJB ed S L JOJO 9 Aljawoas GON PL 90 Keuy g sBulyjas pieg uodo BIIAIOS 0 uopesqijeo 9 sojsoubelq 6 JOJOD 9 AJAWOSS SUOI JEOIUNWIWOD S8OUBIOJOIg NU N OU 8 9q jyuswebeueW JAMO lt O O N oO suondo nd no benbue uoleinbiyuog N g9 9YeH4UI PL JOLY el OJ 9 bld 99S suip s pIe uondo LL 3919S OL UoHeIgIIED 9 sonsoubeq 6 SUOHeDIUNWWOD Z S 9U 4 J ld NU N 9 oul 9 92q G suondo in
26. Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 23 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE l 3 24 RGB Quantization Range This control defines the RGB quantization levels for digital DVI and HDMI inputs using the RGB color space Typically graphics sources use the full range of levels for the given bit depth 1 e 8 bit 10 bit 12 bit and consumer electronics CE products typically use a limited range of data within the given bit depth This control must be set to Limited to correct the levels for those CE products that use the limited space This adjusts what is considered black and white levels in the image As an example for 8 bit space full range RGB uses levels 0 black to 255 white A limited CE range is 16 235 for 8 bit video sources Image Settings gt Input Levels Menu 9 9 j input Levels Turn OFF before Auto Input Level J leaving menu Red lt Pr gt Blacklevel 3 Red lt Pr gt Input Drive 255 4 Green lt Y gt Blacklevel 3 Levels adjust Only experienced users should use the Input Levels submenu The projector automatically optimizes input levels for all but the most unusual of sources Before starting check that overall 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 contrast and brightness settings are near 50 and Green lt Y gt Input Drive 255 ie a that color temperature is properly set up on an Blue lt Pb gt Blacklevel 3 internal grayscale test pattern Good RGB or input EMSs TD he levels that is the dr
27. There are five LEDs on the module faceplate The PWR on the left side indicates power is applied and that the card 1s initialized The LEDs to the right side of the corresponding connectors indicate that a valid signal is detected In the case of the outputs the LED indicates a signal is currently being looped out Twin HDMI Input 108 311101 01 S eee ec S 1 IN 1 OUT 2 OUT Analog BNC Input Card This card accepts several types of sync modes In 5 wire sync mode all 5 BNC connectors are used If H and V connectors are swapped this card will still operate normally An analog graphic source such as a VGA from a PC can be connected The card can operate in 4 wire sync mode which accommodates 4 wire RGBC sources The composite sync cable can be connected to either the H C BNC or the V BNC The card supports 3 wire RGB or YPBPr sync modes sometimes called sync on Green SOG In this mode the H C and V connectors are not used The sync is connected to the Green Y BNC connector This card offers no loop out capability There are 2 LED s on the module faceplate PWR indicates power has been applied and the card is initialized signal indicates a valid signal has been detected Analog Input 108 309101 01 Oe S 2 Sonal Red Pr Green Y Blue Pb 2 8 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 2 Installation and Setup Dual SD HD SDI Input Card This card accepts both standard definition
28. Uone e a a E E 3 12 Channel Semp Menti ercran e EE E aces 3 13 a LYE a r E A A E A AE E 3 13 Copy a Channel onsets ect boutclctshu a hansaied teeta a aaa A NEARE EET EANA 3 14 B S EET EAE E E E E 3 14 Dere MUNDO CIAO errr E A A E A 3 15 Pono a CR E e E eee emt re mene err eee ae 3 15 te GG SUMS CEN UMS UR T E E E E E tad dott O A E ad E E 3 16 34 1 Automatic Image SOUP a occ acccscacissamessesasnesaesioaduniad one iE E ERRE AEE RR 3 16 342 Main Monu S176 and Position MIU seresa e E 3 17 Ro ere a E a 3 17 I e tc cote de atta duce E E E E E 3 18 benee ES aee a areas pee E E E A E E A A EO AE 3 18 PLT E A E E E E E E O EA eee E MeeEernen veeeeees 3 19 PTEI E E E ce nee ee 3 19 Fe POSTION gap drocasaceacesienoctenesdsensniapetorbaradunasdeasacesiennettasne noranssasooaudasneretiensetasesdsanmenssoecesnes ideas 3 19 SPO O passin cy E corners oe say tore E E co E E cocaaunasaoeeveeteeuuneoete 3 19 FDA 0 01 Mr 0 CIPS UNL e Rho D ante emanate nner nee ee ee Bet er eran eet ee ee ee ree 3 19 Blank io a es ee er eer E 3 19 o e SC UL s ISU E E E E E 3 20 Image Settings Input Levels Ment sessrsririerscinstinerrnacini saeir inaenea aieas 3 24 Image Settings gt Advanced Image Settings Menu cc ccccccccccsceccceceeeesessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 26 AAM mn Mom C hanne o a eeet carieas caaeetes 3 30 s Man Ne e a Oa E E EEEE Ei 3 30 L OVA a E E E E E E E 3 30 Oupa ODHONS ammeter ern EEEE E E 3 31 PON N a C11 a A E E E E 3 32 DS T n e E E A E A A E
29. display error messages 33 display user messages 33 Edge Blending menu 40 41 Ethernet Settings menu 36 Geometry Correction menu 37 Menu Preferences menu 33 Output Options menu 31 Power Management menu 32 splash screen 33 34 contrast 4 20 copy adjustments from 54 copy color space from 52 copy white point from 52 Index D date and time 32 Detail Settings menu 28 diagnostic test web UI 8 Diagnostics and Calibration menu 46 display error messages 33 display user message boxes 33 domain name 36 DVI digital video input 7 E edge blending 42 Edge Blending menu 40 41 edit secondary channel settings infraRGB 61 electromagnetic compatibility 2 EM network example 55 56 EM stealth mode 32 emissions enable decoder AGC 22 enable infraRGB 61 enable warning 50 enter key 6 enter standby after 32 environment specifications 6 environmental regulations 1 error code lookup table 3 See also LED lookup table Ethernet network routing 35 Ethernet Settings menu 36 exit key 6 eye motion filter 29 F fade time 71 fan assist 32 film mode detect video options 23 filter eye motion 29 filter video options 23 fine tune projector color 59 fine tune projector color meter 60 focus 15 frame delay 31 See arrayLOC configuration frame lock tiling 45 frame locking 31 71 free run frequency 31 freeze image 46 freeze image during auto setup 47 front IR enable 36 function key 5 G gamma file uploading web UI 7 gam
30. i 43 Media Block 44 Mobius 45 Entero StIM SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PNG PNG 41 001 000 234 Indicates Cinema type software 1 major 0 minor 234 beta PPA POSITION PRESET ASPECT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION When enabled this control ensures that during auto setup for any source its aspect ratio is maintained when its default size is calculated This is similar to cases where a stretch is defined for a source in the lookup table If disabled and no stretch is defined the source is scaled to fit the screen SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt This command accepts either 0 or 1 0 disables maintain aspect 1 enables maintain aspect EXAMPLES PPA 0 Disables maintain aspect during auto setup PPA 1 Enables maintain aspect during auto setup D 50 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference PPP POSITION PRESET CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Choose a preset location and size for the window The Location settings will adjust the size and position of the window Blanking will not be affected While in split screen mode several channel controls that resize image will be disabled These controls are size H Position and V Position Valid values are 0 Top Right 1 T
31. n S y G JOOYSIBAQ 8 9q 7 pioys y L 3q JUSWSDUeYUF 9JNj X9 Z 2 8q sBuljjas jieyog Arepuoosas sbul JaS 10 09 Alepuodas paasey 9 paasey G sBunjas Jojog Alepuodas y suyas uononpey asion Auepuosas e sBunjas jlejaq Aiepuooas 2 sumas ewweg Alepuodes suizas abew p sueapy iepuos sS j qeu4 10 09 Lb 10 99 3q yedd jndu 9 uo01 e907 dwe d 6 jqeu4 10 09 ony 9A Nduj lt qq gt N g BASIE lt Gd gt an q AUG jNdu lt A gt UBAIN JSAQ YOe G lt A gt UdBIH SAU Nduj lt Jq gt poay SAB YOL G lt Id gt P Y l 7 Indu ONY S 9A97 ndu Alepuodas TFN OATWO OLR CO obuey uojeziuend gOw Z1 PaAlasay LL SeJJUOD BAdepy CO Aejaq ewin7 ewoluy 6 suizas Pewwes Aiepuodas dojs ewweg yp uoloun4 ewweg e ewwep z UO NDEUO0D CUES 99y 1 p09 q ejqeuz suoido oapi Aiepuov9g 99 8q Spo Wl po Bulj dwes J lld UIL 10 09 yoejg api Ndu pJepue s OSpl TANA Ny O ON CO yuejg 44y t yuejg 491 E yuejg woog 7 yuejg doy MOpUIM Ndu BANOV Buijuejg Auepuos9g a JIpy jauueyo JOUULUD XON JQUUBYD SNOIAA p y 207 99 9S O NY nue ul yndy JO S JQUULYY OWEN g0INOS DUAS peoe Je U Aouenba4 AouenbaJ4 H adA pied TN OTTO OR CO OD
32. no OSD on the screen If the error recurs then try resetting the projector by powering OFF and ON again Contact the dealer if the problem persists or if you see a code not listed in Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Error Codes Error Code ltem Description Light Engine Light engine Boot Failure p lt Light engine link error Light engine initialization error Red LED Feedback Failure Green LED Feedback Failure Blue LED Feedback Failure EAN OW N Error on EM network Error on PHM network Error on ArrayLOC link Projector Head Module PHM Fan PHM ED Fan stalled FP 02 PHM FD Fan 2 stalled 03 PHM LMC Fan 1 stalled 04 PHM LMC Fan 2 stalled Electronic Module EM Fan FE EM Fan 1 stalled EM Fan 2 stalled eS Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 6 3 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting CH 1S TIE l Table 6 2 Error Codes Continued OL PHM FD sensor 1 overtemp notcomested OOOO 02 PHM FD Air iner overemp or sensor not neton 0 PHMQDPC board overtemp or sensor not fonctionne 04 PHM FD DMD overemp or sensor nor funcionis 05 PHM QDPC board overtemp or sensor not fonctionne 06 EM Nir inlet overtemp or sensor not foncione 0 EM Nesans ovenemp or sensor not fineoning 08 EM Power supply overtemp or sensor not fonctionne 09 EMLED Driver ovenemp or seror vot fanstionng 10 EManbientovenemp orsesornotfinstoning Ti EMReditiemisr overemp orsensornoinetoning 2 TM Green thermistor overtemp or
33. under which are e EN61000 4 2 ESD e EN61000 4 3 Radiated Immunity e EN61000 4 4 Fast Transient Burst Immunity e EN61000 4 5 Surge Immunity e EN61000 4 6 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances e EN61000 4 8 Magnetic Field Immunity e EN61000 4 11 Voltage Dips Short Interruptions and Voltage Variations Immunity 7 2 Matrix StIM SIM Specifications 7 2 1 Display e Resolution e Brightness e Contrast Ratio e Brightness Uniformity Colors and Gray Scale e Color Wheel e Color Temperature e Native White Color K e Image White Color K e Range of Adjustment K e Color Temp Variation K 7 2 WUXGA 1920 x 1200 600 lumens 75 EBU 10 Full ON Full OFF 1500 1 min Native ANSI 450 1 10 0 lens offset center to corner 90 min With software adjustments 100 Resolution 8 bits Displayable Colors 16 8 million None 6500 500 3200 9300 3200 9600 250 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 7 Specifications 7 3 Lenses LENS 0 637 1 EFFECTIVE WUXGA Throw Ratio Projection range diagonal 1016mm x 2550mm 40 x 100 Lateral color error 0 5 pixels max Geometry distortion 0 1 max FIxED 0 75 1 HD WUXGA Throw Ratio powuxon Projection range diagonal 700mm x 2540mm 28 x 102 ZOOM 1 2 1 6 1 Throw Ratio HD WUXGA 1 2 1 6 Projection range diagonal 1 5 m to 5 4 m 4 92 ft to 17 7 ft Geometry distortion l
34. using the selected Red Part Of Rec 100 RGB Brightness Target Unit spon hin For example if the RGB Brightness Target was set to 47 and the selected RGB Brightness Target Unit was 0 1 ft L then the expected brightness would be Measure the projected white brightness Re 0 Update the White Brightness Adjustment WBA Expected Brightness 47 0 1 4 7 ft L 10 Green Part Ot Bia 0 as follows New WBA Old WBA Expected Brightness Measured Brightness Repeat step 3B until the measured brightness is sufficiently close to the expected brightness 6 13 CHRISTIE 7 7 1 7 1 1 Specifications Regulatory Safety Be aware of the caution label on the projector warning of possible eye hazard if the projected visible and invisible LED radiation light is viewed directly through certain optical instruments at close range The projector is a class 2M source of visible and invisible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard Figure 1 1 LED Caution Label Location on page 1 1 indicates where the label is located e CSA C22 2 No 60950 1 03 First Edition e UL 60950 1 1 Edition e IEC 60950 1 2001 European Norm Safety of Information Technology Equipment 7 1 2 Environmental Regulations e EU Directive 2002 95 EC on the restriction of the uses of certain ha
35. what you asked for Target White Point Bright ColorLOC Array Status The Common Brightness has been calculated by ArrayLOC as the white brightness at the target white color that can be achieved by all projectors 313 329 j lt Target Common Gamut 687 306 193 738 150 34 313 329 4 Target Gamut 800 330 160 800 125 000 Y Flags ProjID Group Int Age Rx Ry RY Gx Gy GY Bx By BY Wx Wy WY 1 211 1 1 283 2 696 8 0 211 1 1 109 9 123 4 2 211 1 1 416 5 778 5 3 211 1 1 343 7 700 9 The Common Gamut has been calculated by ArrayLOC as a gamut and brightness that xN can be achieved by all Projector Capabilites are used by ArrayLOC to projectors determine the Common Gamut and Common Brightness the array can achieve Where possible this gamut is the same as the target gamut and brightness Projector Address helps you identify projectors Only projectors with the same Bright ColorLOC Group Broadcast Interval determines as your projector will appear in Array Status how quickly projectors update except for a projector set to Synchronize All who each other on their capability appears in everyone s Array Status This normally should not be Except where networked projectors must be broken into changed from its default value subgroups this value should not be changed from its default value This gamut is what you get it is what the p
36. 0 Celsius 1 Fahrenheit EXAMPLES LOC LANG 1 Set language to French LOC LANG Get language LOC TEMP 1 Set temperature to Fahrenheit LSH LOGICAL SHUTTER CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Turns OFF the LEDs in the projector to simulate a shutter operation Additionally a white shutter mode is available which allows users to correct a setting which renders the display unusable for example when no visible light is shown in IR modes SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt 0 Normal projection mode 1 Black turns OFF light 2 White correction display EXAMPLES LSH 1 Turn OFF the LEDs LSH Report current logical shutter setting Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 41 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE MCS MENU CASCADING ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enable or disable cascading menus When disabled a single menu level will be displayed at a time SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable or disable cascading EXAMPLES MCS Get the current state of this setting MCS 0 Disable cascading menus MCS 1 Enable cascading menus MDE SERIAL MODE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Set the mode for a serial communications port Set
37. 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix B WebUI B 2 B 2 1 B 2 Secondary Tabs specific to a primary tab located along the bottom of the Main window Primary Tabs located along the top of the Main window Status Indicator displays the overall status of the projector based on the 12 categories of information available NOTE Click the Status Indicator LED to display the Status window and obtain more information about any current errors and warnings See Section B 3 2 Main Tab Status Shutter section contains an Open and Close button Only one is enabled depending on the current state of the projector s shutter The following table describes each area found in the Main window Secondary Input Active Input Window and Main Active Input Window sections are read only Current Status Bar provides information messages according to the current status of the projector Logout button located at the top right corner of the web browser is used to logout you off of the web user interface and the projector OSD On Screen Display section contains an On and Off button Only one is enabled depending on the current state of the projector s on screen display Navigating the Web User Interface V7 0 or Firefox Help Text You can move your mouse pointer over most buttons or fields to display related help information See Figure B 3 To disable this feature click Admin gt System gt Tooltip
38. 2 17 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 2 Installation and Setup CH IS TIE l 2 10 2 18 12 Adjust the geometry Use Table 2 2 as a guide Table 2 2 Recommended order for image setup Flat Straight forward Alignment Complex Geometry Use the options available in Use TWIST software for geometry correction Menu gt Configuration gt Geometry and Color and blending see the TWIST User Manual Edge Blending TWIST Software Blending Black Blending NOTE Do not use black blending if Twist software is used for geometry correction Brightness Uniformity TWIST Software Brightness Uniformity 13 ArrayLOC automatically adjusts projector colors and brightness Ensure that arrayLOC is enabled 14 Some analog sources may require adjustments to Blacklevels and Input Levels System Integration GPIO Connector Seven GPIO pins on the 9 pin D Sub GPIO connector are configured through RS232 commands The other two pins are reserved for ground and power See GPIO Pins for pin identification The cable required for connecting the external device to the projector GPIO connector whether a standard serial cable or a custom one must be compatible with the external device Table 2 3 GPIO Pins PIN NUMBER SIGNAL 12V 200mA GPIO 1 GPIO 2 GPIO 3 Ground GPIO 4 GPIO 5 GPIO 6 GPIO 7 The GPIO connector can be configured to automate any number of events using the serial command code GIO Each pin is d
39. 4 4 4 RGB or YCbCr 4 2 2 The proper sampling mode is determined automatically by the projector you can override this setting Film Mode Detect Enable or disable film motion detection Only available for interlaced or segmented frame sources Chroma Luma Delay Affects any incoming composite or S video signal delaying the luma signal intensity in relation to the chroma color In the image increasing the luma delay will move luma seen as a shadow where colors overlap to the right slightly with colors remaining in place Decreasing this delay will move the shadow slightly to the left If necessary for your current source adjust so that no shadows occur with adjacent colors Adaptive Contrast Dynamically expands the contrast of the output image producing vibrant images with seamless response to scene changes and fades The slide bar adjusts the amount of adaptive contrast to apply with a setting of 0 producing no change Split Screen This control allows a snap shot of the main image to be presented on the right side or lower part of the screen to allow evaluation of advanced image processing features All resizing controls are honoured on both images However image processing controls such as Detail Sharpness Noise Reduction and Adaptive Contrast only happen on the left side or top image Changing inputs channels or test patterns will disable this control PIP operation must be disabled prior to enabling this control
40. AA B 3 BoT M Te Ae I ro e A E E A EEEE EA B 3 Bo Man Poe a A ET E E TE A EA B 3 B 3 3 Tools Tab Virtual OSD sesoessssnessnennnnnennnerererserssssssesssessssessesssssssrsssssssessseessssssssssesessses B 4 vrl OS D M ODU a ER R B 5 BoA Aad ae y e a E E E enema tT ere B 7 Upload a Logo Tik or Gamma FIle escencia E e dt ucauntins B 7 ee AC IU a U E E E E E EE B 8 SE T E T A A EA A EE AE E E E B 8 Perform a Diagnostic Test using Interrogator ccccesessseseecccceceeeceeeeecaeaseeseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeees B 8 Py ig eM Tt SCT eects E ase e cece beaten ated eos E eos E B 9 Created USer IN aime ad PASS OFC resect r E E E EE E B 9 CHGS PASS WONG ci cta sata pis E E E E E E E T B 9 D KEUS a E EEE E E E E E E E B 9 B6 Advanced Tipped Pape RLE verreesorii ier iirin EE E TAAA ET B 9 RTE BUONS serraria EEEE EE E EEA E EATS B 9 Bo rAdd adera Command annesoini i E EEE E E E E ETE E B 12 Bo ADO TAG EID cect E E E E EEEE E E A B 12 C Serial Communication SABEN E C E EE E O EE E E E EO T C 1 C2 Understanding Message Format spiera Ee EE EE TREE EEEE ETE C 1 C2 LBC NES Sae TUC TE EE EE A E C 2 Startand End Of MOSSIGE acca asaciaseaaseneccepnpooneuersuosneinsonsaasansesaqenmoncabacwonesanpueaeanaaneanqunmecmneaees C 2 Pie rie a OPa a E E A EEE C 2 Projector Numbers Optional cccccescessesssesesessesseseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseseseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas C 2 Foncion Code aer a E E tienes C 2 PODC OS e E E E E E E EA E A
41. C 3 Reduce i REPI o VIMO ONS areri vegies alaen eieaatio E E EER C 3 Other special Funcions Oplonal eesesssresess a e EE C 3 Da E E E A A E E E A ET C 3 TiC ALICE CIS easy essence E E E E EAE E E E E aceasta annasiane C 4 2 2 pample Messages and beir Meaning aca sigs ceca tedec tects e nieces teoeeeeeeieue C 4 C22 What is Actually Sentina Message o 0 cccnyisesaisussensoamadndvsamadndstaisatsiguGsediseumebedeswntebedantecdedbee C 5 24 Maximizine Message TNS Ie rceessceasra tienes ewnsencnasisisemansiaedoninn cuss oasnaik sepneauseaneesaeGeneatedseaeeataeenses C 5 C 2 5 Accessing Specific Channels or Inputs geissescnsadapsenvsenasvarssdiacarnvacesasadaaseersenassersidiaseenonceneeaden C 6 2 TON E OO e E E E A A E sae A TA N C 6 C 2 7 Network Operation ccccccccccccccccccceecceceeesssssseeeeeceeccceceeeeeeesaaauausseeseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaas C 7 VERE Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Table of Contents O ADO e EDLE Ad Oh oo E EE E EOE E eee ee C 8 SUD CLAS SSS E A E EEE E AAAA E E C 8 ee TO COMING E E A ER E C 8 MS aa gatas centr as ta sss E E os na gees ante os aa A E E E C 8 D Serial Command Reference Matrix StIM SIM User Manual vii 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE 1 Introduction 1 1 Labels and Marking Observe and follow all warnings and instructions marked on the projector A DANGER Danger symbols indicate a hazardous situation which if not avoided w
42. CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The Brightness control adjusts the offset applied to the Input signal It has exactly the same effect as adjusting the Input levels except that it operates an all 3 colors and can be used to make quick adjustments For precise control the Input level adjustments should be used If the setting is too high black portions of the image are displayed as dark grey making the image appear washed out If the setting is too low dark greys are displayed as deep black and detail is lost in the darkest parts of the image This condition is known as crushing When adjusting start from a lower setting and adjust upwards until just above the point where black is crushed SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the brightness on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 1000 to 1000 MAIN Set the brightness on the main video to the specified value in the range 1000 to 1000 PIIP Set the brightness on the video to the specified value in the range of 1000 to 1000 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 13 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHRISTIE BRT BRIGHTNESS Cont d EXAMPLES BRT 500 Set brightness to 500 on main video BRT MAIN 500 Set brightness to 500 on main video BRT PIUP 250 Set brightness to 250 on video BRT IN32 100 Set brightness to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 BRT Returns th
43. Cancel in these cases Arrow Keys Use the LEFT RIGHT arrow key to change a slidebar value or to select a different option within a drop down list without having to first scroll through options or navigate within a menu drop down list or text box Laser Press LASER to activate the laser pointer on the remote Point the remote at CAUTION the screen to highlight an area of your presentation the LASER pointer LACSEA RADIATION requires batteries in the wired remote to work X pe nee eee LASER DIODE Wavelength 670nm Max Output 1mW CLASS II LASER PRODUCT 3 6 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE 3 2 Navigating the 3 2 1 Main Menu Most of the projector controls are accessed from within the projector menu system There are several groups of related functions with each group selectable from the Main Menu Press MENU at any time to display the Main Menu e Using the IR remote enter the number corresponding to the Function menu you wish to access such as 2 for the Image Settings menu Or use the UP DOWN arrow key on any remote to highlight a desired menu option e With a Function menu displayed enter a desired menu option number or use the UP DOWN arrow key to highlight the desired menu option Menus To select a highlighted menu option press ENTER The corresponding function menu or drop down list showing additional options will display Section 3 Operation Main Menu S
44. ELAS NI ZEZ SU Bey pneg oND lt q suoijdo jndjno 80JNOS doo nd no IIWGH Aouenbas4 uny eels Aejeq ewes eny Aejeaq awesy 39s Bulyoo7 aswel uo eju no ewj UBBJOS O lt O ON suoneslunwwog p jqeu4 HI U0J4 s y jseopeog sBulyjes Jewels Bulnoy YIO N ssolppy 10 f0ld suondo zZZy S IeUes suoido LNO ZEZ Swy enas suoido NI ZEZ SH Iens p m s y LL p jqeu4 pedhey pail OL TNOTWO OR O snu Buipeosey E usas0S ysejd S Z d L nus LL Aouasedsues GSO OL dnjes usas0s ysejds sobessa 101134 Aejdsiq s xog ebessay Jas q Aejdsiq sexog abesseyy oIjewoyny Aejdsiq HUS JedIHS HIUS JE UOZOH uo1 e907 NU N yuo nua ebse7 SODUdIIJIIg NU N 6 8 oND yt oO O aul 3ed wl d SISSY Uey zu w peueN JaMOd uru Jayy Aqpugs 13 U4 uru 24y eBew 4O wn jqeug umopNyYS ny dN 1 MmOd ony o TWO OR lt sBunjes Mewld JOjOD E BdIAIBS A nu w siy ssa00e 0 piomssed BDIAIBS y SouINnbayY GONeIUU PL D0 Tey E sBuljes pled uodo BIIAIBS OL UuOdI eIQIeD 9 sonsoubelg JOJOD 9 AJJOWOSH SUOIJEOIUNWIWOY SOOUIOJBIg Nua aul 3 9d TWO ORK OO jusuebeuey JOM suo do
45. Hide NOTE Help text is not available for a disabled buttons When working with the projector menu system on the Tools tab highlight the menu option and press h CHRISTIE C These sections provide drop down list selections refer to Section 3 Operation for more details F Projector Information section is read only Power section contains an On and Off button Only one is enabled depending on the current powered state of the projector It is not recommended that you use the web browser s navigation functionality 1 e the Back and Forward functions as this will cause you to lose your web connection It is recommended that you navigate using the application interface and related functionality detailed in this section IMPORTANT nternet Explorer V6 0 and V9 0 has known performance issues and is not recommended to be used as the primary web browser for the web user interface It is recommended that you use Internet Explorer Open and Close Shutter 09 58 09 Figure B 3 Help Mouse Over Example Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHKISTIE Appendix B WebUI B 3 Basic Operation This section discusses the primary tabs located along the top of the application window Each primary tab also has related secondary tabs which are located along the bottom of each tab as follows Main Tools About e General e Virtual OSD e Version e Status e License B 3 1 Main Tab General
46. Keano oney yoedsy pjousesy J0 99 8q Ndu J0 09 98q Ae7 INdUY J0 09 98q yedd indy jqeu4 10 09 ebew z 1J4 JaAe7 ASS Uae Se uol eiqijed 9 Soljsoubeig TNO TWO OR OO ZZ7 SU 19497 Ssedoy a OWSY y LNO ZE7 Sy 9427 SSed0y sJoOWEY E NI ZEZ SU 19497 Sseooy a OWSY Z uoljeInByuog OOTOGAeUY LI juswW snipy 10100 peoueApY 9 UOI eINJeES JOIOD PL u194 3 BAB SSBD0V BJOWEY J9Ae7 SS8D0y sJoWSsY ESOUCWIUd 10 09 10 2E4 0 JOSEY Z jqeu4 10 09 L A X Aq syueujsnipy 10109 E14 jyuaujsn py 10109 Nead Z4 snes L SJUSAFZ SUI L H IIV 9918A OL sojl4q e eq esely 6 sjjnejaq Asojoe4 210 S H Q jqeu4 10 09 oyny OL A SHUM X SHUM A eng JOAN SS 99Y JOW Y Y Z uejdyoeg soejdey 9 X njg A Us2I5 X u J A Pee xX Pey spuiy s Aewlld 10109 a oND OR CO E JOJOD 9 Aljawoayy 9g Ol G BBCY 99S suondo ZZp Su lees ZZ7 SY 1090 01d JEWS ZZv SU Spo eas ZZv SUY O4JUOD MO ES ZZv SU 92y pneg oN gD LNO ZEZ SH 1090 01d eEUaS LNO ZE7 SH po ieuas LNO ZEZ SH 104jU0D MO 4 Jenas LNO ZEZ Sy Bey pneg suondo LNO ZEZ Sy enas TNO TF suoijdo NI Z Z Sy leas NI ZEZ SH 1090 Old JeWaS NI ZEZ SUY Spo eas NI ZEZ SY 104 U0D MO 4
47. OF USE EXAMPLES BKY 1 Enable Broadcast Key BKY 0 Disable Broadcast Key BK Y Get current Broadcast key state BLB BLUE BLACK LEVEL CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Blue black level is used to compensate for relative variations in the black levels between Red Green and Blue This is available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting achieves maximum contrast without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each signal SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the blue black level on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 11 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE BLB BLUE BLACK LEVEL Cont d MAIN Set the blue black level on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PIIP Set the blue black level on the video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES BLB 128 Set blue black level to 128 on main video BLB MAIN 128 Set blue black level to 128 on main video BLB PIIP 100
48. ON peak detector PDT 0 Turn OFF peak detector D 48 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference PHP HORIZONTAL POSITION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Sets the horizontal position of the window Specifies where to place the center of the window horizontally on the panel in pixels SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES PHP 100 Set horizontal position to 100 pixels PHP Get horizontal position PHP 100 for example PHS HORIZONTAL SIZE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Sets the size width of the window in pixels The active portion of the Input signal as determined by blanking controls will be scaled to fit into the window The height of the window will be set to maintain the aspect ratio of the image being captured as determined by the vertical stretch control SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES PHS 100 Set size to 100 pixels PHS Get size PHS 100 for example PICTURE IN PICTURE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control enables or disables the picture in picture mode When this control is enabled for the first time the first valid video signal starting at Slot 1 Input 1 is routed to the window If no signals
49. Re type Password i window 3 Type the new password in the Password field 4 Re type the password in the Re type Password field 5 Click Ok to save or Cancel to ignore Delete User 1 Select the user that you wish to remove from the Users window Delete User 2 Click Delete User to open the Delete User window A confirmation re U sure you want to deleted the selected user message appears ves Not 3 Click Yes or No to proceed or ignore the action B 3 6 Advanced Tabbed Page RTE The RTE Real Time Events tab is where you can manage real time events i e add delete edit copy and setup the GPIO as described in the following section RTE Buttons The real time event buttons include the following e Add create a new event e Delete remove one or multiple existing events Delete All remove all events e Edit change or add information for an existing event e Copy clone an existing event e Stop discontinue the event running e GPIO Setup used to configure the GPIO pins as inputs outputs and to set the current state of the output pins Matrix StIM SIM User Manual B 9 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix B WebUI CHRISTIE Add a Scheduled Event Scheduled events include a command or sequence of commands for example PWR1 or PWR1 SHU1 1 Click Add to open the RTE Wizard 2 Select the Scheduled Event tab NOTE The scheduled tab is always selected by default on add RTE Wizar
50. SD and high definition HD serial digital interface SDI signals from 1 of 2 standard definition SD or high definition HD SDI sources Both single link HD and dual link HD signals are accepted The card has two SD HD SDI outputs each of which is loop through for its respective input There are three LEDs on the module faceplate PWR indicates power has been applied and the card is initialized and the two signal LEDs indicate a valid signal has been detected on the respective input Dual SD HD SDI Input 108 313101 01 Video Decoder Input Card This card accepts and decodes standard definition SD video This includes CVBS composite video S Video and component sources This card supports as many as 6 video signals four of them on BNC connectors and 2 on four pin mini DIN connectors Each mini DIN connector accepts one S Video signal The first BNC accepts composite video only while the remaining 3 BNCs can be grouped to allow one of the following combinations e 3 CVBS sources on 4 5 amp 6 e 1 CVBS source 1 S Video source Luma Y connected to 4 Sy and Chroma C connected to 6 Sc e 1 YPbPr source component signal on 4 Pr 5 Y amp 6 Pb The video decoder input card has 8 LED indicators The PWR LED indicates that the module is installed properly and has been successfully configured The YPbPr LED indicates that a valid component signal has been detected on inputs 4 5 and 6 Component input grouping must al
51. The controls on the InfraRGB Target amp Adjustments menu can then be used to set the target IR brightness and target IR weight You can do this by adjusting the Manual IR Power setting or by using IRLOC NOTE When using Simultaneous RGB IR or Interleaved RGB IR modes you must not be displaying a test pattern We recommend that you provide a video source with a test pattern so that you can configure IRLOC with interleaved mode turned on Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Interleaved mode In Interleaved mode 2 separate input sources are used one source will provide the video data for visible content and the second will provide the video data for IR The 2 streams of video data are interleaved one visible frame is followed by one IR frame This is used to merge 2 60Hz inputs into an interleaved video stream running at 120Hz When running in Interleaved mode the overall brightness will drop by half given equivalent settings since half of the display time is used to display the visible frame and the other half the IR frame Interleaved mode setup 1 Connect the video source for the main channel RGB data Setup an input channel for this video source For more information see Creating a New Channel on page 3 12 and 3 4 1 Automatic Image Setup on page 3 16 2 Connect the video source for the secondary channel IR data Setup an input channel for this video source For
52. The projector has been dropped or the shipping case if applicable is badly damaged Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 5 Maintenance 5 3 6 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE The projector is a class 2M source of visible and invisible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard Table 5 1 Maintenance Guide Projection Lens As required Clean A small amount of dust on the lens has very little effect on picture quality Clean only if absolutely necessary To clean Moisten a clean not reused lint free cloth with a high quality optical cleaning fluid Wipe the cloth in a single continuous motion across the lens surface Discard the cloth after cleaning Use compressed air to remove any particles remaining on the lens Do not use a cleaning solvent that contains ammonia Avoid lens contact with Xylene and Ether External Projector Covers As required Clean Clean dust from external covers using a clean lint free cotton cloth as required NOTE Before cleaning the modules it is recommended that you install the lens cap This will keep dust particles from settling on the glass surface of the lens 5 4 Light Module Replacement Do not service the projector while it is still connected There are exposed voltages that could cause severe phy
53. This setting is similar to the White Brightness Adjustment in the ColorLOC settings Use the ArrayLOC Status to view the IR brightness and make adjustments as necessary Setting Up for InfraRGB There are 3 modes that InfraRGB can operate in e Simultaneous RGB IR Main the RGB and IR signals are both taken from the main input e Interleaved RGB Main IR Secondary the RGB signal is taken from the main input and the IR signal is taken from the secondary input e Interleaved RGB IR Main RGB IR Secondary both RGB and IR signals are taken from both channels Simultaneous RGB IR Mode In simultaneous mode a single source of video data is used to generate both visible content and IR The IR LED is turned on during the visible frame and control is provided to determine how much the LED should be turned on for the red green and blue portions of the image IRLOC can change the IR drive levels but cannot change the IR gain of the video inputs This is because the RGB video source is shared with ColorLOC which takes precedence Simultaneous mode setup l A a a i Set up the Main Input channel See Creating a New Channel on page 3 12 and 3 4 1 Automatic Image Setup on page 3 16 Select Enable InfraRGB from the Configuration gt InfraRGB menu Select Simultaneous RGB IR Main from the InfraRGB Source Sequence list Select the lighting mode appropriate for your application using the Selected Lighting Mode list
54. a lighting mode from the Selected Lighting Mode drop down list 3 Ifyou want to change the lighting mode select the Configure Lighting Mode menu NOTES 1 Day light is 100 brightness of the RGB factor of the video source and 100 brightness of the IR factor 2 To change the level of brightness of the lighting modes see Change Brightness Levels of the Light Modes on page 3 68 Adjust IR Brightness Only The InfraRGB menu is used to set when and how IR is activated for projector pixels If the simulated IR does not look quite right when you have night vision goggles on you can change the brightness of the IR without affecting the brightness of the RGB by using this menu 1 From the InfraRGB menu choose InfraRGB Target amp Adjustments 2 Choose InfraRGB Preset and then choose a Preset option 3 Press MENU to exit Change Brightness Levels of the Light Modes 1 From the InfraRGB menu choose Configure Lighting InfraRGB Mode 2 Choose the desired mode from the Selected Lighting Mode drop down list Configure Lighting Mode 100 0 100 0 3 Ifyou want to base the settings on another mode choose Copy Lighting Mode From and select another mode from the drop down list 4 Change the brightness factors RGB Brightness and IR Brightness 5 Press MENU to exit NOTE 7o reset the modes to their default values from the Configure Lighting Mode menu choose Reset Current Lighting Mode to Default or Reset All Li
55. are also color coded and reflect the direction of the change or For example if the measured red is 660 325 and the Common Gamut value is 640 330 then the measured x is high High X while the measured y is low Low Y The corresponding quadrant of the RED guide indicates G increase green to correct the mismatch with other projectors R G R Lowy Fig G G R Figure 3 26 Red Green Blue and White Color Adjustment Guides High E B B Some corrections require both red and green adjustments Alternative decrease blue B instead of increasing red and green 3Alternative increase blue B and increase green G instead of decreasing red and increasing green 3 60 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation InfraRGB The InfraRGB menu lets you set up the IR projection capabilities of the Matrix StIM projector _ Enable InfraRGB m NOTE The InfraRGB and IRLOC settings are not 3 Main Input Dual Link DVI Input Card Slot 1 Inputi available on the Matrix SIM projector Configuration infraRGB Secondary Input i Dual Link DVI Input Card Slot 1 Input 1 Enable InfraRGB Select to enable the display of IR according to the InfraRGB setup options InfraRGB Source Sequence Select from the drop down _ Configure Lighting Mode list to set how IR is generated from the input source s InfaRGB Target amp Adjustments Select one of thes
56. are present the first available Slot Input combination is selected and image transition effects seamless switching both require resources to configure a second image processing path Therefore these two features cannot be active at the same time SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt 0 Disables 1 Enables EXAMPLES 0 Disables video 1 Enables video Returns the state of the control i e 1 enabled Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 49 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE PJH PROJECTOR HOURS CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Reports the number of hours elapsed on the projector This control is read only SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PJH Returns hours elapsed on projector PNG PING CONTROL GROUP Configuration SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Status DESCRIPTION This command returns basic projector information to the user which includes the type of device amp main software version Note that some devices have multiple CPUs each with its own software version Only the software version of what is considered to be the master CPU is returned here The return parameters are Type Major Minor Beta The beta value is optional meaning it is an engineering build and has not been validated NOTE List of devices 40 ACT 41 Cinema 42 CinemaMin
57. at the midpoint on the bottom edge STDC Enable the advanced curve settings OVLP Enables or Disables edge blending overlap control This more will make the active portion of the Blend zone very obvious and is intended to make setup easier EXAMPLES EBL LFTW100 Set edge blending left width EBL LFTW Get edge blending left width EBL SLCT1 Use standard edge blending mode EBL OVLP1 Enables edge blending overlap mode EME ERROR MESSAGE ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control enables the displaying of error messages and determines to which interface the messages are sent Error messages can be turned off or can be displayed on the screen sent out the serial port or both This setting does not affect messages for invalid user entries for which error messages are always displayed Valid values are 0 Off 1 Screen 2 Serial ports 3 All SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES EME Get current Error Message Enable state EME 1 Direct error messages to the screen D 24 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference ESM EM STEALTH MODE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Stealth mode extinguishes LEDs on the Electronics Module Typically this is used in simulation environments where e
58. automatically redefined as 07 Enter 07 to use this channel If you press any non numbered key the next sequential number is assigned as the new value Press EXIT to cancel editing of numerical values Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 9 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 3 3 3 1 3 10 Using Inputs and Channels The projector allows you to define store and recall up to 99 different channels customized setups or configurations for a variety of inputs Each physical source connection 1 e input at the projector can have several different channels associated with it e Slot refers to an input card installed in the projector There are 4 input card slots e Input refers to both the physical connector on the input card and to the media source connected to it Each Input card can have one or more inputs e Channel refers to the setup parameters for a media source input The parameters include the slot and input input type and input resolution NOTE See 2 3 Connecting Sources on page 2 7 for a full explanation of how to connect sources to the projector Inputs An input is a input source physically connected to the projector Input describes the source signal and the input slot 1 4 to which it is connected Switching Inputs To select an input using the IR remote Press the INPUT key to display the Main Input window which shows the currently available input signal for each of the 4
59. b Projector lamps See Christie s separate lamp program policy c Damage caused by use of a projector lamp beyond the recommended lamp life or use of a lamp supplied by a supplier other than Christie d Problems caused by combination of the product with non Christie equipment such as distribution systems cameras video tape recorders etc or use of the product with any non Christie interface device e Damage caused by misuse improper power source accident fire flood lightning earthquake or other natural disaster f Damage caused by improper installation alignment or by product modification if by other than a Christie authorized repair service provider g For LCD projectors the warranty period specified applies only where the LCD projector is in normal use Normal use means the LCD projector is not used more than 8 hours a day 5 days a week For any LCD projector where normal use is exceeded warranty coverage under this warranty terminates after 6000 hours of operation h Failure due to normal wear and tear PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE Preventative maintenance is an important part of the continued and proper operation of your product Please see the Maintenance section for specific maintenance items as they relate to your product Failure to perform maintenance as required and in accordance with the maintenance schedule specified by Christie will void the warranty CH IS TIE Table of Contents 1 Introdu
60. backing up files web UI 8 baud rate 34 Black Level Blending menu 43 black level blending procedure 43 45 black levels 24 blanking secondary window 71 Blanking menu 19 blending edges 42 blending see edge blending black level blending block artifact reduction 28 boresight alignment 16 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 bright color group 52 Bright ColorLOC Configuration menu 49 bright colorLOC mode 48 brightness 21 See also arrayLOC configuration black level blending 43 45 bright key 4 Brightness Uniformity menu 39 brightness uniformity adjusting 40 brightness threshold warning 50 brightness uniformiity disabling 40 Brightness target adjusting 58 broadcast keys 36 broadcasting 6 C cascading menus 34 Channel Edit menu 15 channel key 4 Channel Setup menu 13 channels see inputs and channels check me 7 12 chroma luma delay video options 23 clamp location 25 clear adjustments 53 clearance projector installation 2 color enable 46 color settings See also array LOC Color Settings menu 29 interactions 72 color space 21 color video options 23 Communications menu 34 configuration See also arrayLOC configuration 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets menu 38 Advanced Diagnostics menu 47 Advanced Edge Blending menu 42 Black Level Blending menu 43 blending edges 42 Brightness Uniformity menu 39 Communications menu 34 Configuration menu 30 Diagnostics and Calibration menu 46
61. black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each signal SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the green black level on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 MAIN Set the green black level on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PIIP Set the green black level on the main video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES GNB 128 Set green black level to 128 on main video GNB MAIN 128 Set green black level to 128 on main video GNB PIIP 100 Set green black level to 100 on main video GNB IN32 100 Set green black level to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 GNB Returns the current green black level value on main video GNB PIIP Returns the current green black level value on video GNB IN12 Returns the current green black level value on Slot 1 Input 2 D 30 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference GND GREEN DRIVE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The green drive level is used to compensate for different amounts of attenuation between the
62. column shows the projector Bright Color group The WBA column shows the projector white brightness adjustment The Rx Ry and RY columns show the projector red CIE 1931 x CIE 1931 y and CIE 1931 Y capability The Y capability is the product of the projector Y grossed up intensity and its current red duty cycle on time The Gx Gy GY Bx By and BY columns show the projector green and blue capability The Wx Wy and WY show the projector white capability The projector white capability is calculated as the sum of the red green and blue capability scaled by the projector current duty cycle Array Status Filter Use this option to specify which projectors are included in the ArrayLOC Status report ArrayLOC Configuration e Group Min Capability includes projectors in the array that meet targets e Group includes all projectors in the ArrayLOC group e None includes all the projectors detected in the ArrayLOC network ArrayLOC ArrayLOC N etwork ArrayLOC Configuration ArrayLOC Network Select the projector to projector communication network configuration for all Ethernet messages T SiE ee Te PeT Correct Saas A related to ArrayLOC functions including ee 4 ArrayLOC messages and BCLOC messages lt lt bored EM Network All Ethernet messages related to 000 yo ArrayLOC flow through the EM Network port of Synchronize RGB Brightness the PHM EM Network EM Network PHM Network EM Networ
63. currently connected _ TCP Port 3002 This address will overwrite any previous IP address Spey 255 255 254 0 such as the projector factory defined default It takes approximately 10 seconds for the projector to respond Gateway 192 168 232 1 1 l 44 1234567890 at its new address Hostname n i Domain name TCP Port On some Ethernet networks firewall restrictions may require that the port number of the projector be changed from its default of 3002 If so enter a new valid port number here It is highly recommended not to use a port below 1000 as these ports are typically reserved for and used by common IP applications Subnet Mask Subnet Mask determines the subnet mask for the IP address and must be set manually Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway used to reach any non local IP addresses it must be set manually Host Name Set the hostname for the device Domain Name Set the domain for the device Mac Address Displays the MAC address of the projector read only Broadcast Keys Use Broadcast Keys to relay all key presses received by the projector to all other projectors on the network Front IR Enabled Check this option to enable the front IR sensor Wired Keypad Enabled Check this option to use the wired keypad 3 36 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Geometry amp Color Configuration From the Configuration menu sele
64. display functions have dedicated keys on the IR remote For example press CONTRAST to access the contrast slide bar Press EXIT to return to your presentation 2 To hide direct slide bars disable the Display Slide bars check box in the Menu Preferences menu 3 To hide the entire menu system from view turn OFF the on screen display by pressing OSD then the DOWN Arrow Key Automatic Image Setup Auto setup is a good first step in setting up the image Press AUTO on the remote This optimizes critical display parameters such as size position pixel tracking etc based on the type of incoming source An auto setup can save considerable setup time and you can still adjust the image as described below The best auto setup will be obtained under the following conditions e Input levels It is best to have an image with saturated very bright colors e Phase High contrast edges are needed To determine active window size e Video images should have whites and blacks in the image e Wide range video images should have content including white that extends to all edges of the image Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation 3 4 2 Main Menu gt Size and Position Menu Increase or decrease the size of your image change its proportion aspect ratio move the image to a specific area of the screen and refine other related parameters Use Size and Position controls to match the imag
65. e sapere ae SS ss CECA C LN Gm Ci ES g Z i i a a p 7 a Coco oO a 1 we Y a l gle a i o leljel __ CATS devices T5 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 2 11 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 2 Installation and Setup CH IS TIE i 2 6 2 Mixed Network In the mixed network the controller can communicate with the first projector and the command can be relayed to each serially connected projector This configuration is useful if you are using a non RS232 controller with the RS232 linking available between these projectors The example shows both an RS422 compatible controller and an Ethernet connected PC for working with a network of projectors linked using their RS232 in out ports e Connect the controller to one projector e A standard CATS Ethernet cable between the controller or Ethernet hub and the Ethernet port on the Electronic Module e An RS 422 serial cable between the PC and the RS422 IN pictured Connect a serial cable between the RS232 OUT connector of the first projector Electronics Module and the RS232 IN connector of the next projector Electronics Module Connect the remaining projectors RS232 communication cables must be good quality and no more than 25 feet in length If you connected the controller using an Ethernet cable set the IP address in Configuration gt Communications gt Ethernet Settings See Ethernet Settings on page 3 36 Set the serial
66. engine 47 text size see large menu font texture enhancement 28 throw distance 5 Tiling Setup menu 44 tiling frame lock 45 tint video options 23 tri level 25 troubleshooting 1 turn off image after 32 U unpacking 3 user administration web UI 9 User White 58 Vv ventilation installation 1 vertical position 19 Video Options menu 22 video standards 22 W warning brightness threshold 50 warning gamut threshold 50 Index warning enable 50 warnings and error messages 1 web user interface Web UI 1 white brightness adjustment 54 white color temperature 52 white adjust projector array colors 58 White target adjusting using User presets 58 wired keypad enabled 36 X xy values 51 Index 3 O0O00 1018 13 0383 ASSY TECH DOCS StiM SIM Corporate offices Worldwide offices USA Cypress United Kingdom Eastern Europe ph 714 236 8610 ph 44 118 977 8000 ph 36 0 147 48 100 Canada Kitchener France Middle East ph 519 744 8005 ph 33 0 1 41 21 00 36 ph 971 0 4 299 7575 Germany Spain ph 49 2161 664540 ph 34 91 633 9990 Singapore ph 65 6877 8737 Beijing ph 86 10 6561 0240 Shanghai ph 86 21 6278 7708 ES For the most current technical documentation please visit www christiedigital com Japan ph 81 3 3599 7481 South Korea ph 82 2 702 1601 CHRISTIE
67. frame SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE STAT Retrieve the actual minimum frame delay EXAMPLES FRD 1500 Delay 1 5 frames FRD STAT Retrieve actual minimum frame delay FRF FREE RUN FREQUENCY CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This controls sets the output video vertical frequency SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the output vertical frequency used when running in Free Run mode See FLE Frame Lock Enable Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 27 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE FRF FREE RUN FREQUENCY Cont d EXAMPLES FRF 5000 Set free run frequency to 50 Hz FRF Get free run frequency FRZ FREEZE IMAGE CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Freeze the display image This allows a detailed examination of a single frame of an otherwise moving image Switching channels Inputs automatically switches the projector to unfrozen SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Freeze or un freeze the main image 1 freeze 0 unfreeze PIIP Freeze or un freeze the main image 1 freeze 0 unfreeze EXAMPLE FRZ MAIN 1 Freeze the main image GAM GAMMA CORRECTION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The Gamma Correction control is used to correct ambient conditions affecting the d
68. integrity insert one or two special characters before the 3 character Function code Table C 2 Special Description Character Simple Acknowledgment which will cause a character to be sent back from the projector when it has finished processing the message See C 2 4 Maximizing Message Integrity Full Acknowledgment which will cause an echo of the message as a reply to be sent back from the projector when it has finished processing the message See C 2 4 Maximizing Message Integrity Checksum which will allow a checksum to be put as the last parameter in the message for verification at the projector See C 2 4 Maximizing Message Integrity Projector Numbers Optional To control a selected projector or controller within a group include its assigned number or address just before the 3 character ASCII Function code See C 2 7 Network Operation Function Code The projector function you wish to work with such as channel selection or gamma is represented by a 3 character ASCII code A Z upper or lowercase This Function code appears immediately after the leading left bracket that starts the message In messages sent to the projector that do not have a Subcode a space between the Function code and the first parameter or special character is optional C 2 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Appendix C Serial Communication Subcode The projector function you wish to work
69. intensity matches that of the brightest blended region the center of all images when blending a 2 x 2 display is the target area 5 You can choose which of the next 4 options Top Bottom Left Right to use depending on which edge of the projector you are working with has been edge blended The blend width can be adjusted to line up properly but by default it corresponds to the edge blending setting determined for that edge 6 The brightness and black hues of the blended region can be adjusted in more detail in case fine tuning is needed may be necessary only for blending a 2 x 2 projector display because of blending differences for the sides and center NOTES 1 The menu options vary depending on the edge blending parameters 2 You may need to re adjust the black level brightnesses following the overlap adjustments on each blended edge 3 When adjusting 6 or more projectors you need to ensure that the hue and brightness of each target area is matched at closely as possible Tiling Setup Image tiling allows a single input image to be spread f i f Geometry amp Color over multiple screens with each screen displaying a i fraction of the image Matrix StIM projectors support sang Sep up to a 2 x 2 tiled array while Matrix SIM projectors E support up to a 3 x 3 array for example 1 x 2 3 x 1 or _ Total Rows 1 2 x 3 _ Total Columns 1 Projectors are numbered from left to right left column _ Row 1 and from top
70. interconnection label is available for reference on the light module Sources are connected to the Input Panel located at the top of the EM The Input Panel has slots for one image processor board and up to four input cards The input cards are hot swappable they can be plugged in and out while the projector is running The image processor should only be replaced when the projector is OFF or when it is in STANDBY mode The video card that is installed in your projector determines the type of video source you can use These video cards are supported e High Definition Multimedia Interface Twin HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface e Analog BNC e Dual SD HD SDI Serial Digital Interface e Dual Link DVI e Video Decoder These cards slide into any of the available option slots One or more of the option slots may be used with any combination of option cards including multiples of the same card type Up to 2 active inputs can be displayed at any time either from one card or from 2 cards These 2 inputs can be routed to outputs or to the main or secondary video image NOTE Use only high quality shielded cables for all connections LEDS LEDs are located on the faceplate of each input card and indicate the following e Power ON Green e Signal Valid Green e Signal Invalid OFF DVI Digital Video Use the DVI I connector to connect either analog or digital video devices to the projector Use a cable with DVI I connectors at both en
71. menu for the channel being used by main INM C001 0 Hide in menu for channel 1 D 36 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference IRC INFRARGB COEFFICIENTS CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Configures how IR is generated from RGB The settings allow for either a factor or offset There are a number of preset configurations and four user settings The preset configurations cannot be modified they default to factory settings The control subcodes provide access to all the presets For subcodes that are preset configuration specific substitute the preset code for small x in the subcode A All Channels User 1 Red Channel User 2 Green Channel User 3 Blue Channel User 4 6500K Equivalent Alias to selected table IR Only NOTE The offsets in projector software versions prior to 1 3 9 have been renamed to manual power controls their meaning remains the same The original controls are present but their use is deprecated SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE IRGB Selects preset 1 All Channels 2 Red channel 3 Green channel 4 Blue channel 5 6500K Equivalent 6 IR Only 7 User 1 8 User 2 9 User 3 10 User 4 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 37 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE IRC INFRARGB COEFFICIENTS Cont d EXAMPLES IRC IRGB 1 s
72. period or Activation time out EXAMPLES ASH 1 Turns ON Auto Shutdown Mode ASH 0 Turns OFF Auto Shutdown Mode ASH SBTO 10 Sets standby time out to 10 minutes ASH ALTO 10 Sets source activity loss time out to 10 minutes ASR AUTO CHANNEL SELECT CONTROL GROUP Channel SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The Auto Channel Select ASR option allows the projector to select the channel memory best suited to the Input signal If the current channel does not allow Auto Channel Select the projector will not attempt to select a new channel when the signal changes If the current channel does allow Auto Channel Select then upon signal detection an existing channel will be chosen If a match is not found a new channel will be created Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 7 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE ASR AUTO CHANNEL SELECT Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE COxx Enable disable Auto Channel Select on channel xx channel number from 01 to 99 MAIN Enable disable Auto Channel Select on the channel being used by main PIIP Enable disable Auto Channel Select on the channel being used by main EXAMPLES ASR Get Auto Channel Select state for channel being used by main ASR MAIN Get Auto Channel Select state for channel being used by main ASR PIIP Get Auto Channel Select state for channel being used by main ASR 1 E
73. picture in picture video EXAMPLES SIN 12 Set main video to Slot 1 Input 2 SIN MAIN 45 Set main video to Slot 4 Input 5 SIN PIIP 21 Set picture in picture video to Slot 2 Input 1 SIN Get the current main video Input SIN 12 SIN MAIN Get the current main video Input SIN MAIN 12 SIN PIIP Get the current picture in picture video Input SIN PIIP 21 SIZ SIZE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This controls how much the projector will electronically expand or shrink the image It will expand contract the image in both the vertical and horizontal directions so that the aspect ratio will not change 1000 is the neutral position where no resizing is done Scale value 1000 The horizontal scaling of the image is always to exactly this value but the vertical scale is also controlled by the VST control which stretches the image vertically When size is changed on video nothing will visually happen It gets saved in the s channel and will be applied the next time that channel is on main video SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the size for the main image EXAMPLES SIZ 500 Set size to 500 on main video SIZ Returns the size value on main video SMP SAMPLING MODE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control sets the color sampling mode for a digital signal t
74. projector operation once it is properly installed aligned and configured by a Christie accredited service technician You can access projector controls and settings with the IR remote or with a laptop using the web interface This chapter focuses on the use of the IR remote and the projector menus For information about accessing the same functionality through the web interface see Appendix B Web User Interface on page B 1 Using the IR Remote AnA e Laser radiation is emitted from the laser diode in the remote DO NOT look directly into the beam of the laser The standard IR remote can be used as a wired or wireless control Under optimal conditions the wireless keypad can communicate with a projector over a 100 foot distance In wireless mode the standard IR remote communicates with the projector with a battery powered infrared IR transmitter Use the standard IR remote the same way you would use a remote control supplied with a TV or DVD player When pressing a function key direct the standard IR remote toward the projector s front IR sensor The IR sensor on the projector will detect the signal and relay the commands for internal processing A laser pointer is built into the standard IR remote See 3 7 7 IR Remote on page 3 2 Keep these guidelines in mind Press keys one at a time there are no simultaneous key combinations required NOTE To use Power Shutter and OSD functions press the appropriate button and then press th
75. row number of this projector CVAL Set the column number of this projector EXAMPLES TIL SLCT 1 Enable tiling TIL RTOT 2 Set the total number of rows of projectors to 2 TIL CTOT 2 Set the total number of columns of projectors to 2 TIL RVAL 2 Set the projector to be in the 2nd row TIL CVAL 1 Set the projector to be in the Ist column TMD TIME DATE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Admin DESCRIPTION Set the date time or time zone SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE DATE Set the date in the form yyyy mm dd Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 67 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE TMD TIME DATE TIME Set the local time in the form hh mm ss NOTE Time must be set using a 24 hour clock regardless of LOC TIME setting EXAMPLES TMD TIME 17 50 45 Set new local time TMD DATE 2007 02 30 Set the local date TMD TIME Get local time TMD TIME 17 50 45 TNT TINT CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Tint adjusts the balance of red to green in your image It is useful only for video images processed by decoder cards SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the tint level on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 45 deg to 45 deg MAIN Set the tint level on the main video to the specified value in the range 45 deg to 45 deg PIIP Set the t
76. signal to be passed to the Output ports of the HDMI Input module when the unit is in Standby mode 3 4 8 Main Menu gt Language Use this drop down list to select a language for the menu system 3 4 9 Main Menu gt Test Pattern Steps forward through all internal test patterns After stepping past the last test pattern you will return to the current input 3 4 10How Color Settings Interact in a StIM Array 3 72 Image Settings gt Color Space tells the projector how to interpret video data coming in See Color Space on page 3 21 Image Settings gt Advanced Image Settings gt Color Settings adjusts the color temperature Use ArrayLOC color and color temperature settings instead When enabled ArrayLOC overrides the settings on the Color Settings menu See Color Settings on page 3 29 Configuration gt Geometry amp Color gt Manual RGB Adjustment is the manual way to set the levels of each LED These adjustments are available when ArrayLOC is OFF or set to Fixed mode When ArrayLOC is set to Cool or Bright mode LED levels are controlled by ArrayLOC function automatically Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target tells the projector what you expect to see on the screen This is the recommended way to control the color space for the projector and array See Array Color Target on page 3 43 This menu 1s also available under Configuration gt Geometry amp Color Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Projector Color Adjus
77. that was tuned Repeat this procedure for each projector that appears to not match the others in the array CHAISTIE Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE 6 6 10Array Status Decoder amp Setting the RGB Brightness Target Unit ArrayLOC Array Status Decoder To display the Array Status page Go to the Main gt Configuration 4 gt ArrayLOC 13 gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration 3 menu Select the Array Status menu item Flags help you identify which projectors are affecting the Common Gamut and Common Brightness lt Target alerts you that the Common Gamut is smaller than the Target Gamut W projector white brightness capability is less than Target Brightness i M JE a The Target Gamut is set in the w projector white brightness capability is 14 Select White Point por White j Array Color Target menu determining Common Brightness r g b projector red green or blue color is making a It consists of target Be hy CO the Common Gamut red green or blue primary Acomoda kendte ordinates target white co color less saturated than the target primary Number of ordinates and a target white F projectors in the RGB brightness projector set to Synchronize Group array e F 2 with same Bright l l projector set to Synchronize All ColorLOC Group This gamut Is U A
78. the Auto Input Levels option NOTE Do not use Auto Input Levels for dark images 6 Exit the Input Levels menu Exiting the Input Levels menu automatically disables Auto Input Levels and Auto Color Enable Auto Color Enable When a check mark is present select a specific black level or drive will automatically enable the corresponding color in the display Delete the check mark to see all colors or to enable a different specific color through the Color Enable control Clamp Location Clamp Location brightens the image produced from certain high resolution high frequency graphic sources The projector automatically selects the best clamp location for most sources Use the normal Back Porch location if the image is either sufficiently bright or overly bright Select Syne Tip if the image appears unusually dim if there are horizontal streaks across the image or if there is significant color drift This moves the clamping pulse from the normal back porch location which is likely too short to the tip of the horizontal sync pulse Tri Level is typically needed for an HDTV source Input Peak Detector Input Peak Detector is a tool to assist with defining individual input levels enabling you to accurately set the input levels for any particular source with the appropriate image Enabling the peak detector activates a special operating mode for detecting only pixels that are considered black or white All other levels are displayed as a mid lev
79. the Wagon Use all characters as desired except for the following special characters shown in the left column below These special characters require a 2 character combination See C 2 2 Sample Messages and their Meaning Table C 3 Special Characters for Text If you want this Enter this Description a a a SS C 2 2 Sample Messages and their Meaning C 4 Table C 4 Sample Messages and Their Meaning For a Single Projector Code Data SET set contrast of main image to 500 CON500 Code Subcode Data SET set contrast of image to 500 CON PIIP500 Code REQUEST what is current contrast CON Code Subcode REQUEST what is contrast of image CON PIIP Code Data REPLY contrast is 64 CON 64 Code Subcode Data REPLY contrast is 64 CON PIIP 64 Code Data SET AND ACKNOWLEDGE MESSAGE message processed CON64 amp Code Subcode Data Checksum SET WITH CHECKSUM amp CON64 240 For a Specific Projector within a Network with 1 Controller present Dest Addr Code Data SET turn projector 5 on Spwrl Dest Addr Code Data SET AND ACKNOWLEDGE MESSAGE message processed ffr55 5pwrl For a Specific Projector within a Network with Multiple Controllers present Dest Addr Src Code REQUEST get contrast from projector 5 to controller 2 5 2con Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Appendix C Serial Communication For
80. the lighting conditions are unsuitable for proper IR transmission To use the wired remote make sure that wired remote support is enabled on the projector the remote is connected to Main Menu gt Configuration gt Communications gt Wired Keypad Enabled To use the wired remote to control multiple projectors in an ArrayLOC network ensure that wired remote support is enabled on the controlling projector and make sure that key synchronization is enabled on the controlling projector and on all the receiving projectors Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Configuration gt Synchronize Keys Test Pattern Color Enable NOTE Batteries are not required for the wired remote projector controls to operate however if the laser pointer is required batteries must be installed in the remote 3 1 3 IR Remote Commands Specific keypad commands are explained in 3 17 7 IR Remote on page 3 2 The projector is a class 2M source of visible and invisible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard Power ON OFF Press and hold POWER for 2 seconds or press twice quickly to turn the projector ON or OFF Or press and release POWER followed immediately by pressing the UP arrow key ON or DOWN arrow key OFF to guarantee the correct action This is useful if you are unsure of the prese
81. to bottom Top row 1 oe On each projector you must set the following e The tiling array size sets the total rows and total columns This setting will be the same on all the projectors in the array e The relative location of the projector within the array sets the row number and column number for each projector e Tiling can be enabled or disabled by selecting the Tiling Setup check box and you will not lose any of the above settings The features that act differently when tiling is enabled are The PIP border is disabled Cascading menus are turned OFF Menus show only 5 items with a scroll bar to allow the rest of the menu items to be reached Keystone and Warp are not supported with Tiling enabled Projector source switching in the array is not synchronized Therefore some latency can be seen from when the commands are issued to each projector causing switching to not be as seamless when in a tiling configuration When using loop through with the Twin HDMI Input Card to distribute a signal to the tiling array additional latency in the switching can occur during HDCP repeater negotiations with the source player NOTE When the FUNC HELP key combination is pressed the tiling settings will be cleared Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Tiling and Frame Lock Issues If while using tiling you find that some screens are displaying black when they should be displaying Section 3
82. video CSP PIIP 1 Set color space to YPbPr SDTV on main video CSP IN32 1 Set color space to YPbPr SDTV on Slot 3 Input 2 CSP Returns the current color space value on main video CSP PIIP Returns the current color space value on main video CSP IN12 Returns the current color space value on Slot 1 Input 2 D 20 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference DED DUAL DVI EDID TYPE SELECTION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the preferred EDID Timings on the Dual DVI Input card Available Models are 0 Default 1 3D 2 Custom NOTE 3D option 1 is not supported for Entero or Matrix StIM SIM SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLxy Set the EDID timings on Slot x to the specified type EXAMPLES DED SL31 2 Set EDID type to 2 Custom on Slot 3 Input 1 DED SL12 Returns the current EDID type on Slot 1 Input 2 DLG DATA LOGGING CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set data logging level 0 Minimal logging of activities Logging system errors warnings and events 1 e power ON OFF lamp ON OFF user login logout 1 Normal logging Most activities logged errors warnings events and other info 2 Debug logging All activities are logged SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt There are 3 levels for da
83. will automatically enter power Standby mode EM Stealth Mode Check this option to operate the projector with the status LED display on the EM module turned off The status LED is turned OFF during operation only In standby mode the status LED displays codes normally NOTE Option card LEDs on the EM remain visible Fan Assist Normal cooling uses temperature sensors to regulate fan speed Fan Assist enables full speed fan operation on the Light Module LM when operating in high ambient temperatures or for long periods This may help to reduce thermal problems and may prevent an emergency shutdown for thermal safety reasons Fan assist increases noise levels due to the simultaneous full speed operation of the fans Date amp Time The current year month day hour minute second Changes made reset the projector real time clock 3 32 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Menu Preferences Configuration Adjust the appearance content and or location of on screen menus and messages Menu Preferences Large Menu Font gs Large Menu Font _ Menu Location Custom Select to enlarge menus and their text Adjust L 3 Horizontal Shift 12 the Menu Location to accommodate the Vertical Shit eo increased menu area l l Display Automatic Message Boxes m Menu Location Display User Message Boxes d Use the drop down list to choose a pre defined defau
84. you have reduced the power for the Red part of Red to 240 the brightest red can get is 240 using an RGB brightness of 100 Set the IR intensity for IR content by specifying the power level Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Configure Lighting Mode Menu The Configure Lighting Mode menu lets you set the brightness factors that are used to calculate the brightness of the RGB and IR displayed in the various lighting modes Default values for each lighting mode are listed as RGB brightness and IR brightness factors see Table 3 6 Selected Lighting Mode Allows the user to select a lighting mode one of e Daylight e Urban e Semi urban e Moonlight e Half moon e Quarter moon e Starlight e Cloudy starlight e IR only e User RGB Brightness Section 3 Operation infraRGB Configure Lighting Mode 100 0 100 0 Controls the overall RGB brightness by globally adjusting the red green and blue LED power IR Brightness Controls the IR brightness by adjusting the power to the IR LED Selected RGB Curve Allows the user to select an RGB curve one of Linear Gain Gamma Power or Custom RGB Curve Parameter A B C Allows the user to customize the RGB curve function Typically users will not change these settings Selected IR Curve Allows the user to select an IR curve one of Linear Gain Gamma Power or Custom IR Curve Parameter A B C Allows the user to custom
85. you select a direct input SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3 or SLOT 4 the projector searches for any existing channels that match the input and signal parameters this only occurs if Auto Source is enabled on these channels If no match to the incoming input signal is found in the currently defined channels a new channel is temporarily created based on factory defined defaults for the new type of signal The channel number assigned is lowest available number from 01 99 NOTES 1 An automatic channel will be discarded unless one or more of its parameters are changed and will not appear in the Channel list 2 If 2 channels have the same distinguishing source characteristics except for the reversal of sync connectors i e H sync and V sync are switched they are still defined as distinct channels 3 You cannot define a new channel without an incoming signal Using A Channel You can normally select a channel from the Current Channel Channel Setup list at any time by pressing the CHANNEL key If you want to hide a channel from appearing in this list you must deselect the In Menu option check box for that channel TO CHANGE CHANNEL 01 1 1 pDVI_ 77 44kHz p59 94Hz Erter 2 aigi Channel Main Channel 03 or See Figure 3 7 If you wish to access the Carag Move highlight and channel press the CHANNEL key and enter its press Enter associated number 3 1 2 p5W 63 98kHz p60 02Hz NOTES 1 The current channel
86. 0 09 jebe jyuswjsnipy 10 09 10 99f01g OTN OTTO OF CO OD Dt el el el el el el el el e TNO ATWO OF CO OD yobue 1005 Aey yobue ss uzyfug GOU SL g qeuy Wayed S L Z jqeu4 10 09 ony 9 WOJ4 JUIOd a4 Adog G aiN JeJOdwa 10 09 SAA PL BINIJEJOGW 10 09 0 SYA 18S EL JUIOd SHUM PIAS ZL WwoJ4 90eds 10109 Adogd 11 A SHUM pe L OL X s UM Jobe A anig yebiel x anjg jebie A uaap zapel x UBdID Jobe A pey jebiel X pey Jebel Ayyiqedey Aey g0eds 10 09 Jebe TFN OTTO OR CO OD sBuljes Bulpuejg s6py psouenpy jesey OL JUIOdpI puajg wopog edeys pu jg Woyog yuodpi pu jg doy deys pu jg dol JUIOdpI puajg IYBIy edeys pu jg 4f JUIOdpI puajg 497 edeys pu jg 497 nin peodueApY sjqeug Bulpus g p4 pasueapy TN OATFTLO OF CO OD Bulpusjg a6py Bulpusjg 6p3 peouenpy deyiaAQ Bulpusjg Moys UPI Pus g Wo Og YIPIM pus g dol YIPIM pualg 4f 4 pIM PUs g 437 p Uae S L 6u pu jg 6p3 O TNO AL O sues AjiwojiuQ sseujyubug jesey 9 Jay 4 UOHOY 2AJ G Ja 14 UOHO 8AF UBEJIDS INJ PL ueg JEJBAO EL Jajuad yYBIy Z JOJUBD YO L JaUIOD 4i woog OL apis UBIY JOUIOD y4fry dol J UJOD YO WOO PIS 497 JOUIOD Ya dol yu wyzsnfpy esieod UJa eq S l jqeu4 ApwuopunN sseu ybug Aywuuopiun ssouzyybuig
87. 2 Connect the 3 pronged end of the line cord to a grounded AC outlet NOTE The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible 2 4 2 Turning the Projector ON 1 Flip the power switch on the LM Light Module ON The projector takes about 2 minutes to initialize The status light beside the LED window turns yellow NOTE The Electronics Module has a circuit breaker which is generally left ON Certain error conditions can turn the circuit breaker off The circuit breaker must be ON for proper projector function 2 Using the remote keypad press the Power button and then the UP arrow 3 Press one of the input keys on the remote to select and display the image for the source connected in 2 3 Connecting Sources on page 2 7 For more information on the keys available on the remote and their function see 3 7 7 IR Remote on page 3 2 For more information about sources see 2 3 Connecting Sources on page 2 7 2 4 3 Disconnecting the projector from AC ANNIN Do not turn the main power switch to the OFF position or disconnect the projector until the cooling fans have stopped 1 Stop the projector 2 After the internal cooling fans stop move the main power switch on the light module to the OFF position 3 Disconnect the line cord from the wall outlet 2 5 Communicating With the Projector To use the remote control point the remote at the display screen or the projector IR sensor To use the remote with the cable connect the cabl
88. 4 6 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE 5 5 1 5 2 5 3 Maintenance Safety Warnings and Guidelines Installers service trained operators and all users must maintain a safe operating environment at all times Read this section in its entirety and understand all warnings and precautions before operating the projector Maintaining Proper Cooling Air vents are located around the projector to keep it at a consistent operating temperature Make sure that the empty space around these vents stay out zone is within the limits specified in Section 7 Specifications This will prevent the blockage of air flow and prevent overheating The projector is equipped with active thermal monitoring The speed of the cooling fans adjust to the projector temperature Do not put the projector on a radiator or heat register e Do not put the projector in an enclosure without correct ventilation e Do not put objects into the ventilation openings of the projector They can touch dangerous voltages or short circuit components resulting in a fire or shock hazard e Do not spill liquids into the projector If a spill occurs immediately disconnect the projector and have it serviced by a Christie accredited service technician Maintenance and Cleaning The projector is an international regulatory agency approved product designed for safe and reliable operation It is important to acknowledge the following precautions while operating the
89. 9 inclusive RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 03 01 W 5 MTWThF description PWR 1 power on the projector every fifth week on every weekday at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until March 1 2009 inclusive Monthly Occurring Event RTE T 2009 01 1 23 00 00 2010 01 01 M 1 description PWR 0 power off the projector on the Ist day of every month at 23 00 00 starting January 1 2009 until January 1 2010 inclusive RTE T 2009 01 10 23 00 00 2010 01 01 M 12 description PWR 0 power off the projector on the 12th day of every 12 months at 23 00 00 starting January 12 2009 until January 1 2010 inclusive RTE T 2009 01 31 23 00 00 2010 01 01 M 2 description PWR 0 power off the projector every other month on day 31 starting January 31 2009 until January 1 2010 inclusive Function Key Events RTE F 1 description LSH 0 open the shutter if Func 1 is pressed on the remote RTE F 2 description LSH 1 close the shutter if Func 2 is pressed on the remote DMX Events RTE M 55 description LSH 0 open the shutter when the DMX channel 55 is moved into the range of 192 255 RTE M 56 description LSH 1 close the shutter when the DMX channel 56 is moved into the range of 192 255 System Events RTE S 1 1 description CLE 5 change color to cyan when system powers up RTE S 6 25 description LSH 1 close the shutter if channel 25 is selected GPIO Events
90. A E E A A EE A E T S A eae sseoaeeiaes 7 3 14 Power CGI UE MACNN S g ccaaipacsuisecmonceceass oececny eeri in I a EERE E E EENE 7 4 ToL eI MOU eeen e aE EE O E E AEE EEA ET E E EEE 7 4 POPI SIC AW ye CC COINS a E A EEE 7 4 Maximum Product Dimensions LX W XH cccssesssssccccsedsdsanseideacdconsasddnleseradeabaaacoasesdedecectieds 7 4 Podac EIN 5 0 1 Pa ene on noi ECE E AEE eee 7 4 7 6 1 Projector Dimensions and Mounting Information cccc cc cccccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 5 TE TOE E 6 eee nen een nr ne me E etree Cee ee ee ee ret eee eee eee 7 6 Operating Environment cc cesseeesesesseeececceeeeeeeeeeeaaeaseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaaeeessseseeeeeees 7 6 ING Oe ai TEATS IN sersserrroriii ron E E E E TEE 7 6 FeO Standard and Opuonal Omi OU ssssrrss enir ia ian 7 7 PoE L OOE cc E AE E E EAE 7 7 E P E E E e E E EEE E EAA AEAEE 7 7 Usar Oia Oise POTO TOI RA er E ee T EEE 7 7 Howea Onr a i A a E E A S ETA TE ET 7 7 SOOS M e R EA E EAA EAEE 7 7 MODEA MOUN AA E aa E E 7 7 LEONO e E E A E E E E E 1 1 FT E E E EA A T E TE E E 7 8 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual NS 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Table of Contents CH 1S TIE i A Interconnect Drawing l aec onn ee Dra a EN N eee oer EN E EE ere ee eee A I B Web User Interface BP I T AE a E T E TEE EEE E E E E E N B 1 B2 Nay toate the WV Ci Ser MIIO siir n a E AN tend E EAE S B 2 BoT HD T ea A A E E saeco B 2 Bo BELOIO e a EE E EE EE AE AE E O E E
91. A is the event to be deleted 0 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE Single Occurrence Events RTE T 2008 12 25 11 48 00 S description LSH 1 close the shutter at 11 48 00 on December 25 2008 RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 S description CHA 2 switch to channel 2 on January 1 2009 at 23 00 00 Daily Occurring Event RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 02 01 D 1 description PWR 1 power on the projector every day at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until February 1 2009 RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 02 01 D 2 description PWR 1 power on the projector every other day at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until February 1 2009 RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 02 01 D 5 description PWR 1 power on the projector every fifth day at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until February 1 2009 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 59 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE RTE REAL TIME EVENTS Cont d Weekly Occurring Event RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 03 01 W 1 SSu description PWR 0 power off the projector every week on Saturday and Sunday at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until March 1 2009 inclusive RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 03 01 W 2 MTWThF description PWR 1 power on the projector every other week on every weekday at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until March 1 200
92. AEEA AEN OA OEE EO 3 32 IV FS GPC TONCO r a R E sca A E wievcauaneserietaaieeuat tee 3 33 GO MTA aO a E E E E ENN 3 34 On C OT e a E E E E E EE E AE E EA 3 37 POMS Ss MORAN speen aan E E E 3 39 Diagnostics e GC AID EATIOU reee enn RG E EE NERE ERER ek 3 46 E ae E E ES E E E A E ee ee ee ee 3 48 OPa e a S e T E E errr eyrc tr eee mere tee rear erent rrr 3 48 PEAY EOC N tetas seas E nt deacons E deeevss taasech daaaeetecs 3 48 Ma nagina Colors Wy MM Fa OG sessir eeen e E EEEE EAE 3 57 Managing InfraRGB with IRLOG ss cccsasescaaescasasessonassosesdaasersnasesadeunnanstendiaanoonmaanaelanunenceat 3 65 ANM e a e T E A AEAEE E E AEN E E E E 3 69 3 4 7 Main Menu gt Secondary Input amp Switching cccccccececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeess 3 69 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Table of Contents CHAISTIE eee Maa Meni Eaa E a EA EEA E AEE ETE 3 72 ARM M T oera e EAE E TEE E E AEE EE A 3 72 3 4 10 How Color Settings Interact in a StIM Array cece ccccccccccccceececeeaeeeseeeeseesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 72 4 Menu Tree AAM T a E E A E E E F 4 3 41 Menu Ires Continued ConfiguratiO sssisssseessreioce nenea EEEE E 4 4 4 1 2 Menu Tree Continued Geometry and Color ccccccccsssssssessseseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaseeeesseeeees 4 5 ZN ie Moni Tree C ontmiod Amy LOC eorr nn ane eee ene eee eer ee 4 6 5 Maintenance Dail Saloty Vy arninos and Guide NICS osese eran E E AEE TER KEER 5 1 SMa nne RTD NI era e E EA A 5 1 39 Maint
93. ANI SANG 1 ANNI icy eenei d a a a a E 5 1 Jol Warmngs and Salety GUIdEHDES 2 ocasasisd eases nr e E E ENEE 5 1 32 Labels and Marking S ss sec gsannnsncnnedendeaiaccaserneaceeavedesace eomeaacerssdcaceraeecseaysdeeace oeeascovsceacserseenatiesece 5 2 oe UMS WE OIG E S A E E I E I I T E 5 2 5 3 4 Projector LOCAatION cccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeaaeeaaaessessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaas 5 2 BEM a E E ntetea essay ante unde ade E S E 5 2 30 Cleaning and Maintenance GOIG ssis e were matress ter preern Tete nnrt arene ttre erent or 5 3 ae Wd MOER E IC 6 nen nee ae nen ene ee A eee 5 3 Pe ie Ws okie eo S 8 8 e ne ne ee eee E 5 3 6 Troubleshooting 6l Troublesho tine Guide 001 cc enres an meena mnt E aN atte tere RUNES ans nnn E E 6 1 O2 System Warnings OS oe ao ceese ssc ses ae gc en E R E R on E anos R ie Se 6 1 DSC VO gegen A E A nee eas teuty ensues T I scenes seutaers da an emarnneteaninns 6 1 SY SCCM BITOLS c0sdsaiansnseadasoeneiiawnadsnniasmenaisenosedacsenlagsdeassantemnosteasadoansixesadsabansentanstemninstaleasneares 6 2 0AL LED Status Display On the Projector cs ccceas cicosecngstuanes estou ian eai iE 6 2 O TOT CO S e E E E E Trey ee re errr me en rere eee ere 6 3 a PON E T E E E E re Te 6 4 Geel Pro ocior DOCS INO PO yy ei ON enereeriar o aE EAEE 6 4 CAL E MOO E E A E N A E E E EAEE E A E E EE 6 5 6 4 1 Light Module Suddenly Goes OFF 6 vciccssvcarnvsseucevonescscuasevetaxevanacquasasecrerenn
94. Alepuooas UOIISOY 9 8ZIS AYepuddas SUOI DOQ MOPUIA did jqeu 3 did sindul Auepuoces 9 uen dems yndu Avepuosss yndu uie Bulyd iMs 9 nduj Aiepuodas TNO TWO OF CO OD A UJOWEd S981 6 abenbue7 9g Bulyoums X nduj Auepuodas Z SN EIS 9 pP M S Y G uoneinByuoyd y dnjas jauueyy g sBunjeas ebeu z UO SOd 8 9ZIS nual ule 4 3 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Menu Tree Section 4 4 1 1 Menu Tree Continued Configuration po yu Jend pies ndu JAq Ju ena Bulpunosg JOJOBUUOD pies ndu ONg Bojeuy Z yndu 104 suwi dida Z ndu 104 suliw qida 1 pies ndul INAH UML Spo yu enq pies yndu GS GH Ienga Bulpunolsy 9 JO OBUUOY Bulpunolsy G JO OBUUOY Bulpunolsy y JO OBUUOY Bulpunolsy JOJOBUUOY Bulpunolsy z JO OBUUOD Bulpunols JOJOBUUOD apo S Ndu padnoly pied jndu Japo099q O PIA TNO TO OR ssoulybug JOH gL woJj4 Adoyd J jqeu4 JOjOD ONY G SUYM JO Wed 9niq EL SUYM JO Hed USI ZL SHUM JO Hed psy LL njg JO Hed UBdIH OL n g JO Wed Psy njg JO Wed aniq USBI JO Hed ang u 19 JO Hed pey u 19 JO WE U29219 poy Jo Hed sniq pey JO Hed UsdIH Poy JO Wed psy yua w snfpy 10109 9919S uoljeinyes 10 09 TN OTTO OR OO Weyed
95. Black test pattern then use the White test pattern to blend the white levels on the blend edges The final step is to check the blended image with an external source There is a centerline both horizontal and vertical in the Edge Blending test pattern The intersection of these lines is the true center of the projector display area 3 40 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation The Show Blending Overlap control enables or disables edge blending Blend overlap When enabled this will make the size of the Edge Blending regions ee Taa obvious This control should only be used during setup For information about advanced blending of complex configurations for example with spherical screens see the TWIST User Manual 020 100143 xx In simple terms a blend appears as a gradient strip along an edge of a projected image It is darkest along the extreme edge of the image and lightens nearer to the rest of the image Figure 3 21 How Are Blends Used Figure 3 21 Edge Blending ow Are Blends Used In multiple projector walls complementary With edge blending blends between neighboring images can Overlap Blend compensate for the extra brightness or intensity where these edges overlap By Proj 1 1 B Proj 1 2 Proj 1 1 Proj 1 2 controlling blend width and other properties you can achieve uniformity across the group of images Visible overlaps disappear Figure 3 22 For best
96. CESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the number of lines to blank turn to black at the left of the image This can be used to blank out any unwanted data near the left edge of the image Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 39 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE LBL LEFT BLANKING Cont d A positive amount of blanking makes the image smaller A negative amount of blanking makes the image larger Negative blanking is only applicable to analog signals when the auto setup has not been able to set the image size correctly It is preferable not to use negative blanking but to run auto setup again ensuring that the content has active pixels on each edge of the image The maximum amount of left blanking allowed is half the image width minus 10 For negative blanking the image size can only be increased to the limit of the sync INxy Set the left blanking for Slot x Input y NAR EXAMPLES LBL 40 Set left blanking to 40 on main video LBL MAIN 40 Set left blanking to 40 on main video LBL PIIP 40 Set left blanking to 40 on main video LBL IN32 40 Set left blanking to 40 on Slot 3 Input 2 LBL Returns the left blanking value on main video LBL PIIP Returns the left blanking value on main video LBL IN12 Returns the left blanking value on Slot 1 Input 2 LDT LEVEL DETECTOR CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRI
97. CRM 3 Set luma delay to 3 pixel on main video CRM IN32 3 Set luma delay to 3 pixel on Slot 3 Input 2 CRM Returns the current luma delay on main video CRM Returns the current luma delay on main video CRM IN12 Returns the current luma delay on Slot 1 Input 2 CSP COLOR SPACE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control specifies which color space the Input signal uses This determines how the color components are decoded for accurate color in the display Color space control only applies to analog Input signals Although the proper color space is normally determined automatically by the projector you can override the setting Use RGB unless you are using component video Use YPbPr SDTV for most video sources Use YPbPr HDTV for high definition signals NOTE When certain RGB signals are first connected the projector may not initially recognize them as RGB and may incorrectly decode their color information as YPbPr SDTV These signals can include RGB signals in NTSC PAL SECAM frequency ranges Scan doubled sync on green Scan quadrupled sync on green For these signals change the Color Space to RGB then define a new channel for future use Values are 0 RGB 1 YPbPr SDTV 2 YPbPr HDTV SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAN EXAMPLES CSP 1 Set color space to YPbPr SDTV on main video CSP MAIN 2 Set color space to YPbPr HDTV on main
98. Color Enable Use this option to select a color while working with color temperature input levels or other setup parameters Freeze Image During Auto Setup Advanced Diagnostics Led Strobe Adjust NOTE Use the remote to enable disable colors by entering the Function code See Function Key on page 3 5 Input Peak Detector This is a fast method for defining individual input levels and improving the accuracy of input levels set by the Auto Input Level function Enabling the Peak Detector activates a special operating mode for detecting only pixels that are considered black or white all other levels are displayed as a mid level gray When used with a 16 step grayscale pattern in which the 2 black and white bands are known to be at opposite edges of the image you can watch these isolated areas while adjusting individual black levels and Input drives until both bands are just visible Images from this source will display correct blacks and whites without crushing or washing out NOTE f using Peak Detector with PIP both images must have the same color space Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Input Level Detector The Input Level Detector check box enables specific thresholds for blacks and whites Input levels that fall below a specified level value see below are displayed as black and all others are displayed as white To use Enable Input Level Detector and display a c
99. Configuration gt Communications See Communications on page 3 34 e Set Configuration gt Communications gt Network Routing to one RS232 and RS422 Joined See Network Routing on page 3 35 ee le le lo l le Ya I RS232 OUT RS232 IN ofa RS232 IN RS232 IN 3 RS232 OUT RS232 IN Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 2 13 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 2 Installation and Setup CHAISTIE 2 6 4 Mixed Serial Network RS 232 and RS 422 2 14 RS 422 serial communication is better over long distances than RS 232 communication Use the RS 422 port only if your device has RS 422 capability Always read the equipment literature before connecting NOTICE Connecting to the RS 422 port with incompatible equipment including the wrong type of serial cable can damage the projector In the RS 422 network the controller can communicate with the first projector and the command can be relayed to each serially connected projector e Connect the controller to one projector using RS 422 serial cable between the PC and the RS 422 IN port on the Electronic Module e Connect an RS 232 serial cable between the RS232 OUT connector of the first projector Electronics Module and the RS232 IN connector of the next projector Electronics Module Connect the remaining projectors using RS232 cables RS232 communication cables must be good quali
100. E l Section 6 Troubleshooting Trees 6 6 8 Troubleshooting Tree Array Colors Troubleshooting ArrayLOC START HERE ey A e e423 Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Projector Color Adjustment Menu gt Status Menu B1 CERT Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Color Saturation Reference Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Configuration Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Advanced Color Adjustment Go to the Main gt Configuration 4 gt ArrayLOC 13 gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration 3 menu A7 Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration PA y Ea GE e7 Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt ArrayLOC Service Select the Array Status menu item to display the Bright ColorLOC Array Status Do the colors and brightness of Menu gt Configuration gt Service the array projectors match C11 Recalibrate the internal Color Saturation gt Select Color Adjustment projectors set to Max Drives Does cycling AC power to the array resolve the problem OR Call Tech Support Is the problem projector Advanced Color Adjustment gt Color Mode set to Native See page 3 9 Troubleshooting Tree A8 Color and Brightness Array Does cycling AC power to the problem projector resolve the problem Are the array colors red green blue white the expected colors Proceed t
101. E o O zone when assessing Brightness Uniformity adjustments focus O on extreme EDGES as indicated in the illustration at right 5 Enable Coarse Adjustment to quickly apply display changes ee m _ without redrawing the whole image ad O pa Use sliders to achieve relative uniformity in the necessary zone 7 Disable Coarse Adjustment to accurately display changes as Figure 3 20 13 Point Test Pattern you make them Use sliders for fine adjustment as necessary in the required zones 9 Adjust overall gain to ensure that overall light output remains well matched from one screen center to the next Cancel Brightness Uniformity If you do not want to use or apply Brightness Uniformity settings clear the Uniformity Enable check box at the top of the Brightness Uniformity menu Edge Blending The Edge Blending submenu provides a range of basic controls for smoothing together the overlapping bright edges of multiple adjacent projected images to create a single larger seamless image These controls which primarily affect white levels are typically used in conjunction with mechanical lens blinders optional which are installed on the front of the projector and which primarily affect black levels Brightness uniformity adjustment if desired should be performed first The Edge Blend or Grid test pattern is useful for the mechanical setup of the projectors If necessary adjust Black Level Blending first with the
102. EL Operator DESCRIPTION Detail threshold selects a filter sensitivity to noise A higher value may improve noisy sources especially for higher settings of detail This control sets the minimum change required before the detail DTL function is activated This allows images to be sharpened without increasing the background noise INxy Set the detail threshold for Slot x Input y Set the detail threshold for main video Set the detail threshold for main video EXAMPLE DTT 50 Set the detail threshold to mid point for Main video EBB BLACK LEVEL BLENDING CONTROL GROUP Config Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The Black Level Blending control allows for Black Level Blending Black Level Blending is the process of modifying the pixels in the bright overlapping areas that result from the overlapping of two or more images Correct adjustment eliminates uneven black levels by matching up black area hues with a target area hue the intersection of the center lines and adjusting the overlaps edges surrounding the target area Use the black test pattern to perform this function D 22 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference EBB BLACK LEVEL BLENDING Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLOT Enables or disables Black Level Blending mode or choose a saved Christie TWIST Black Level Blending preset EXAMPLE
103. Edit 1 Analog BNC Input Card 15 62 Hz 90 00 kHz Yes Sync on Green 15 62kHz i50 00Hz Previous Channel Name An alphanumeric label can be defined and or changed here Channel names can be up to 25 characters in length The default name is the horizontal and vertical sync frequencies number is already in use assign a different channel number 2 You can define up to 99 channels Channel A 2 digit channel number can be changed here NOTES 1 f you enter a channel number that already exists a message appears indicating that this 1 4 corresponding to which slot in the projector input panel the source is connected 1 6 corresponding to which input on the selected slot the source 1s connected channel must be accessed using CHANNEL on the IR remote or using the Auto Source function In Menu If checked default except for automatically defined channels with unchanged parameters this defined channel will appear in the list available when CHANNEL key 1s pressed If unchecked the NOTE On screen display OSD of the channel list is an option in the Menu Preferences menu Auto Select If checked default the projector can automatically locate this channel when an incoming input signal matches If not checked the projector is only able to locate the selected channel when it is directly selected using the CHANNEL key on the IR remote A change in Input signal will not result in a channel change image settings can b
104. FSSu will run on Monday Tuesday Wednesday Friday Saturday and Sunday Monthly Occurring Event RTE T YYYY MM DD HH MM SS YYYY MM DD MR description command Where the first date and time is the start date and occurrence time The second date is the end date R is the Repeat Every interval 1 e repeat on the same date every R months NOTE If there are not 31 days in the next run cycle month the event will not run in that month Function Key Events RTE F K description command where K the specific function key 1 5 7 9 Key 6 is reserved and cannot be used DMX Events RTE M C description command where C channel 54 63 D 58 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference RTE REAL TIME EVENTS Cont d System Events RTE S E T description command where E is the event to respond to 0 Boot Up 2 Any System Error 1 Power ON OFF 3 Good Signal T 0 Either a Power ON or OFF event 4 No Signal T 1 Power ON only 5 Input Change T 2 Power OFF only 6 Channel Change T channel where channel is 1 99 GPIO Events RTE G AAAAAAA description command where A is GPIO Input for each pin X don t care H when pin is high See GIO General Purpose Input Output L when pin is low See GIO General Purpose Input Output Delete All Events RTE X Delete a single event RTE X A where
105. GB 61 secondary blanking 71 Secondary Image Settings menu 71 secondary input 70 Secondary Input and Switching menu 69 secondary size and position 71 select white point 52 selected lighting mode 62 separate network routing 35 serial command reference 1 72 serial commands web UI 12 serial communication 1 control types 8 maximizing message integrity 5 message format 1 special functions 3 text parameters 4 serial communication options 34 Service menu 48 set array frame delay 56 set white to color temperature 52 shutdown auto 32 shutter key 5 signal types 13 slot keys 4 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 sources see input cards specifications 1 inputs 8 splash screen 33 34 split screen 28 split screen video options 23 standby 32 standby active loop through 71 72 status arrayLOC 54 status projector 69 stealth mode 32 strobe adjustment LED 48 subnet mask 36 swap key 4 swap main amp secondary input infraRGB 61 swap main and secondary inputs 70 synchronize frame delay 56 synchronize keys test pattern color enable 56 Synchronize to This Projector 57 synchronize to this projector 49 synchronized RGB brightness 57 system integration see GPIO T target color space 51 53 target color values 51 target white values 51 TCP port 36 test key 3 test pattern 46 72 test pattern color swap 47 test pattern enable 52 54 test pattern geometry and color 37 test pattern light
106. GIA SL11 Returns the current grounding method of Slot 1 Input 1 GID VIDEO DECODER GROUNDED INPUT SELECTION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the Input signal grounding method to single ended or differential Valid values are 0 Differential default 1 Single ended SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE Set the Input signal grounding method for the specified Slot and Input EXAMPLES GID SL31 1 Set grounding on Slot 3 Input 1 to single ended GID SL16 Returns the current grounding method of Slot 1 Input 6 GIO GENERAL PURPOSE INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL GROUP Config SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Control or monitor the state of the General Purpose Inputs and Outputs The strings have one character for each hardware connector pin and from left to right correspond to the pin numbers 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 Pin 1 is 12V and Pin 5 is Ground they cannot be read set or configured A low state or value of 0 will be read on an Input pin if the circuit attached to the pin is open A high state or value of 1 will be read on an Input pin if the circuit attached to the pin is shorted to ground This corresponds to a switch closing event SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE CNFG Set the Direction for the individual pins to Inputs or outputs STAT Get the state of all Inputs or set the state of all outputs EXAMPLES GIO STAT Get status of all t
107. LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Sets the image to one of several preset size position presets D 64 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference SZP SIZE PRESETS Cont d 0 Default 3 Full Width 5 Anamorphic 1 None 4 Full Height 6 Custom 2 Full Screen SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES SZP 1 Set the size preset to no resizing TBL TOP BLANKING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the number of lines to blank turn to black at the top of the image This can be used to blank out any unwanted data near the top edge of the image A positive amount of blanking makes the image smaller A negative amount of blanking makes the image larger Negative blanking is only applicable to analog signals when the auto setup has not been able to set the image size correctly It is preferable not to use negative blanking but to run auto setup again ensuring that the content has active pixels on each edge of the image The maximum amount of top blanking allowed is half the image height minus 10 For negative blanking the image size can only be increased to the limit of the sync INxy Set the top blanking for Slot x Input y EXAMPLES TBL 40 Set top blanking to 40 on main video TBL MAIN 40 Set top blanking to 40 on main video TBL PIIP 40 Set top blanking to 40 on m
108. Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 eid hy i Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 NOTICES COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS 2011 2012 Christie Digital Systems USA Inc All rights reserved All brand names and product names are trademarks registered trademarks or trade names of their respective holders REGULATORY The product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the product is operated in a commercial environment The product generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of the product in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user s Own expense This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada 0 I ATS AT 2S AAAI S SS S 7 7101 2Y BA EE ASAS AS FAI A 71 8 AA AANA GSE AS BA Os Myc GENERAL Every effort has been made to ensure accuracy however in some cases changes in the products or availability could occur which may not be reflected in this document Christie reserves the right to make changes to spec
109. Mount NOTE The rubber mount has been removed from around the lens mount for illustration purposes Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 1 Introduction 1 4 1 Projection Head Module PHM The PHM is the center module of the projector It contains the projection lens IR sensor DMD light module and other optical components It also supplies the electrical interfaces required to drive these components The projector Light Module LM consists of four LEDs and combining optics Main Power Switch Power should always be disconnected from the illumination module before servicing to avoid the possibility of inadvertent exposure to visible and invisible LED radiation Directly viewing the illumination module optical output through certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard The Main Power Switch is located above the AC receptacle on the Light Module LM Place this switch in the OFF position to cut all power to the projector before disconnecting from an AC wall outlet 1 4 2 Electronic Module EM The EM module contains the main electronics and input connectors of the projector Input Panel All source connections are made to the main input panel If additional connections are required install one of the available optional input modules For more details on connecting sources see 2 3 Connecting Source
110. OC Setup and Walkthrough 6 12 Entero ArrayLOC Bright ColorLOC Setup Do Nothing The default configuration of an Entero projector has ArrayLOC enabled and configured to display a reasonably saturated gamut at the maximum brightness the array can support Unless one wishes to adjust the color of the primaries or whites there is no need to do anything else If one does wish to change the primary or white color proceed to the Change Projected Image Colors guide If the projectors within the array do not seem to display matching white colors white brightness or primary colors then proceed to the Tuning guide Step 1 Take Control of the Array Main Menu Go to the Main gt Configuration 4 Configuration Select a projector you wish to use gt ArrayLOC 13 menu ArrayLOC to control the array at this moment This is the starting point for controlling Check the Synchronize to This Projector ArrayLOC Synchronize to This Projector menu item on the selected projector Bright ColorLOC Configuration k 2 Now all other projectors will copy changes Array Color Target you make in the Array Color Target or ArrayLOC Configuration submenus Projector Color Adjustment Several controls in the Bright ColorLOC Configuration and Array Color Target menus cannot be changed unless you take control of the array Select the Array Color Target 4 submenu and proceed to st
111. OSD controls 8 9 OSD key 5 OSD menus web UI 4 OSD transparency 34 output level detector 47 Output Options menu 31 output peak detector 47 overview P PCA see projector color adjustment PIP enable 70 PIP key 4 PIP Window Options menu 70 pixel phase 19 pixel tracking 19 position 5 power 3 connecting 10 disconnecting 10 ON 10 Power Management menu 32 power requirements 4 power up auto 32 proj key 6 projector dimensions 5 overheating 1 synchronizing 49 projector address id 35 projector array control 57 projector capability 50 projector clock 32 projector color adjustment 59 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Projector Color Adjustment menu 53 projector overview 2 projector status 69 projector weight 4 R real time events RTE web UI 9 reat time events RTE web UI adding a scheduled event 10 adding a system event 11 DMxX channel event adding 12 regulatory information 1 2 remote control 1 enable 36 enable wired 36 remote control keys 3 6 remote control wired 3 reset current adjustments to default 53 resizing images 17 19 restoring files web UI 8 RGB Brightness 57 RGB brightness 52 RGB brightness target 52 57 RGB quantization range video options 24 routing network 35 RS 232 network routing 35 RS 422 network routing 35 S safety information 1 labels 2 maintenance 1 sampling mode video options 23 screen 2 secondaary input infraR
112. OTE Also enter numbers directly from the IR remote Change Case To convert a lowercase letter to a capital letter uppercase position on the letter and press FUNC plus the UP arrow key simultaneously To convert a capital letter uppercase into a lowercase letter position the cursor on the letter and press FUNC plus the DOWN arrow key simultaneously Add or Delete a Character or Space To insert a space at the cursor position press FUNC plus the RIGHT arrow key simultaneously To delete a highlighted character or space press the FUNC plus the LEFT arrow key simultaneously Delete all Characters Press FUNC followed by ENTER show2 show2 A Press Press Func lt to insert a space before to delete show 2 show Figure 3 5 Add Delete Character or Space Press Enter When Finished To accept save all edits and leave the edit window press ENTER Cancel all Changes and Exit Press EXIT at any time to cancel changes and return to the previously defined saved text Edit numerical values Enter numbers directly from the remote to specify numbers representing projector channels source setups slots etc As each digit is entered it is inserted at the right of the field and the numbers already in the field are shifted to the left Channel numbers are defined with 2 digits for example if you enter only a single digit such as 7 for a channel number the channel is
113. OTE Can be set to select inputs if desired Nelp e Display context sensitive help toggle TOGGLE KEYS Press and hold to toggle or press twice to toggle or press and release followed by AON or VOFF 3 2 CHRISTIE Laser Pointer Status LED Activated when Laser pressed Shutter e Open or close the shutter Auto e Optimize image automatically These functions are not remote controllable on the Mirage WU L Lens adjustments are performed manually OSD e Use to hide or show menus Press OSDW to turn Off Swap e Swaps the Main and PIP image Exit e Return to previous menu level or exits menus if at top level Enter e Select a highlighted menu item change or accept a value Projector l l l e Select a projector in multi projector installations Bright e Adjust amount of light in image Contrast e Adjust difference between light dark Func e Enter special code such as color enabling or enter for a negative numeric value 10 e Enter 0 digit in a numeric field or add 10 to subsequent number for a menu selection of 10 or more Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation 3 1 2 Wired Remote You can convert the standard IR remote into a wired remote using the optional cable Connect one end into the standard IR remote and the other to the XLR connector labeled Remote on the Electronics Module The wired remote is recommended when
114. Operation content you may need to turn the frame lock feature off or increase the frame delay settings To turn the frame lock off go to the Configuration gt Output Options menu and select Free Run from the Frame Locking drop down list You can also use the serial API command FLE 0 To increase the frame delay setting navigate to the Configuration gt Output Options menu select Frame Lock from the Frame Locking drop down list and then drag the Set Frame Delay slider across to a value slightly higher than the minimum value shown in the Actual Frame Delay field You can also use the serial API command FRD STAT to query for minimum frame lock setting and then use FRD nnn where nnn is slightly higher than the minimum value returned Manual RGB Adjustment WeyNGhile These adjustments can turn on multiple RGB LEDs simultaneously which uses more power and increases the possibility of overheating The Manual RGB Adjustment menu lets you manually adjust the native projector color space by adjusting the LED power levels The brightness of Geometry amp Color Manual RGB Adjustment User Color Mode 1 v Color Mode LM Red Part Of Red LM Green Part Of Red LM Blue Part Of Red LM Green Part Of Green LM Red Part Of Green 240 0 unsaturated colors can be significantly increased by turning on multiple RGB LEDs simultaneously mma aea R mehri tsi aa LM Blue Part Of Blue Interaction wi
115. Option SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Select a working mode for one of the transmitters on the THIC card 0 Default to select 12 bit per channel HDMI output 1 Compatible to select 8 bit per channel HDMI output 2 DVI only to select 8 bit per channel DVI output SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLES TTM SL11 0 Use 12 bit HDMI output for THIC on Slot 1 Input 1 TTM SL42 1 Use 8 bit HDMI output for THIC on Slot 4 Input 2 TTM SL11 2 Use 8 bit DVI output for THIC on Slot 1 Input 1 TTM SL12 Get the transmitter working mode for THIC on Slot 1 Input 2 TWP TARGET WHITE POINT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This command is used to set the ArrayLOC target white point Several preset white points are provided in addition to four user setting white points The control subcodes provide access to all the presets Due to the large number of sub codes they are not all listed Instead a simple substitution for the small x is made according to the following table 0 3200K l 5000K D50 2 6500K D65 3 7500K D75 4 9300K D93 5 User 1 6 User 2 7 User 3 8 User 4 C Current Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 69 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE TWP TARGET WHITE POINT Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Selects the white point 0 3200K 4 9300K D93 1 5000K
116. PTION This Level Detector control changes the gamma table settings to make it easy for the user to adjust the Input levels It causes the data to be processed so that all levels below a specified value are set to black 0 and all above and including it are set to white 1024 This control takes place before the scaler deinterlacer SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES LDT 1 Turn on level detector LDT 0 Turn off level detector LDV LEVEL DETECTOR VALUE CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The Level Value control specifies the value to be used by the level detector The range is 1 1023 This control takes place before the scaler deinterlacer D 40 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference LDV LEVEL DETECTOR VALUE Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE LDV 500 Set level detector to 500 All data greater than or equal to 500 will be shown in the image LOC LOCAL SETTINGS CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Set the localization options such as language and display options for temperature units SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE LANG Set the system language 0 English 4 Italian 1 French 5 Chinese 2 German 6 Japanese 3 Spanish 7 Korean TEMP Set the temperature units
117. PUT Connector Type 2 male DB9 RS 232 OUT GPIO NOTE Pixel rates above 150 MHz require DIPC NOTE Pixel rates above 150 MHz require DIPC 2 female DB9 RS 232 IN RS 422 IN NETWORK CONTROL Ethernet Meets DVI spec Maximum Baud Rate 1 RJ45 connector REMOTE CONTROL Type Low Frequency IR with wired ability Range 30 Meters Laser Pointer Included Battery Type 2 Required AA 1 5V Alkaline WIRED CONTROL Connector Type XLR Input Levels High 2 2V min Low 0 9V max Power 500mA 5V Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 7 9 CHRISTIE A Interconnect Drawing Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 A 1 CHRISTIE Appendix A Interconnect Drawing A 1 INTERCONNECT DRAWING U a Yellow Green sag g gt Light Module LM 016 102120 01 a IEC EMI Blue o pA m gt x lt gt Filter g 3 Z lt i C o g s lt a Pe EN PA e FO a 38 E E 4 3 Lous ale 5 ll sal aie E Switch Brown 3 sl Power Supp i tl ed ee AC S ys B p 2 enn s ft fe ii P P T T T 5 x x x J27 J26 J28 J29 J10 J12 Blue Brow Red Violet Black P27 P26 P28 P29 P10 P12 SN emp 4 emp emp emp an 0 P400 J400 OSRAM Driver 9030B IR Sig aR EE P500 2s noa J500 z R
118. Part of XXX adjusts the color s brightness and affects the color of white Example If the blue primary color does not match Use the Red Part of Blue and Green Part of Blue Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 59 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE i controls Negative values will increase the saturation of the blue Values between 15 and 3 work well NOTE For information about using a color meter with this procedure see Fine tune Projector Colors With a Color Meter on page 3 60 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all the primary colors are matched 9 After adjusting the primary colors verify that the white color and brightness still match Repeat the process if necessary Fine tune Projector Colors With a Color Meter To use a color meter for projector color adjustments follow the instructions in Fine tune Whites White Brightness or Primary Colors on page 3 59 but use the information below and a color meter for the XXX Part of YYY adjustments 1 To note the xy color values reported for the common gamut navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Status For example see Figure 3 23 2 Measure the projected primary color with the meter and compare the metered values to the common gamut values 3 Use the adjustment guide to determine how to adjust the Projector Color Adjustment values to correct the differences The adjustment guides are color coded The suggested corrections
119. Projector Color Adjustment on page 3 43 Green Part Of Red a A E 100 0 Blue Part Of Red 0 0 100 0 100 0 AN Green Part Of Green 100 0 i 200 0 These steps outline color adjustments using projector color settings until the colors appear to match the rest of the projectors in the array Color adjustments are evaluated by eye A color meter can help determine the change required but the results are still evaluated by eye For information about using the color meter with this procedure see Fine tune Projector Colors With a Red Part Of Green 100 0 o o o o 100 0 o Blue Part Of Green wy V 100 0 100 0 Blue Part Of Blue OG 0 1 z 200 0 Red Part Of Blue e 100 0 z 100 0 N _ Green Part Of Blue y u 100 0 100 0 2 3 4 6 T 8 9 Red Part Of White 100 0 7 200 0 Color Meter on page 3 60 ee iene we os E Blue Part Of White 100 0 a mnm sia 1 Navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt cca N a ArrayLOC gt Proj ector Color Adj ustment Reset current adjustments to defaults ba 2 Projector Color Adjustment settings are specific to Auto Color Enable u each color space To use existing fine tuning Test Pattern Enable u adjustments as a starting point select a tuned color Copy Adjustments From Maimun _ M 5 l i m space from Copy Adjustments From White Brightness Adjustment P t i 1000 3 Check both Auto Color Enable and Test Pattern Enable the system backg
120. RE USE Sets the brightness threshold at which a warning is issued when warnings are enabled 0 100 percent WGTH FUTURE USE Sets the gamut threshold at which a warning is issued when warnings are enabled 0 100 percent IRTG FUTURE USE IR Brightness Target Sets the target brightness that the projectors in the array brightness group should meet 0 1000 DSEL Allows selection of the Duty Cycle mode of operation 0 Automatic 1 Preset SKEY Synchronize remote control keystrokes test pattern and color enable amongst array proj ectors 0 Independent 1 Synchronized SFRD Synchronize frame delay amongst array projectors 0 Independent 1 Synchronized AFRD Sets the array frame delay parameter Applies to all projectors in array if SFRD is set to Synchronized AFRS Read only control reports smallest frame delay value in array that will not generate tearing artifacts SRGB Synchronize RGB Brightness setting amongst array projectors 0 Independent 1 Synchronized SACEF Synchronize AccuFrame setting amongst array projectors 0 Independent 1 Synchronized EXAMPLES ABL EABL 1 Turn ON Array Bright ColorLOC and run in Fixed mode ABL BRGP 2 Set the brightness group to 2 ABL BRTG 400 Set the brightness target to 400 Lumens ABL ADIN Return current value of adjustment interval in seconds D 2 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference
121. ROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Sets the vertical position of the window Specifies where to place the center of the window vertically on the panel in pixels SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES PVP 100 Set vertical position to 100 pixels PVP Get vertical position PVP 100 PWR POWER CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Change the power state of the projector Possible values 0 Power OFF 1 Power ON 10 Cooldown lamp is cooling down controlled by lamp Read only 11 Warmup lamp is warming up controlled by lamp Read only SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLES PWR get projector power status PWR1 Turn the lamp and all electrical power ON PWRO Set the projector to standby mode D 52 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference PXP PIXEL PHASE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Pixel Phase adjusts the phase of the pixel sampling clock relative to the incoming signal This allows you to fine tune the sampling point within one pixel Adjust the Pixel Phase when the image usually from an RGB source shows shimmer NOTE If the shimmer is concentrated in vertical bands with little or no shimmer between the bands then it is likely that Pixel Tracking needs adjustment Pi
122. RT HERE ey A o2 B o Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Projector Color Adjustment Menu gt Status Menu B1 CACB Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Color Saturation Reference Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Configuration Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Advanced Color Adjustment Go to the Main gt Configuration 4 gt ArrayLOC 13 gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration 3 menu A7 Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration Lu VPA RW E e7 Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt ArrayLOC Service Select the Array Status menu item to display the Bright ColorLOC Array Status Do the colors and brightness of the array projectors match A9 Yes Projectors can be removed from the ArrayLOC array by any of the following methods Does replacing the LMs of the problem projectors resolve e a Turning the projector OFF the problem eee b Disconnecting the ArrayLOC network Is the array brightness the N if using the PHM Network expected brightness V4 c Setting the Bright ColorLOC Mode to OFF expected brightness d Setting the Bright ColorLOC Group to a _ different number Does removing the problem ody 4 projectors from the ArrayLOC C11 array resolve the problem Are the array colors red green blue white the expected colors eee sensor of the problem proje
123. Red Green and Blue in the signal Available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting achieves maximum contrast without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each source SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the green drive on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 Set the green drive on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PIIP Set the green drive on the main video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES GND 128 Set green drive to 128 on main video GND MAIN 128 Set green drive to 128 on main video GND PIIP 100 Set green drive to 100 on main video GND IN32 100 Set green drive to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 GND Returns the current green drive value on main video GND PIIP Returns the current green drive value on main video GND IN12 Returns the current green drive value on Slot 1 Input 2 GOG GREEN ODD PIXEL GAIN CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adds an offset to Input green gain settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for diffe
124. Returns problem index 3 in the queue HLT LSOL 4 Returns the solution hint for problem index 4 in the queue HLT LALL Returns all queued problems and their solutions HLT LALL 3 Returns problem index 3 and its solution HOR HORIZONTAL POSITION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Move the horizontal position of the image left or right SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Set the horizontal position for the main image EXAMPLES HOR 500 Set horizontal position to 500 on main video HOR MAIN 500 Set horizontal position to 500 on main video HOR IN32 500 Set horizontal position to 500 on Slot 3 Input 2 HOR Returns the horizontal position value on main video Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 33 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE IFS INFRARGB CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Configures InfraRGB lighting modes which defines the percentage of RGB and IR brightness It allows selection of a number of presets that define these proportions for different lighting conditions such as daylight moonlight starlight These presets may be customized by the user but have factory default values InfraScene channel and source mode are also controlled but have no effect at this time for subsequent release For subcodes that are lighting mode specific substitute the l
125. Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix C Serial Communication CH 1S TIE The projector collects all of the message bytes as defined in the first byte of the message then creates its own checksum value for comparison with the checksum included in the controller s message If the values match the message is considered to have been correctly received otherwise the message is discarded NOTES 1 h indicates a hex number 2 If a request message has a checksum so will the reply 3 If using both acknowledge and checksum either character can occur first C 2 5 Accessing Specific Channels or Inputs For several commands for example ASR Auto Channel Select you can direct the message to particular channel input or image To do this include a subcode after the function code Example ASR 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by the Main image ASR MAIN 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by the Main image ASR PIIP 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by the image ASR C003 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for channel 3 BBL IN12 30 Set the bottom blanking value on slot 1 input 2 to value 30 It is only possible to set parameters from a specific channel or input if that parameter is stored separately for each channel or input This function cannot be used for parameters that are specified for the projector as a whole such as projector address The serial commands listed in the d
126. S E 3 4 COAST a E E E E E ue ede psy isetees oc ceeayanecden 3 4 ETN gs peepee nieve con A I IE EEA E NENO EEE NN E 3 4 C a EEE E AE AE 3 4 aa o C E E ses ene E E E E A T E 3 5 E i o EEIE AE ES A EE E A E E E E E E A 3 5 ME E E badswonsascene 3 5 OD OSC IS ay e a E T E E te ceecteteeed es 3 5 SUT e E E noted neste snes obeeeeraaiwteesre eset ore eteceteansesdeucteay 3 5 PEC TIO IS creates ee ccamineceen EE EA E EE AEA V AEO tases 3 5 PT OY cases pe E A E A E ees 3 6 EM rte cesses oe A ce se oc ges se an as cee a ese esses T tec ee ee cee apedeaes 3 6 PEA cca ceases ease prc eect aoe ceca eae EEE E O E A ances etna AE T 3 6 PATO TCS ape csse at cence E E A danse A A E eaten saseleaeencaie 3 6 DFAS o EE E E E A E E 3 6 3 2 UAV a IN the MENUS creo a ceacciaconaccnsesoucseneaseeeaceReecnch se cnoesees A E REE pause EEES A EEES EEr ian 3 7 FMa M I EE E EE OARE A E E EEE AEE 3 7 322 OMS TA GD oreeson ien e a eE EE aA E EEEa ei 3 7 Bi TE CHO Al MC OM e E RE E 3 8 3 2 4 Using Slidebars and Other Con Sy ssisisncsovcssinssarcsenreoxasdeseannseetansiidedeededeeteoraddessudadeohenseidexees 3 8 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Table of Contents EAE 11 oad EE a E E E EE E OT O E O E 3 9 MOR A Eaa E AE E A E E E 3 10 I T a A E E A E AAE A E AAE 3 10 SANE PUS ea cine cnn E E E E daenaseanesasqaguneeeenoneces Gimennes 3 10 eE E E A E ET I ae TEE N ee T 3 11 ee a INS O a E E E EE wenceeseeepanes nee teceaueceeses 3 12
127. SON E sbulyjas obew paoueapy UOHJONpPSY Pejy YOO Z uononp y SION sbuljjag uon np y SION UBBJIS IdS G JOOYSIBAO E 9q y pjoysey e 9q JUDWSOUeYUF VN X9 Z ese ec a 1e q sBunjes ee l m uo1 e907 dweJo 6 jqeu4 10109 ONY g dojs ewweg y nd Indu lt qd gt anIq Z uo ouny ewweg JOABPJOE A lt Gd gt anld 9 BUILD Zz SAU JNdu lt A gt U9BI G UONDAOD CWULUES JOAB YOE lt A gt U9H p sumas oBew peoueapy Z sBulyjasg ewweg p SAU INU lt Id gt P Y s a 7 ndu 9 JOAS YIE lt Id gt PeHY Z SUOIdO OAPI SG J A97 ndu ony ved 10 09 y aBuey uoneznuend g9H Z4 s a 7 yndu i p n s y E u 10S dS LL ss u zy ug Z SeJ UOD SAdepy OL SEIJUOD Aejaq ewin7 ewouy 6 sBulyes obew 99 98q pON Wl g ee yuelg 34y y ai yuerg 427 10109 Y yuejg woog z yoejg oapl yndul E yuejg dol pJepue S OAPIA Z Bupuerg Buryuelg 6 99y 1 p09 q jqeuz dnjes o ny uo P ze suoljdo oap o UOHWSOd A Z i ak olydioweuy 9 UONISOg H 9 JYBI9H IIN S seyd l Xld S UIPIM TINA 7 yoe OXld Y ZI N4 y9 31 S JCOIUS E BuIZISeY ON Z ZIS Z ynez q S S ld ZIS S S ld ZIS Y a uo ISOd 9 9ZIS uoneimbiuoy 10 9 pUe G p sabeYg 29S A yBnouy doo7 aaioy Bulpueys Zy 901N0g doo7 Nd nO INAH bh Bulyoseas jndu ony OL Bulyoo7 ewe oul L Opes suyas abe
128. Select the on screen image orientation from Front 5 utput Options Rear Front Inverted and Rear Inverted ee Screen Image Orientation Front Projection Frame Locking aoe Select how the projector controls the output frame ee z Frame Locking Frame Lock z timing based on the input signal When set to Frame Lock output image frames are locked to the z input if possible When locked the output is always 6 5 Set Frame Delay 0 000 aooo 2 000 locked to the primary input never the PIP image 7 Actual Frame Delay na tome When set to Free Run sets the output to the Free j Tepe apea 59 94 Run Frequency value A pa NOTE Frame locking on projectors ina ArrayLOC W HDMI Output Loop Source Main Secondary Loop Ba network can be controlled from one projector See Synchronize Frame Delay on page 3 56 When Synchronize Frame Delay is used the master projector sets the frame delay for the synched projectors in the array Set Frame Delay This control delays the output signal timing relative to the input signal timing by a fraction of a frame and up to several frames The minimum latency can vary based on the amount of scaling applied to the image When using keystone or warping an additional latency is required depending on the amount of warp The control is only available when the input signal is frame locked In Free Run mode or in cases where the signal cannot be frame locked the minimum latency defi
129. Set blue black level to 100 on video BLB IN32 100 Set blue black level to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 BLB Returns the current blue black level value on main video BLB PIIP Returns the current blue black level value on video BLB IN12 Returns the current blue black level value on Slot 1 Input 2 BLD BLUE DRIVE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The blue drive level is used to compensate for different amounts of attenuation between the Red Green and Blue in the signal This is available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting achieves maximum contrast without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each source SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the blue drive on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 MAIN Set the blue drive on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PIIP Set the blue drive on the video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES BLD 128 Set blue drive to 128 on main video BLD MAIN 128 Set blue drive to 128 on main video BLD PHP 100 Set blu
130. Si 6 f 8 9 Bottom Blend Midpoint _ Reset Advanced Edge Blending Settings Blend Midpoint Determines the white level at the blend midpoint the point equidistant between the beginning and end of the blend Increasing the Blend Midpoint setting creates a blend that appears brighter than the rest of the image Decreasing the Blend Midpoint setting creates a blend that is darker than the rest of the image A setting of 50 means the midpoint is approximately 50 black for best results in most applications keep fairly close to this default Edge Blending Procedure NOTES 1 Before attempting to work with edge blending software functions align the projectors images by correctly overlapping the displays from your intended external source 2 Match colors and the brightness uniformity IMPORTANT For a shared edge all blend procedures and settings should be identical on both projectors 1 Start with 2 projectors Display full white field test pattern from both 2 Inthe Edge Blending submenu enable Edge Blending by selecting Standard for non warped images 3 Set Starting Points For Adjustment a Set all blend widths to 0 b Goto Advanced Edge Blending and set all options to 50 4 Set Blend Width On one projector increase the Blend Width for an overlapping edge for example if the projector image is on left its right edge overlaps the adjacent image by adjusting Right Blend Width Use the same setting on the sec
131. XX Part of Blue to adjust the color red pa te or green or blue to match the other projectors in r ene the array if necessary If measuring the projected colors pn laa a ee and comparing them to the 2 Red Pan Of Blue Ete ae Common Gamut numbers shown in the Array Status the guides at right ee eS eee indicate how to adjust the PCA to Red Part Of White 00 correct for differences Look up the Green Part Of White j 100 measured value compared to the Common Gamut 7 Blue Part Of Green gt 0 0 io 109 J Blue Part Of Blue Green Part Of Blue rion E Q SEEM Low x High x Bue Part Of White Clear Adjustments For example if the measured red High Y was 660 325 and the common red Reset Curent Adiusiments To Defaults was 640 330 then the measured X Auto Color Enable was high 660 gt 640 but the SE Low x High X measured Y was low 325 lt 330 18 Copy A usiments From Using the table for red E top table at right look up Low X ii and High Y it indicates that the MEIS Low x High x Green Part of Red needs to be increased or made positive est Patiem Enabie 19 White Brightness Adjustment Once adjustments have been made to one target color space they are usually a good starting point for other color spaces Select the other color spaces and then use the Copy Adjustments From menu item to copy the adjustments from the color space
132. a Specific Projector within a Network with Multiple Controllers present Dest Addr Src Code Data SET AND ACKNOWLEDGE MESSAGE is message from controller 5 2con 2 processed by projector 5 Dest Addr Src Code Data REPLY from projector 5 to controller 2 contrast is 64 002 005con 064 C 2 3 What is Actually Sent in a Message Although you will send and read messages as strings of ASCII characters the actual message travels as a sequence of bytes Each character in this sequence requires 1 byte The example below illustrates a lamp limit is 2000 hours reply from the projector E E EN E N T C 2 4 Maximizing Message Integrity For additional reassurance and or maximum message integrity you can insert one or two special characters e ACKNOWLEDGMENTS If you want assurance from the projector or group of projectors that a set message has been processed request an acknowledgement An acknowledgement is returned after a message has been received and fully executed by the projector i e in the case of a source switch it is not sent until the switch is complete If a message is not able to execute for some reason i e invalid parameters timeout etc a NAK is returned instead Not Acknowledge Note that requesting an acknowledgement serves no purpose when included in a request message since the acknowledgement will be redundant to the actual reply from the projector However if requested the acknowledgement fro
133. a special splash screen image such as your company logo graphic or message e Always Off A splash screen never appears e Start up Only The splash screen logo appears at projector start up only e Start up And No Signal A splash screen appears at start up and at any time when there is no signal To add your own splash screen in addition to the default CHRISTIE logo splash screen use the Web UI to download the desired bitmap bmp file to the projector This will overwrite any other user splash screen that has been downloaded NOTE Only one user splash screen can be saved in the projector Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 33 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE l 3 34 OSD Transparency Check this box if you want the On Screen Display OSD menu backgrounds to be transparent Menu Type Menu type is preset to Advanced which provides access to all projector functions Splash Screen Choose which splash screen is to be used the default or user downloaded splash screen Cascading Menus Enable or disable cascading menus When disabled a single menu level will be displayed on the OSD at a time Communications Defines and controls how single or multiple projectors are linked with each other and with a controlling device For detailed information see Appendix C Serial Communication Configuration Communications Serial RS 232 IN Options Serial RS 232 OUT Options Serial RS 422 Opt
134. able only when the Target Color Space is set to one of the user defined options User 1 though 4 Select White Point Sets the white point for the array Changing this option un checks the Set White Color to Color Temperature check box and updates the Target White x y values and the White Color Temperature Set White to Color Temperature Check this option to recalculate Target White x y values based on the specified standard White Color Temperature This option is available only when Select White Point is set to one of the user defined options User White 1 through 4 This option is unchecked automatically when you change the Select White Point option White Color Temperature Use this option to specify the white color temperature used to calculate and update the Target White x y values This option is available only when Set White to Color Temperature is checked Copy White Point From Updates Target White x y values Set White Point to Color Temperature and White Color Temperature based on the white point selected from the list This option is available only when the Select White Point option is set to one of the user defined options User White 1 through 4 Test Pattern Enable Check this option to enable the automatic display of a flat white test pattern when you select the Array Color Target menu The test pattern is turned OFF automatically when you EXIT the menu RGB Brightness Target Use this option to adjust the RGB brightn
135. adapting to image content Split Screen Allows a snap shot of the main image to be presented on the right side of the screen to allow evaluation of advanced image processing features All resizing controls are honoured on both images however image Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation processing controls only happen on the left side image Changing inputs channels or test patterns will disable this control Full Screen Eye Motion Filter Check this control to apply the eye motion filter to the entire screen rather than applying just to the edge blending regions Eye Motion Filter Adjust this filter to reduce blend region artifacts which are sometimes noticeable with saccadic eye motion Too much filtering may result in loss of detail For best results adjust this setting while positioned at the nominal screen viewing distance Color Settings IMPORTANT Use this Color Settings menu to set up Advanced Image Settings i Color Settings color manually only if you override ArrayLOC See E P A PEE r 3 4 10 How Color Settings Interact in a StIM Array Color Temperature 6500 n 9300 on page 3 72 ArrayLOC is enabled automatically and Select Color Adjustment is set to Max Drives Use the color function under ArrayLOC to manage projector color ArrayLOC color and color temperature settings override settings in this menu NOTE 7o check ArrayLOC operational status c
136. ages if projector settings turn the visible light OFF Opening the shutter restores the image The LED status display shows SH when the shutter is in either black or white modes Function Key In a Numeric Field in a Menu Use FUNC to enter a negative number In a Text Field e Press FUNC followed by the UP arrow key or DOWN arrow key to convert between capital and lowercase letters e Press FUNC followed by the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to insert or delete a character respectively e Press FUNC followed by ENTER to delete all characters Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 5 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE i Within a Presentation Press FUNC followed by 2 numbers to enable a specific color or colors in the display see Figure 3 1 For example OCOD wil display only red and OOQ will TA display green data Eliminating one or more colors can help with certain 6 C4 Yelow diagnostics and setups such as when accurately overlaying one image on top C 8 ICS J Cyan of another from stacked projectors 8 C8 J Mogais d X 6X gt White all colors Figure 3 1 Function Key Ne NGD Red On 2 Green oe C6 DC 3 Blue ya o Pane Pa fers NOTE Color enabling can also be implemented from numerous locations within the menu system Press FUNC followed by HELP to disable Keystone Edge Blending and Brightness Uniformity settings This disables the features without changing the setti
137. ain video TBL IN32 40 Set top blanking to 40 on Slot 3 Input 2 TBL Returns the top blanking value on main video TBL PIIP Returns the top blanking value on main video TBL IN12 Returns the top blanking value on Slot 1 Input 2 TCS TARGET COLOR SPACE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This command is used to set the ArrayLOC target gamut Several preset color spaces are provided in addition to four user setting gamuts The control subcodes provide access to all the presets Due to the large number of sub codes they are not all listed Instead a simple substitution for the small x is made according to the following table M Max drives read only Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 65 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE TCS TARGET COLOR SPACE Cont d EBU read only SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Selects the color space preset 0 Max drives M 4 Factory F 1 EBU E 5 User 1 1 2 SD Video S 6 User 2 2 3 HD Video H 7 User 3 3 8 User 4 4 RDxX Adjusts the x coordinate of the red color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places RDxY Adjusts the y coordinate of the red color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places GNxX Adjusts the x coordinate of the green color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places GNxY Adjusts the y coordinate of the green color point 0 800 with 3 de
138. al boresight adjustments Before beginning ensure that the projector is properly positioned relative to the screen Basic Optical Alignment Procedure 1 Display a test pattern Appropriate for analyzing image focus and geometry such as the framing test pattern showing the cross hair centered across the image Press the Test key on the remote keypad 2 Coarse focus Do a quick preliminary focus and if available zoom adjustment with the primary lens Do not worry about consistency across the image at this point just center focus It is good practice to have the zoom adjustment collar and the focus adjustment collar in the center of its range 3 Center the image in the lens Holding a piece of paper at the lens surface adjust offsets as necessary until the image is centered within the lens perimeter A full white field works best for this 4 If necessary center the image on the screen If the projector is mounted off center to the screen axis then offset the lens as much as required Aim the projector over slightly towards the center of the screen but use caution as too much tilt will cause excessive keystone distortion Lens offset will not 5 Re check side to side leveling With the framing pattern on screen double check projector leveling so the top edge of the image is parallel to the top edge of the screen 6 Throw distance Ensure that the projector is positioned in the throw distance range for the lens in use Folded O
139. al test patterns e Auto Input Level Use only if you are an experienced user and you have an unusual source that you feel needs further Color Temperature and or Input Level adjustment This compensates for incoming out of range drives white and black levels black that would cause crushing of light and dark colors in the image After entering a check mark wait for the 6 slide bar values to stabilize then delete the check mark and exit The Auto Input Level is automatically turned OFF upon exit from the Input Levels menu Black Levels and Drives IMPORTANT Do not use Input Levels to adjust color temperature This will distort contrast and brightness functions as well as color temperature Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation To check your image levels and adjust these controls 1 Confirm that you are using an input on a Dual Link DVI card Input Levels are not applicable for sources going through the decoder 2 Display a representative image for source you are setting up 3 Make sure that overall Contrast and Brightness settings are both set to near 50 4 Ifblack levels are too high or whites are too low which is rare you likely have a noisy source that is producing skewed input levels 5 To adjust levels automatically check to enable Auto Input Levels in the Input Levels menu Wait for all six Blacklevel and Input Drive values to stabilize Uncheck
140. alf the image width or the number of pixels of shift to one side of lens center Chilo Mo Mallar oleic Om ie ene ea E Shaded area projected image 960 pixels 960 pixels 480 pixels to 1440 pixels displayed display to left display to right left of lens to right of lens center of lens center of lens center center or 480 pixels of shift to right of lens center l C A N a a gt 0 Offset 50 Offset TIRSIALID EULSV GID 1 In this example no offset is applied therefore 2 In this example 50 offset is applied therefore half of the image appears to the left or lens center 3 4 or 75 of the image appears to the one side of and half appears to the right the lens center Mounting the Projector NOTICE Use only the CHRISTIE approved projector mounts designed for your projector Refer to the installation instructions and safety guidelines provided with in the kit There are several methods for mounting the projector In typical front and rear screen installations the projector can be mounted to a secure and level surface The projector can be mounted in any orientation without affecting performance 2 6 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 2 Installation and Setup 2 3 Connecting Sources All source connections are made to the input panel of the Electronics Module Each input is labeled for easy identification Using the correct cable s connect your source An
141. allow manipulation of keystone on an overshot display D 38 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference KCO KEYSTONE CURSOR OFFSET Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE KCOT Adjusts top offset KCOB Adjusts bottom offset KCOL Adjusts left offset KCOR Adjusts right offset EXAMPLES KCO KCOT 25 Offsets the cursor by 25 pixels from the top edge KCO KCOB Returns the offset value in pixels from the bottom edge KEN KEYPAD IR SENSOR DISABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enable or disable the IR or wired keypad sensors You cannot disable the keypad that is currently being used SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE FRNT Set to 1 to enable the front IR keypad sensor 0 to disable WIRE Set to 1 to enable the wired keypad jack 0 to disable EXAMPLES KEN FRNT 0 Disable front IR sensor KEN WIRE Get current wired jack enabled state KEY KEY CODE EMULATION CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Use Key Codes to emulate button presses on the IR or wired keypads SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES KEY 46 Send the Power key Down press KEY 174 Send the Power key Up release KEY View the last emulated key that was sent LBL LEFT BLANKING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down AC
142. alue on Slot 1 Input 2 RGB ADVANCED COLOR SETTING CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adjusts native projector color space by adjusting the LED power levels This can significantly increase brightness of unsaturated colors These adjustments turn on multiple RGB LEDs simultaneously which uses more power and increases the possibility of over heating SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE CLRM Color Mode Selects 1 Native 4 User preset 2 2 EBU 5 User preset 3 3 User preset 1 6 User preset 4 ROFR Red part of red 0 255 Blue part of blue 0 255 RGBB Controls overall brightness of LEDs 0 1000 percentage with one decimal place COPY Copies color mode settings from an existing preset to the current preset Values 1 Copy from Native 4 Copy from User 2 2 Copy from EBU 5 Copy from User 3 3 Copy from User 1 6 Copy from User 4 D U1 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference RGB ADVANCED COLOR SETTING Cont d EXAMPLE RGB ROFR 128 Set Red of Red value RGB BOEFB Get Blue of Blue value RGB RGBB 500 Set overall brightness to 50 RGB CLRM 4 Select user preset 2 RGB COPY 2 Copy EBU preset values to current preset ROG RED ODD PIXEL GAIN CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adds an offset to In
143. and Reference CH ISTIE FIL FILTER 0 OFF 2 HDTV 1 HDTV High Bandwidth 3 EDTV 4 SDTV SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the filter for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the filter for main video PIIP Set the filter for main video EXAMPLES FIL 2 Set the filter for main video to HDTV FIL MAIN 2 Set the filter for main video to HDTV FIL IN32 2 Set the filter for Slot 3 Input 2 to HDTV FLE FRAME LOCK ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control enables or disables Frame Lock which controls how the projector controls the output frame timing based on the Input signal When set to Frame Lock output image frames are locked to the Input if possible When locked the output is always locked to the primary Input never the image Free Run sets the output to close to 60Hz for all sources This control must be set to locked if a 3D Stereo signal is used SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLES FLE 0 Free Run output FLE 1 Enables frame lock FLE Get frame lock enabled status FLW SERIAL FLOW CONTROL CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Set the flow control for a serial communications port SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE PRTA Set the mode on port A RS 232 IN PRTB Set the mode on port B RS 232 OUT PRTC Set the mode on port C RS 422 EXAMPLES FLW PRTA 0 Se
144. and maintaining tiled images that form a cohesive display wall in which the color cast and light output appear uniform throughout each image as well as throughout the entire wall The procedure provided here assumes a multiple screen application NOTE For information about the Eye Motion Filter fields see Noise Reduction on page 3 28 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 39 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i IMPORTANT Read through the entire procedure before attempting to adjust the brightness uniformity controls Adjust Brightness Uniformity 1 Adjust the primary colors as described in Managing Colors with ArrayLOC on page 3 57 procedure before attempting to work with brightness uniformity This ensures that primary colors color temperature and maximized light output are all well matched from one screen to another These matches are needed before you can achieve good brightness uniformity results IMPORTANT Double check that all WHITES and LIGHT OUTPUT are well matched 2 Select the Brightness Uniformity check box This will enable access to the uniformity controls and will apply the settings to your image 3 Select the 13 Point test pattern for Full White for display The 13 Point test pattern provides nine screen zones with 13 E O targets see Figure 3 20 ao 4 Determine by eye or meter which areas need to be adjusted For Best Results Rather than examining the CENTER of each ES
145. are excluded from the calculations of the common gamut and common brightness Excluded projectors are flagged in the Bright ColorLOC Array Status window with an M If the projector falls below the minimum the projector operates at its current brightness and gamut Changes will not be made Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 49 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 50 Minimum Gamut Use this option to set the minimum gamut as a percentage of the target gamut that the array will display and to set the threshold for alerts from projectors that cannot achieve the specified minimum Projectors that fall below the minimum are excluded from the calculations of the common gamut and common brightness Excluded projectors are flagged in the capabilities window with a m If the projector is unable to maintain the minimum gamut the projector operates at the current brightness and color gamut LED drive level changes and electronic color correction is not done NOTE The failure point for maintaining minimum gamut is calculated as Target a a Green Primary 5 lt minimum gamut a For example see the diagram at the right Where b is the length b of the line from the target white point to the target color Target primary and a is the length of the line from the target white White point to the intersection of the projector capability gamut line and the line from the target white point to the target color pri
146. argets 0 9999 BRTG Brightness Target Sets the target brightness that the projectors in the array brightness group should meet 0 1000 Lumens Minimum Brightness Sets the minimum brightness as a percentage of target brightness that the projector will display if it is capable 0 100 percent MING Minimum Gamut Sets the minimum gamut as a percentage of the target gamut that the projector will display if it is capable 0 100 percent ADIN Adjustment interval Controls the interval in seconds that this BRIN Broadcast interval Controls the interval in seconds that this projector will update the projector array 1 9999 ALBV When set all projectors in brightness group will use this projectors settings 0 OFF normal 1 synchronize to group Note A group can synchronize to only one projector Setting ABL ABLYV on any projector in a group to make that projector the master projector releases the setting from any previous master projector in the group Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 1 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE ABL ARRAY BRIGHT COLOR LOC Cont d DEVC Specifies the ethernet port used for transfer of ColorLOC data When selected will use the PHM network ethernet port rather than default EM network ethernet port 0 PHM network 1 EM network WENA FUTURE USE Enable warnings associated with Bright ColorLOC 0 disable 1 enable WBTH FUTU
147. atible Polarity 2 Positive or Negative Input Levels 2 0 5Vpp 4 0Vpp DC Operating Range 2 3V Nominal Impedance 2 75 ohms Horizontal Sync Duty Cycle 3 min 20 max NOTES 1 Value specifies frame rate of non interlaced sources and field rate for interlaced sources Frame field rates higher than the maximum refresh rate of the panels will be displayed at a lower rate 2 Does not apply to sync on green luma 3 As the horizontal frequency increases and or as the vertical scaling ratio of input lines to output lines increases many sources will run into the internal 180Mpix s processing which limits the number of pixels that can be processed DVI I ANALOG Input Characteristics Same as Analog RGB except as noted below Formats RGB or YPbPr video signal cannot be routed to the decoder 7 8 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Section 7 Specifications Sync Types Separate H and V direct or swapped Bi level TTL levels only Composite XOR OR Sync on green Serrations and or Equalization pulses MacroVision standard amp progressive Analog Sync Logic Low OV 0 8v Analog Sync Logic High 2 4V 5V Analog Sync Input Impedance kW Input Characteristics meets DVI spec DVI Cable Length 5m Single Link DVI Pixel Rate 25 165 MPix sec Dual Link DVI pixel rate 165 330 MPix sec EDID Supported HDCP High Speed Digital Content Supported Protection RS 232 RS 422 SERIAL IN
148. ay Status Target Gamut 800 330 160 800 125 000 313 329 lt Target Common Gamut 687 306 193 738 150 34 313 329 Flags ProjID Group Int Age Rx Ry RY Gx Gy GY Bx By BY Wx Wy WY Figure 3 23 Array Status The array status window includes the following information 1 211 1 1 692 304 283 2 185 748 696 8 139 28 67 2 313 329 369 1 0 211 1 1 687 306 109 9 193 741 123 4 145 23 17 9 313 329 361 2 2 211 1 1 699 296 416 5 188 745 7785 141 29 91 7 313 329 418 0 3 211 1 1 700 181 749 23 313 B29 390 5 e The target gamut and calculated common gamut are shown in the same format as the projector data below For the common gamut if it is smaller than the target gamut this is indicated in the flags column with lt Target e The Flags column uses several characters to identify projectors within the array e The least red projector is identified with a lowercase r e The least green projector is identified with a lowercase g e The least blue projector is identified with a lowercase b The dimmest projector is identified with a lowercase w e The projector with white brightness capability less than Target brightness is identified with an uppercase W Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Any projector with broadcast mode enabled is identified with an asterisk if broadcasting to its Bright Color group The Proj ID column shows the projector array ID The Group
149. black level is used to compensate for relative variations in the black levels between Red Green and Blue Available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting is when the maximum contrast is achieved without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each signal SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the red black level on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 MAIN Set the red black level on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PHP Set the red black level on the main video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES RDB 128 Set red black level to 128 on main video RDB MAIN 128 Set red black level to 128 on main video RDB PIIP 100 Set red black level to 100 on main video RDB IN32 100 Set red black level to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 RDB Returns the current red black level value on main video RDB PIIP Returns the current red black level value on main video RDB IN12 Returns the current red black level value on Slot 1 Input 2 RDD RED DRIVE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator
150. ccessories User Kit P N 125 107109 xx User Manual electronic and hard copy e Installation Manual electronic and hard copy e All necessary tools for normal servicing Input Cards Other Input Cards e Digital DVI Input Card VGA Input Card P N 108 312101 xx e Twin HDMI Input Card P N 108 311101 xx e Analog BNC Input Card P N 108 309101 xx e Dual SD HD SDI Input Card P N 108 313 101 xx e Video Decoder Input Card P N 108 310101 xx Service Manual e Service Manual P N 020 100201 xx Motoblend Mounting Kit e Custom Motoblend Mounting Kit Lenses e Fixed 0 64 1 HD WUXGA P N 125 103105 xx e Fixed 0 75 1 HD WUXGA P N 125 105107 xx e Zoom 1 2 1 6 1 HD WUXGA P N 125 101103 xx Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 7 7 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 7 Specifications CH 1S TIE 7 9 Inputs ANALOG RGB OR YPRPB Interlaced or Progressive Scan Format Pixel Clock Rate 13 270 MHz max NOTE Pixel rates above 150MHz require DIPC Color Space RGB or YCbCr Input Levels R G B with sync 1 0Vp p 2dB R G B without sync 0 7Vp p 2dB Pb Pr 0 7p p 2dB DC Offset 2V Nominal Impedance 75 ohms SYNC Interlaced or Progressive Scan Format Horizontal Frequency Range 15 150Hz Vertical Frequency Range 1 3 23 150Hz Sync Type Separate H and V Composite bi level tri level XOR Sync On Green luma bi level tri level Serrations and or Equalization pulses MarcoVision comp
151. cessed so that very bright and very dark signals display as fully ON or OFF and everything in between is set to mid level gray The Input levels should be adjusted so that bright and dark objects in the image are just visible Output Level Detector This is an aid for setting up the Input levels It causes the data to be processed so that all levels below a specified value are set to black and all above and including it are set to white Level Detector Threshold Specifies the threshold to be used by the level detector Light Engine Test Pattern One of 3 light module test patterns may be displayed black white or grey scale Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 47 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE l LED Strobe Adjust During power up the projector will automatically optimize LED strobe timing the time between when a LED is told to turn on versus when it actually does turn on If the strobe timing is not optimal color banding may be seen on grey levels Use this advanced option to correct color banding by adjusting the slider left or right as required Service The Service menu is intended for use by accredited Christie service technicians only It is passcode protected Option Card Settings Allows adjustment of any settings specific to each option card that is currently installed in the projector ArrayLOC Menu Use this menu to set up your projector array color Configuration and brightness ArrayLOC B
152. cimal places Adjusts the x coordinate of the blue color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places BLxY Adjusts the y coordinate of the blue color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places COPY Copy gamut settings from preset to current Value 0 8 for source preset CCAP Read only field which returns string that gives relationship between projector capability and the color target w aA Al we NS el al ml wl oo J p lt EXAMPLES TCS SLCT 1 Select EBU color gamut as target TCS RDCX 290 Set current Target gamut red x point to 0 290 TCS BLEY Return value of EBU preset blue y point TCS COPY 3 Copy settings from HD Video to current D 66 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference TED TWIN HDMI EDID TYPE SELECTION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the preferred EDID Timings on the Twin HDMI Input card Available Models are 0 Default 1 3D 2 Custom NOTE 3D option 1 is not supported for Entero or Matrix StIM SIM SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLxy Set the EDID timings on Slot x to the specified type EXAMPLES TED SL31 2 Set EDID type to 2 Custom on Slot 3 Input 1 TED SL12 Returns the current EDID type on Slot 1 Input 2 TIL TILING CONTROL CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE RVAL Set the
153. coming signal Selecting a specific standard forces the projector to process the signal according to this standard NOTE Best results are obtained with defined channels Otherwise switching from one video source to another can sometimes cause slight disturbances in the display indicating that the Auto function is struggling Recover by briefly selecting a different video standard then going back Table 3 4 Regions and Video Standards Summary STANDARD WHERE USED Subject to Change PAL Most of Europe China Australia some of S America and some of Africa NTSC N America and Japan SECAM France Eastern Europe most of Africa NTSC 4 43 A tape only standard for partially translated hybrid signals PAL M Brazil PAL NC Argentina Chile other Latin American countries PAL 60 Most of Europe NOTE Generally use Auto for all instances except a poor quality input signal or a black and white video signal In order to detect and display such signals select the relevant standard from the list e Input Video Black This control compensates for incoming elevated black levels present in certain video signals and ensures that blacks in the display are neither crushed 1 e where dark grays appear black nor excessively elevated 1 e where blacks appear dark gray By default the projector automatically determines the best setting according to the type of incoming video signal If grays are black select gt _1 0 IRE I
154. ct the Geometry amp Color EEPE EFE submenu when you need to modify overall color performance PARN v and or image geometry for all sources Tireta g rei Test Pattern _ Brightness Uniformity Choose the desired internal test pattern or select OFF to turn off Edge Blending a test pattern Alternatively use the TEST key for cycling 5 Array Color Target through test patterns _ Projector Color Adjustment Black Level Blending Geometry Correction Keystoning is typically caused by tilting the projector in relation to the screen so that the lens surface and screen are no longer parallel to each other Use the projector menu options to make basic keystone adjustments appropriate for flat screens For complex geometry correction for example for spherical screen see the TWIST User Manual 020 100143 xx Tiling Setup Manual RGB Adjustment Settings to adjust keystone are in the Geometry Correction submenu Brightness Uniformity Geometry amp Color Edge Blending and Black Level Blending should Geometry Correction be disabled before performing keystone _ Geometry Correction adjustments Test Pattern Vertical keystone is used to correct a keystoned _ Adjust Horizontal Keystone image shape in which the top and bottom borders of p Pe spe the image are unequal in length and both sides of the image are inclined toward the top or bottom edge see Figure 3 17 Adjust 2D Keystone Reset Keystone Settings 2D Keystone C
155. ction EFEC an N a E EE E E EE A eee ae eee eats 1 1 MAE Ee MEE 0 1c en P E ET E E AT A E ne A E E 1 1 ko Purchase R cord and Seryice ContaciS erasini nE 1 2 AEO LO O N a E E E EA E EE 1 2 14 1 Projection Head Mod le PHM caacesscacesaceoneronoseneaencacescenseeacsseaacesonanesanesonengiwassensnacoateneaceeeecs 1 3 Man POWT N AE EE EEA TAE A T 1 3 t42 TCC Om 1S Module F M jenere in a A E EEN 1 3 PAT E e E E EE E 1 3 EDP e a E 1 3 w E D e E E E E E E I A ET A A EE 1 3 E E RE NSO A A E pale ea ante E EE ea EE E E E 1 3 tk limage Processi E oieri ei ENEN aE E EN so EE A EE EAE E AS 1 3 E Sy TIS E E E essen EE EEEO EE EE 1 4 KA em a 0 ge Ge Troeco WORS een E E N er oe Tre 1 4 EEC Or CONDONE I e A ne A A AAN 1 4 2 Installation and Setup 2A dhe sta a vim ons dera OS en E E mach shabinducasaedts 2 1 2 11 Installation Considerato scosese e EE ESEE E 2 1 A EAE IE o a E EEE A TE O A E 2 1 2L Liting Iransporing and Mounino s esreissc eiren EE EEEE 2 2 2 2 Installing the ProjectOr ccccccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaas 2 3 Daeg We pak na e P O O eea R EE E E E E E 2 3 22 T ea Mat TAG LE e E E E EE E 2 3 2 2 Lens Focus Adjustment tor Fixed LENSO Serea 2 4 2 2 4 Calculating Throw Distance Position and Mount Projector ccccccseesssessssssessesseeeeeees 2 5 Projector Vertical and Horizontal Position cccccccceeeeeeessesseeeeeeseeseseeeseeeseeeee
156. ctor Color Adjustment Reserved Reserved 3 Reserved ArrayLOC Configuration ArrayLOC j Select the Projector Color Adjustment 5 submenu and proceed to step 2 13 ArrayLOC d Step 2 Fine Tuning of Projected Colors Note Projector Color Adjustments are specific to each color space so when the selected Target Color Space is changed the adjustments from a previously tuned color space should be copied see Tip below to the adjustments for the new color space and if necessary projector tuning repeated Display a white test pattern on all projectors On each projector use the Array LOC Projector Color Adjustments PCA Red Part of White Green Part of White and Blue Part of White to adjust the white color to match the other projectors in the array if necessary Display a white test pattern on all projectors On each projector use the Array LOC Projector Color Adjustments PCA White Brightness Adjustment WBA to adjust the white brightness to match the other projectors in the array if necessary Increasing the WBA will make the projector brighter decreasing the WBA will dim the projector Main Menu Configuration Display a red or green or blue test pattern on all projectors On each projector use the ArrayLOC Projector Color Adjustments PCA XXX Part of Red or XXX Part of Green or 00 J eomm X
157. ctors OR Are the Minimum Gamut and Minimum Brightness thresholds Call Tech Support set to appropriate levels M No Yes Feedback Sensor Uncalibrated Yes Min Brightness Not Met Has the ArrayLOC been ON for at least 2 minutes Yes Min Gamut Not Met No Proceed to Fine Tuning of Projected Colors Managing Colors with ArrayLOC in Section 3 Copy PCAs from tuned LEL AR 0 mrs E See page 3 11 Troubleshooting Tree Array Colors Projector Color Adjustments PCAs are specific to each Target Color Space so when the selected Target Color Space is changed the adjustments from a No A3 No Do the PCAs for the selected array Target Color Space match the PCAs from the tuning A2 previously tuned color space should be copied as a baseline for the adjustments in the new color space and if necessary projector tuning repeated Is the problem with the array color See page 3 11 09 Troubleshooting Tree Array Colors Has the array been tuned A5 Does the Status page on missing projector s show any BCLOC errors A 1 Yes Does the array projector count No equal the expected number of projectors Are the missing projectors correctly wired to the ArrayLOC network Bright ColorLOC Array Status Yes A12 CD Target Gamut 800 330 160 800 125 000 313 329 lt Target Common Gamut 687 306 193 738 150 34 313 329 Are the missing proj
158. cursors are a guide as to how the image will be adjusted The outside edge of a cursor will be the outside edge of the image It may not be possible to exactly match the screen dimensions with the Horizontal and Vertical Keystone controls but these settings can be refined when the 2D keystone settings are adjusted 4 When adjustment of the corners is complete select OK NOTE A message will be displayed indicating that the projector is Processing request The settings are applied to the displayed image and will take approximately 10 seconds 5 After the Horizontal or Vertical adjustments have been made selecting 2D Keystone adjustments will retain these settings Fine adjustment can now be made by moving any single corner separately 6 Use the arrow keys to move to the required corner NOTE The current corner will be displayed in red 7 Press ENTER to select the corner NOTE The current corner will be displayed in green 8 Use the arrow keys to move the selected corner to match the screen 9 Press ENTER again to save that position for the corner 10 Repeat Steps 6 to 9 to adjust all 4 corners until they match the screen 11 Select OK to apply the new corner positions to the image NOTE A message will be displayed for approximately 10 seconds indicating that the projector is Processing request 3 38 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Under certain combinat
159. curve for video EXAMPLES BGF 100 Set the base Gamma Function to 1 0 for main video BGF MAIN 300 Set the base Gamma Function to 3 0 for main video BGF IN32 222 Set the base Gamma Function to 2 22 for Slot 3 Input 2 D 10 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference BGS BASE GAMMA SLOPE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Defines the slope to be used for the base custom Gamma table in the small linear section at the bottom of the curve This slope can be used to bring the low level blacks in the image in or out This slope combined with the Gamma function defines the custom Gamma table The valid range is 50 200 where 50 is a slope of 0 5 and 200 is a slope of 2 00 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the base gamma curve for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the base gamma curve for main video PIIP Set the base gamma curve for video EXAMPLES BGS 100 Set the base gamma slope to 1 0 for main video BGS MAIN 200 Set the base gamma slope to 2 0 for main video BGS IN32 150 Set the base gamma slope to 1 5 for Slot 3 Input 2 BKY BROADCAST KEY MODE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Toggle Broadcast Key Mode to select whether all key presses received by the projector will be relayed to all other projectors on the network SUBCODE DESCRIPTION
160. d Scheduled Event System Event GPIO Event Function Key Event DMX Channel Event Start Time Once 2009 09 15 Daily Weekly 10 25 52 Monthly Projector Date and Time 2009 09 15 10 31 49 Descripiion A Command String GPIO Output Helper Hep A a Serial Representation KIE EZE 3 Select the frequency option for the event by selecting either Once Daily Weekly or Monthly NOTES 1 End Date is enabled when Daily Weekly or Monthly repeat options are selected 2 Depending on the frequency option that you select a related Repeat Every is highlighted on the tab Use this area to enter the frequency of each event 4 Click within the Start Time field to open a calendar pop up window 5 Navigate to and choose a desired date The selected date will populate the Start Time field 6 In the field below the Start Time field enter a start time in the format hr min sec The default is the current time 7 Click Sync to set the computer and projector time to be the same otherwise the event will run based on the projector time Enter a description of the scheduled event in the Description field NOTE Maximum of 100 characters 9 Enter a serial command or a sequence of serial commands with which you wish the projector to perform in the Command String box e Ifa GPIO command string is needed click the GPIO Output Helper Sein Seat button for instructions on how to create the comma
161. d entry as required B 6 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE B 3 4 Admin Tab System Appendix B WebUI Under the Admin tab select the System secondary tab to upgrade upload backup and restore specific files change the Logo position background color gamma properties and interrogate the projector creating a zip file of information CHRISTIE amp Admin Select File Type Select File Type A gt Restore Select File Type eS e es U0 E F Logo comer and Bac gt Advanced Gamma Si i Projector Date and Time zl 2010 04 15 15 32 41 Logout un zor Backup Restore interrogate Upgrade Tooltip Hide System The following table describes each area found in the Admin window A Restore section allows you to select the file and file type that you wish to restore Logo Position and Background Color section is enabled when you select a Logo file type from the Upload section Upload Backup Restore and Interrogator buttons perform their respective functions after the setting for the function have first been selected from the drop down lists and other fields on the left Backup section allows you to select the file and file type tha
162. dino z benbue7 1 Ol p bld 99S UB S L 6 ebenbue7 g BulyoyMs 9 nduj Ayepuocdes Z snje s 9 uoneinByUuoyd y dnjes jauueyy g sBuies bewl Zz UOIPSOd 8 ZIS nua ule 4 5 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Menu Tree Section 4 4 1 3 Menu Tree Continued ArrayLOC 9S8Jq GOYeMU sjuawjsni py 9 sjobiel qoyesul 4 yneyeq oL sepoy Buyl Iy 9S9 9 ynejeq oL apo Buyybrq jueung jesey G Wol4 apo Bunyp Adoy y ssoujybug HI ss u yfug gJ9H Z po Huny gOYXLU pow uny n yuo 4 HIOMON 9O0T eNY uoljeinbyUuoy 9074ey sjuowsnipy 9 Jobe GOQuesul Z po Buys esnByuod OL po Huny p39 9S 6 s ndu epuo2 X ule dems Gc indu Auepuodes y yndu ule E gouenbas nos s qOYeu Z g9 He zu B qeuz g9 e ul u wsnfpy ss uzyfug YUM wol4 sjuewjsnipy Adod jqeu4 Weed S l jqeuz 10 09 Ony s nej p 0 syu wysnfpe Juano JeSOy syu w snfpy 12919 SHUM JO Hed nig SHUM JO Wed U93919 SHUM JO Wed psy anjg JO Wed UBB njg JO Hed Poy njg JO Hed ani u 19 JO ed anjg UBB JO Yed pay UBD JO Hed UBAI poy 40 Hed ang poy JO Wed UBS PoY JO Hed poy g0eds 10 09 jebue yuowysnipy 10109 10 99foig OTN OTTO OR CO OD S wel wel eel wel eel wel eel eel wel we
163. ds to connect devices that transmit digital and analog video signals NOTE For true digital output from devices that transmit digital signals connect to the DVI I connector Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 2 7 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 2 Installation and Setup CH IS TIE l Dual Link Digital Video Input DVI Input Card This card accepts a maximum 330MHz DVI D or 165MHz HDMI signal via the DVI I connector without High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP and analog video signals over the DVI I or 15 pin VGA connector The module can simultaneously support a digital signal on the DVI input and an analog signal on the VGA port however it does not support 2 analog signals at the same time There are 4 LEDs on the module faceplate PWR indicates power 1s applied and the card is initialized and the other 3 LEDs on the right side of the corresponding connectors indicate that a valid signal has been detected Dual Link DVI Input 108 312101 01 5 O So REEFS S O ofc e S Signal 1 Dual Link DVI I 2 VGA g Twin HDMI Input Card This card accepts 1 or 2 HDMI inputs and can route one or both inputs to the card s outputs Any input from any card can be looped out of this card The output label 1 OUT loops out the main image being displayed on the projector The output labelled 2 OUT loops out the image displayed in the picture in picture Any input from any optional input card can be looped out of this card
164. e 2 19 and 2 12 Cleaning the Lens on page 2 19 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 2 3 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 2 Installation and Setup CH IS TIE i 2 2 3 Lens Focus Adjustment for Fixed Lenses 2 4 This section describes best practices for lens focus adjustment of the 0 64 1 WUXGA lens PN 002 120444 02 and the 0 75 1 PN 002 120415 01 The lenses have focus and field curvature correction to sharpen the projected image Failure to properly adjust lens focus results in an image that is not uniformly focused and contains geometric distortion l 2 3 Loosen the main locking screw and the focusing screw Adjust the focusing screw for best focus in the image center Loosen the field curvature locking screw and adjust the field curvature focusing ring to sharpen the image corners Refer to the image below as an aid to gage the specific preset for your screen size Finally the focus screw should be adjusted for best overall screen focus Although it is not necessary you may want to retighten the main locking screw NOTE Use a maximum of 4in lbs to tighten the main locking screw Focusing sc Field curv focusing i locking scre CHRISTIE 0 64 1 wuxeal g 0 64 WUXGA 0 69 1 SXGA Lens Part Number 002 120444 02 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 2 Installation and Setup 2 2 4 Calculating Throw Distance Position and Mount Projector Throw distance is the di
165. e select a User White item 1 to 4 e Adjust Target White x and Target White y values or e Check the Set White to Color Temperature box and set the White Color Temperature value to any value between 3200 and 9300 K 6 To adjust the target brightness for the array adjust RGB Brightness Target on the master projector For maximum brightness set the value to a large number such as 1000 7 Ifthe array appears matched across all projectors for color and brightness color setup is complete otherwise see Fine tune Whites White Brightness or Primary Colors on page 3 59 NOTE Array Capability expresses the common gamut red green blue and white values of the current projector as a percentage of the array target color and brightness values see Minimum Gamut on page 3 50 If any of these values is less than 100 there is at least one projector in the array that cannot achieve target values Reducing Target Color Space and RGB Brightness Target values in the master projector will bring the Array Capability values closer to 100 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Fine tune Whites White Brightness or Primary Colors ArrayLOC Projector Color Adjustment Target Color Space User 1 Red Part Of Red 100 0 200 0 Projector Color Adjustment lets you fine tune color or brightness for individual projectors that don t quite match the array For more information see
166. e Logo Upload window Click Yes or No to confirm or cancel the upload An Upload in Progress window appears Click the Upload Browse button to open the Choose file window Locate and select the file you wish to upload from a Network drive location or from your hard drive Click the Upload button to display the Logo Upload window a Enter a descriptive name in the Display Name field b Click the Upload button to display the Gamma Upload window Click Yes or No to confirm or cancel the upload respectively An Upload in Progress window appears Create a Backup File l 2 Select a file type All Preferences Configuration Channels or Users from the Backup drop down list Click Backup to initiate the download A Backup in Progress bar appears Once finished a File Download window appears Click Save to open a Save As window Locate and select a folder within your Network drive or hard drive where you wish to save the file Click Save Restore a File l Select a file type All Preferences Configuration Channels Users or Real Time Events from the Restore drop down list NOTE Do not select All unless transferring all files from one projector to another or cloning Click the Browse button to locate and select the file you wish to restore from a Network drive location or from your hard drive Click Restore to initiate the restore A Restore in Progress bar appears Once finished a confirmation message appears Per
167. e UP arrow to switch ON or the DOWN arrow to switch OFF You can also press and hold the appropriate button for 2 seconds or press it twice quickly See 3 1 1 IR Remote on page 3 2 Arrow keys are held down for continuous adjustment movement in the related key direction NOTE n serial networks pause briefly between adjustments to make sure that more distant projectors can keep up with the commands If you press a key while the projector is still responding to the previous action such as during power up the second key press may not take effect See 3 7 7 IR Remote on page 3 2 for the description of those keys provided for the standard IR remote keypad Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 1 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation 3 1 1 IR Remote Test e Display a test pattern Power e Turn projector ON or OFF Plug In for Remote Keypad e Left side of remote keypad Slots e Display the source from the next active input on the card in the selected slot NOTE If PIP is on Input keys affect the PIP window only Input e Select an active or inactive input on any slot PIP e Turn picture in picture ON or OFF Menu e Display menus Arrow Keys e Adjust a setting up or down e Navigate within a menu Channel e Select channel setup Laser e Activate laser pointer at front of keypad Gamma e Adjust mid range levels Number Keys e Enter a number such as channel value etc N
168. e adjusted as desired You cannot use Auto Setup with a locked channel If checked all of the image settings for this channel are locked If unchecked default all available Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 3 15 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 4 3 4 1 3 16 Table 3 3 Channel Edit Options Option Description Previous Select this option to see or change channel settings for the previous channel in the Channel Setup list Channel Next Select this option to see or change channel settings for the next channel in the Channel Setup list Channel Adjusting the Image The most commonly used options for image adjustments are accessed through 2 menus Size and Position MENU 1 and Image Settings MENU 2 both of which appear in the Main menu You can change settings affecting the image from the current channel by working with the appropriate slide bars check boxes and drop down lists from either of these 2 menus EXIT returns to the previous menu or to the presentation if from the Main menu and accepts any changes you may have entered Settings are saved with the current channel From your presentation you can access any of the individual options in these menus by pressing MENU followed by the appropriate number keys representing their location in the menu system For example press MENU 2 7 1 to quickly access the Gamma option in the Image Settings menu NOTES 1 Some frequently used
169. e contrast on the main video to the specified value in the range of 0 1000 EXAMPLES CON 500 Set contrast to 500 on main video CON MAIN 500 Set contrast to 500 on main video CON PIIP 250 Set contrast to 250 on main video CON IN32 100 Set contrast to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 CON Returns the current contrast value on main video CON PIIP Returns the current contrast value on main video CON IN12 Returns the current contrast value on Slot 1 Input 2 CRM CHROMA LUMA DELAY CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Chroma Luma delay adjusts the time delay between the chroma and the luminance signals in decoded signals Adjust the delay to eliminate shadows occurring with adjacent colors It is useful only for video images processed by decoder cards SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the luma delay on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 3 pixel to 3 pixel MAIN Set the luma delay on the main video to the specified value in the range 3 pixel to 3 pixel PHP Set the luma delay on the main video to the specified value in the range of 3 pixel to 3 pixel Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 19 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE CRM CHROMA LUMA DELAY Cont d EXAMPLES CRM 3 Set luma delay to 3 pixel on main video CRM MAIN 3 Set luma delay to 3 pixel on main video
170. e current brightness value on main video BRT PIIP Returns the current brightness value on video BRT IN12 Returns the current brightness value on Slot 1 Input 2 BRU BRIGHTNESS UNIFORMITY CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator Enable Disable brightness uniformity and adjust brightness uniformity output SLCT Enable Disable Brightness Uniformity eae UIRT Restore all parameters to factory default EXAMPLES BRU SLCT Get current state of brightness uniformity 0 is disabled 1 is enabled BRU SLCT 1 Enable brightness uniformity D 14 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference CCD OUTPUT COLOR DEFAULT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Specifies the default color adjustment to use for new channels This allows the user to specify a standard color and have that color applied by default to all new sources The user may override this for any specific channel Using the default subcode applies a default to be used when creating a new channel using auto setup while the YNF is not in the video path Using the subcode DYNF allows a different color table default to be specified while the YNF is in the video path during auto setup SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Apply a default table to use while running auto setup when a YNF filter is not
171. e drive to 100 on video BLD IN32 100 Set blue drive to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 BLD Returns the current blue drive value on main video BLD PIIP Returns the current blue drive value on video BLD IN12 Returns the current blue drive value on Slot 1 Input 2 D 12 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference BOG BLUE ODD PIXEL GAIN CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This adds an offset to Input blue gain settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLES BOG SL10 10 Set a blue gain offset to 10 on Slot 1 BOO BLUE ODD PIXEL OFFSET CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This adds an offset to Input blue black level settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLES BOO SL10 10 Set a blue black level offset to 10 on Slot 1 BRT BRIGHTNESS
172. e image This can be used to blank out any unwanted data near the right edge of the image A positive amount of blanking makes the image smaller A negative amount of blanking makes the image larger Negative blanking is only applicable to analog signals when the auto setup has not been able to set the image size correctly It is preferable not to use negative blanking but to run auto setup again ensuring that the content has active pixels on each edge of the image The maximum amount of right blanking allowed is half the image width minus 10 For negative blanking the image size can only be increased to the limit of the sync SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the right blanking for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the right blanking for the main image PHP Set the right blanking for the main image EXAMPLES RBL 40 Set right blanking to 40 on main video RBL MAIN 40 Set right blanking to 40 on main video RBL PIIP 40 Set right blanking to 40 on main video RBL IN32 40 Set right blanking to 40 on Slot 3 Input 2 RBL Returns the right blanking value on main video RBL PIIP Returns the right blanking value on main video RBL IN12 Returns the right blanking value on Slot 1 Input 2 D 54 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference RDB RED BLACK LEVEL CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Red
173. e non cinema display is jittery or blinking erratically make sure that the source is properly connected and of adequate quality for detection With a poor quality or improperly connected source the projector repeatedly tries to display an image however briefly 2 The horizontal or vertical scan frequency of the input signal may be out of range for the projector The sync signal may be inadequate Correct the source problem 6 5 3 The Display is Faint 1 The source may be double terminated Make sure that the source is terminated only once 2 The source if non video may need sync tip clamping 3 Check RGB Brightness setting and Brightness Uniformity control 4 Ifthe Twist software was used test by disabling the blend 6 5 4 The Upper Portion of the Display is Waving Tearing or Jittering 1 This can occur with video or VCR sources Check your source 2 Check that the RGB Brightness setting is not unexpectedly low Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 6 5 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting CH IS TIE i 6 5 5 Portions of the Display are Cut OFF or Warped to the Opposite edge Resizing may need adjustment Adjust until the entire image is visible and centered 6 5 6 Display Appears Compressed Vertically Stretched 1 The frequency of the pixel sampling clock is incorrect for the current source 2 Sizing and positioning options may be adjusted poorly for the incoming source signal 3 Check the geometry corr
174. e options e Simultaneous RGB IR Main the RGB and IR signals are both taken from the main input e Interleaved RGB Main IR Secondary the RGB signal is taken from the main input and the IR signal is taken from the secondary input Interleaved RGB IR Main RGB IR Secondary both RGB and IR signals are taken from both channels Main Input Select the slot input for RGB from the drop down list Secondary Input Select the slot input for IR from the drop down list Swap Main amp Secondary Input Click to swap between the Main and Secondary inputs Edit Secondary Channel Settings Select to allow independent secondary channel control during interleaved operation By default size and position controls act on both channels at the same time Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 61 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CHix IS TIE i 3 62 Selected Lighting Mode The Lighting mode sets the RGB and IR illumination brightness Choose the Lighting mode to set the RGB and IR brightness for the RGB video source A factor of 100 is the full brightness of the available video Selecting one of the other presets reduces the brightness as outlined below Table 3 6 Light Mode Brightness Settings PRESET NAME RGB BRIGHTNESS IR BRIGHTNESS NOTES 1 You can change the factors for the light modes in the InfraRGB gt Configure Lighting Mode 2 Brightness of the video can be affected by Geometry amp Color For example if
175. e precisely to the screen used at the site See 3 2 4 Using Slidebars and Other Controls on page 3 8 if you need help using any of the options and controls Changes made in the Size and Position menu are applied immediately and are saved when you exit the menu press EXIT or MENU Main Menu Size amp Position Resize Presets Default M Size 2 221 9 500 4 000 v Vertical Stretch 0 938 200 3 000 Pixel Track 1728 on ee 0 Pixel Phase 0 31 H Position 0 V Position Keep Aspect On Auto Setup m Mao O N a n a a Blanking Resize Presets Resize Presets will display an image in its native resolution no resizing or will resize the image by ae kal _ i maximizing either the height width or both height eee ee 8 oN 8 No Resizing Display in native resolution and width or will resize to the maximum size Full Size Fill the screen regardless of source possible while keeping the original aspect ratio Full Width Fill display width and keep aspect ratio Size Position and Blanking parameters will Full Height Fill display height and keep aspect ratio automatically adjust accordingly or if Blanking is demic Retain 16 9 aspect ratio Custom set first to define an Active Input Area Resize Preset scaling will occur in this region of interest only e Custom re size option does not initially appear in the Resize Presets drop down list The Resize Presets value changes to Custo
176. e special user curves have been installed their names will appear in the Gamma Table drop down list Gamma Function Defines the base gamma power curve used when the base Gamma table value is set to Gamma Function This value combined with the Gamma Slope setting determines the base Gamma table to be used as the custom base table The curve is generally a power curve with a small linear segment at the bottom defined by the slope Gamma Slope This control defines a slope to be used for the base custom Gamma table for a small section at the bottom of the curve This slope can be used to bring in or out the low level blacks in the image This slope combined with the gamma function defines the custom Gamma table Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 27 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation 3 28 Detail Settings Adjusts the sharpness of the image Setting detail above the halfway point can introduce noise in the image Lower settings can improve a noisy signal Detail Adjust the sharpness of the image Setting detail above the halfway point can introduce noise in the image Lower settings can improve a noisy signal This command does not take effect unless the minimum change required in the Detail Threshold control is reached Texture Enhancement Advanced Image Settings CHRISTIE Detail Settings 1 Detail Texture Enhancement Detail Threshold Detail Overshoot Split Screen 0 100 a
177. e to the remote and to the connector labeled REMOTE on the Electronics Module input panel Check Wired Keypad Enabled in the Communications menu As an alternative to the projector keypad or remote communicate with the projector using a PC or other controller Commands and feedback are sent to the projector s Electronics Module using Ethernet or serial links RS232 and RS422 NOTE Do not connect to the Projector Head Module PHM 2 10 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 2 Installation and Setup 2 6 2 6 1 Projector Network Setup for External Communication IMPORTANT 7o complete the projector network setup you will also need to connect the projectors together for arrayLOC communication and functions See ArrayLOC Network on page 3 55 This section outlines a several ways to set up a Matrix StIM SIM projector network for external communication Ethernet Recommended In the Ethernet network the controller communicates with each projector separately To add a projector to an Ethernet network e Connect a standard CATS Ethernet cable between the controller or Ethernet hub and the Ethernet port on the projector Electronic Module e Set the IP address in Configuration gt Communications gt Ethernet Settings See Ethernet Settings on page 3 36 e Set Configuration gt Communications gt Network Routing to Separate See Network Routing on page 3 ae Ethernet o0 o0
178. ection for warp or keystone correction 6 5 7 Data is Cropped from Edges 1 To display the missing material reduce image size to fill the display area available in the projector then stretch vertically to fill the screen from top to bottom Add the anamorphic lens to regain image width 2 Check blend settings and masking 6 5 8 Display Quality Appears to Drift from Good to Bad Bad to Good 1 The source input signal may be of low quality 2 The H or V frequency of the input may have changed at the source end 6 5 9 Display has Suddenly Froze If the screen blacks out inexplicably it is possible that excessive voltage noise on the AC or ground input has interrupted the projector s ability to lock on to a signal Power the projector down and up again 6 5 10 Colors in the Display are Inaccurate The color tint color space and or color temperature settings may require adjustment at your input source or on the web user interface Channel gt Page2 menu Make Sure the correct PCF TCGD and or Color Space file for the source 1s used 6 5 11 Display is Not Rectangular 1 Check leveling of the projector Make sure the lens surface and screen are parallel to one another 2 Is the vertical offset correct Make the necessary adjustments to the vertical offset on the lens mount 3 Check geometry corrections settings for example keystone adjustment 6 5 12 Display Is Noisy 1 Display adjustment at the input source may be requi
179. ector and are greyed out for all other projectors To make your projector the master access Main menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Synchronize to This Projector Any projector in the array or BC group can be the master The last projector to be set as the master is the master for the array All or BC group Group This setting is not saved between session 6 6 3 Sensor Isn t Calibrated yellow alert Sensor calibration must be performed by Christie accredited service technicians Contact Customer Support 6 6 4 Invalid Target Gamut yellow alert A color setting is not valid for the current color space for example a white point is outside of the gamut 1 Access the Array Color Target menu Main gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target 2 Check XY settings for the colors 6 6 5 Unable to Achieve Target Brightness Gamut yellow alert A projector in an array that cannot achieve minimum brightness or target color space will disable BCLOC and cease contributing data to performance calculations e Try lowering the target brightness or target color gamut settings until all the projectors can achieve the same performance e If the discrepancy is too big the light module may need to be replaced Call Customer Support Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 6 7 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHA IS TIE l Section 6 Troubleshooting Trees 6 6 6 Troubleshooting Tree Color And Brightness Array Troubleshooting ArrayLOC STA
180. ector s Is the ArrayLOC Network Yes Flags ProjlID Group Int Age Rx Ry RY Gx Gy GY Bx By Wx Wy WY on missing projector s set to the set to the correct BCLOC Mode A DR ee E SE E e 283 2 185 748 313 329 369 1 enu gt Configurati i y Yes N GD Configuration Password protected menu 7 109 9 0 a 313 329 M A14 A13 416 5 188 745 313 329 418 0 343 7 181 749 313 329 390 5 See page 3 11 Troubleshooting Tree C5 Yes Array Colors Are the missing projector s Is the Broadcast Interval set Yes iio Ge eaea to an appropriate value Bright ColorLOC Group No Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 6 9 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting Trees 6 6 7 Troubleshooting Tree Array Brightness Troubleshooting ArrayLOC START HERE Menu Reference Go to the Main gt Configuration 4 gt ArrayLOC 13 gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration 3 menu Select the Array Status menu item to display the Bright ColorLOC Array Status Do the colors and brightness of the array projectors match Is the array brightness the expected brightness Are the array colors red green blue white the expected colors Bright ColorLOC Array Status Target Gamut 800 330 lt Target Common Gamut 687 306 Flags ProjID Group Int Age Rx Ry 1 211 0 211 2 211 3 211 6 10 GY Bx By Wy WY 696 8 329 123 4 329 778 5 329 700 9 329 Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Projector Color Adjus
181. ed state A WHITE shutter state allows you to view menus and images if projector settings turn the visible light OFF 2 12 Cleaning the Lens Check periodically A small amount of dust or dirt on the lens has minimal effect on image quality To avoid the risk of scratching the lens clean only if absolutely necessary Dust 1 Brush most of the dust from the lens with a camel hair brush or blow dust away with a dust free blower 2 Folda microfibre cloth smooth and gently wipe remaining dust particles from the lens Wipe evenly with the smooth portion of the cloth that has no folds or creases Do not apply pressure with your fingers use the tension in the folded cloth itself to collect dust 3 Ifsignificant dust is still bound to the surface dampen a clean microfibre cloth with coated optics cleaning solution damp not dripping Wipe gently until clean Fingerprints smudges or oil 1 Brush away most of the dust with a camel hair brush and or blow away using a dust free blower 2 Rolla lens tissue around a swab and soak it in coated optics cleaning solution The tissue should be damp but not dripping 3 Gently wipe the surface using a figure 8 motion Repeat this motion until the blemish is removed Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 2 19 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE 3 1 Operation Ane See Safety Warnings and Guidelines in Section 5 Maintenance This section describes the controls and switches used for basic
182. ed compression processing SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the BAR for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the BAR for main video PIIP Set the BAR for main video EXAMPLE NRB 32 Set the BAR to mid point for main video NRD GENERAL NOISE REDUCTION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adaptive general noise reduction selects a filter sensitivity to noise A higher value may improve noisy sources although it will soften the image SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE Set the noise reduction for Slot x Input y Set the noise reduction for main video EXAMPLE NRD 32 Set the noise reduction to mid point for main video NTR NETWORK ROUTING CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set routing for ASCII messages SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Used to enable or disable daisy chaining 0 RS 232 RS 422 amp Ethernet communications are all separate from one another 1 RS 422 port s is are connected to the RS 232 network 2 The Ethernet port is connected to the RS 232 network 3 RS 232 RS 422 amp Ethernet are all connected to each other D 46 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference NTR NETWORK ROUTING Cont d EXAMPLES NTR L List routing options NTR 0 Set routing so that each connection is routed separately NTR 3
183. edevsnntaiiasacgnaeadenes 6 5 D a E E E EA E E A E 6 5 6 5 1 The Projector is ON but There is No Display ccccccccccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 5 65 2 The Display is atte or Unstable cccstecnaiegasaustsquncncvegnsansnsaatensosgaunisaunuatinanauitsadiensneguisumtens 6 5 0 3 3 The Display 19 Faites ere EaR EE RoS 6 5 6 5 4 The Upper Portion of the Display is Waving Tearing or Jittering ccceccccccccceeeeeeeeeees 6 5 6 5 5 Portions of the Display are Cut OFF or Warped to the Opposite edge cece 6 6 6 5 6 Display Appears Compressed Vertically Stretched cccccccccccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 6 Ox Det WD ala 1s CHOCO Om E ES scp tres sienvatncia E oodansanstaicoutcedeaeyicouieontanante 6 6 6 5 8 Display Quality Appears to Drift from Good to Bad Bad to Good 1 0 cece 6 6 6 2 Display has Suddenly cl 0 4 cree ar nee eee 6 6 6 5 10 Colors in the Display are Inaccurate ccccccccccccccccecceeeeeceaeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaas 6 6 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Table of Contents CoAT MDI Olay 16 NORE iNT a AEEA E EAE A EE 6 6 Co Da N a a A E AE EEE A Cee 6 6 OAN AIV EOC e E E E E ET E A EE 6 7 6 6 1 Cannot Find Color Adjustment COU ONS serari naina A AE E S 6 7 60 2 Color Imaje Setungs Are Grey ed O lessirerserarc ndai a n aa Eiaa iets 6 7 6 6 3 Sensor Isnt Calibrated yellow alefi j s ccs01s gt ccsss co cadiesanndvnaimaienadinnn
184. eeeeeeeeseeeseeees 2 14 2 7 Projector Network Setup for ArrayLOC Communication ccccccecseesesssssssesssssssssssssesseeeens 2 15 2 Ut UU E e OS E E onan A cove ones AA EN T E 2 15 28 1 Adusine hie Projection LENS uersiertaror unei E aa 2 15 2 8 2 Adjusting Image Geometry and Optical Alignment cc cccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 15 Basic Optical Alionmcnt Procedure suciscatsevaisiesessucancetayadasensecaovagaundevaasseeceetsuadsenseceowaseuasesies 2 15 OES OCG aeee E E EEE E E E EE EE 2 15 2 8 5 D resieht Alignmen Advanced smernic kerien TEENE 2 16 2 9 Adjust software to Optimize Mae cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegs 2 17 2 10 System Integration GPIO CONG COP esrusasscaccenrscadeleiesssantusesaavesiaasaaueyectaruiessntenerasasartybeceaieaasdees 2 18 2 11 Projection Lenses Lens Mount and Other Features ccccccssessssssessssssesssssesssssssssssseeeens 2 19 DN Me AMEN I Uae esc carseat sea ears cr eisai a acu en nase ue tan cues casey nei 2 19 3 Operation ee Wolo Tia UR REO acc etc ccc a E netics ese E 3 1 SPE MURR SOG E A E EA E E E A E 3 2 IN ELR O e S E E EE E 3 3 FEOIR R TOC C OnI E A EE A E AEE EE EEE 3 3 POWT ON OFE cirera er a a E E A aoe uaentoy 3 3 AE EE A E EE E A E E E EEEE 3 3 AMO oare E E E eectonate 3 3 CD E e E A S 3 4 OM 2 E AN 3 4 TO E E E A E E E E E E E 3 4 PIP e E E E E E E 3 4 Ea e E E AEE E E T E E E E A E Ton eee E R
185. efined as either an input or output depending on the desired outcome In general configure the pin as an input if you want the projector to respond to something the device does and as an output if you want the external device to respond to an action taken by the projector For example configure the pin as an output if you want the lighting in a room to automatically dim when the projector is powered ON By using the GIO command you can also set the state of each pin as high or low By default the state of each pin is high The voltage applied to pins in the high state is 3 3V See GIO General Purpose Input Output on page D 29 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 2 Installation and Setup 2 11 Projection Lenses Lens Mount and Other Features aN Using the lens cap when transporting the lens avoids scratching and damaging the lens The Matrix StIM projector includes a lens mount that allows lens control and adjustment vertical and horizontal offsets zoom and focus The lens mount can be fitted with any one of the available optional lenses see Section 7 Specifications Zoom and Focus Adjust zoom to fit the displayed image on the screen and adjust focus to improve the clarity of the image Lens Offset The lens mount allows vertical and horizontal offset of the displayed image Shutter Standard on all models the shutter allows you to turn the screen absolutely black when in the Clos
186. el Highlight the desired channel in the Channel Setup menu then press ENTER to go to the Channel Options submenu Select Copy and press ENTER to create a new channel It is identical to the original which still remains but it is identified with the next available number from 01 99 If you change your mind and do not want to copy the current channel press EXIT to cancel and return to the previous menu Copying channels is a quick method for creating numerous channels each of which can then be edited and adjusted for a variety of presentations in the future Channel Setup Enter 1 A 1 2 iSVid 15 73kHz i59 94 Hz Z A 4 1 pDig 33 72kHz p29 07 Hz N Mi Select Channel Operation Edit Copy Delete Delete Unlocked Only Channel Setup Delete All Channels A 1 2 iSVid 15 73kHz i59 94 Hz A 4 1 pDi 33 72kHz p29 07 Hz A 1 2 iSVid 15 73kHz i59 94 Hz l IN gt n T New Channel identical mp to Chan 1 Delete a Channel Highlight the desired channel in the Channel Setup menu then press ENTER to activate the Select Channel Operation submenu Select Delete and press ENTER A window appears to confirm the deletion of this channel Channel Setup Enter A 1 2 iSVid 15 73kHz i59 94 Hz Y Pe m A 4 1 pDig 33 72kHz p29 07 Hz ati i Select Channel Operation Edit Co Delete y Delete Unlocked Only Delete All Channels Do you wish to de
187. el Blending adjacent blend regions when edge blending E tandar multiple projectors The Black Level i et Blending submenu provides controls that Test Pattern allow you to adjust the black level hues of L 3 Left Blend Width multiple adjacent projected images to create _ Right Blend Width one large seamless display NOTES 1 Adjust edge blending before adjusting black levels 2 Blinders are recommended for fixed installations 3 Do not use black level blending if TWIST was used for the geometry e Black Level Blending Procedure NOTES 1 Adjust edge blending before adjusting black levels 2 The zones in Black Top Blend Width Bottom Blend Width Center Brightness Level Blending menu correspond to the Edge Blend zones If a given Edge Blend zone width is set to 0 i e no blend on that side then the corresponding BLB zone is disabled It only becomes accessible when that Edge Blend zone is active 16 Reset Black Level Blending Settings Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 3 43 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE l 3 44 1 Start with 2 projectors Select the black test pattern for both projectors from the Geometry amp Color submenu 2 Inthe Black Level Blending submenu enable black blending 3 Set the blend width 4 Working with one projector at a time use the center brightness slidebar to adjust the center brightness of the non blended region so that the center
188. el gray When used with a smooth grayscale pattern in which black and white are known to be at opposite edges of the image you can watch these isolated areas while adjusting individual black levels and input drives until both black and white edges are just visible and distinguished from neighboring pixels Images from this source will then display correct blacks and whites without crushing To adjust levels manually e Do not enable Auto Input Levels e To judge by eye and adjust levels manually change one or more of the six levels as necessary to obtain proper blacks and whites 1 Display a 16 level grayscale test pattern from the desired external source and enter a check mark in the Input Peak Detector check box NOTE The Input Peak Detector will initially render the grayscale as a uniform gray field before adjustment or extreme crushing 2 Display one primary color NOTE Select Auto Color Enable to ensure that the correct color is displayed for each setting Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 25 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CHRISTIE 3 For the current color adjust its corresponding Black level slidebar just until a single band of black appears at one edge of the screen This band represents the first band of the grayscale pattern It should be 100 black 4 With the same color still active adjust its corresponding Input Drive slidebar just until a single band of color appears at the opposite edge of
189. ent state of the projector When maximized the Virtual OSD displays over the entire page so that subsequent menus can be viewed without scrolling No access to tabs when maximized Virtual OSD tab presents the Main Menu refer to Appendix A Menu Tree for more details Help button presents a pop up window which provides information to help you navigate within the current menu OSD section contains an On and Off button Only one is enabled depending on the current state of the OSD Control of the OSD is always available through the remote Auto Setup button uses the manufacture s default settings refer to Section 3 Operation for more details B 4 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Virtual OSD Menu Selecting an option from a menu displays its associated window showing related information and input fields To return to the previous menu click the menu s title bar see Figure B 5 To return to a previous menu click on the current menu s title bar or press ESC NOTE Click the Maximize button to view the full screen size Various types of menu elements Figure B 6 and Figure B 7 allow you to define projector settings These include e Field entries e Drop down lists e Check boxes e Sliders oo Size 0 200 Vertical Stretch Appendix B WebUI Main Menu Size amp Position Resize Presets Default 4 000 2200 0 H Position
190. ep 2 ArrayLOC Configuration Main Menu Adjust the colors in the image by selecting Configuration the desired Target Color Space Sy El ae If a User White is selected as the white point SSF then one of the following methods may be Array Color Target Array Color Target Maxdrnmum Target Red D DAGE NTSC The Target White x and arge 20 x VIOOO SN ml SC HD VideotTU 709 2 Target Red x O DOO Sonn a Target White y can be set the desired ay 3 Target Red y gt 0 330 7 t white color co ordinates Target Green x User 1 User 2 4 Target Red y Target Green x gt 0 160 S ars ghee OR User 4 5 Target Green y 0 800 Target Green y Target Base x Target Biue x gt 0 125 x The white may be adjusted to a black body Target Blue y 0 00000 color temperature by checking y sete m Set White to Color Temperature and adjusting White Color Temperature 7 f If a User color space is selected then the colors can be adjusted by entering the desired co ordinates into the Target Red x Target Red y etc Copy Color Space Fron Select White Pom Set White io Color Temperature 13 White Color Temperature gi 80 ane YOAN CORY valas fom another colpi EE Adjust the brightness of the image by setting space to use as a starting point using the 4 Copy White Point From 6500 K D65 Ba the RGB Brightness Target Copy Color Space From menu i
191. es 2 2 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 2 Installation and Setup 2 2 Installing the Projector 2 2 1 Unpacking the Projector The projector is shipped assembled with the projection lens shipped separately The lens must be installed prior to setting up the projector Interconnection Diagram 1 Remove the projector from the box and packing material NOTE Save packing material for at least one projector in case a projector needs to be shipped for service 2 Connect the Electronics Module to the Projector Head Module and Light Module 2 2 2 Installing the Lens Figure 2 2 Module Interconnections 1 Remove the rear lens cap from the lens Keep the front lens cap on the lens 2 Rotate the lens clamp to the OPEN position Figure 2 3 Figure 2 3 Rotate to Open Figure 2 4 Security Screws Remove and retain the 2 security screws from the lens mount see Figure 2 4 4 Align the lens interface plate with the lens mount Fully insert the assembly straight into the lens mount opening without turning NOTICE Ensure the lens IS NOT inserted at an angle as this can cause damage 5 Rotate the lens clamp to the CLOSED position before fastening the security screws 6 Fasten the security screws Figure 2 4 NOTICE Security screws MUST be installed 7 Remove the front lens cap For more information concerning lenses see 2 71 Projection Lenses Lens Mount and Other Features on pag
192. es AGC on main video AGC MAIN 0 Disables AGC on main video AGC PIIP 1 Enables on video AGC Returns the current AGC state on main video AGC PIIP Returns the current AGC state on video AGC IN12 Returns the current AGC state on Slot 1 Input 2 AIC AUTO INPUT CYCLING CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION When enabled the system will continually search for the next valid signal when no signal is present or when loss of sync occurs on the current user selected Input In the case of multiple signals to choose from the order is based on Slot followed by Inputs on that Slot SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable or disable auto Input cycling EXAMPLES AIC 0 Disable auto Input cycling AIC 1 Enable auto Input cycling AIL AUTO INPUT LEVEL CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION If enabled this control allows the projector to continuously monitor the Input signal levels of the analog Inputs and make adjustments as needed Whenever the projector detects a level that would lead to the crushing of black or white levels it adjusts the Input offset or gain to compensate If the Input signal is not being crushed the projector will do nothing The Auto Input Level feature should only be used when the current source requires further Input level adjustment There must be at least 12 consecutive white p
193. es with seamless response to scene changes and fades The adaptive contrast function implements a dynamic non linear mapping between the Input and output contrast levels based on frame by frame luminance histogram measurement of the Input image SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the adaptive contrast for SlotSlot x Input y Range 0 15 MAIN Set the adaptive contrast for main video Range 0 15 PIIP Set the adaptive contrast for video Range 0 15 EXAMPLES ACO 8 Sets adaptive contrast for main image to 50 strength Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 3 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE ACT ACTIVE WINDOW CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control defines the Input active window in pixels The production aperture is available for analog sources only but not for decoded analog signals The aperture is set once on every auto setup or on new signal detection when a channel for that signal is not present The aperture defines the maximum window in which blanking controls can be opened up to relative to the active portion of the signal This is a read only control SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the adaptive contrast for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the adaptive contrast for main video PIIP Set the adaptive contrast for video EXAMPLES ACT Returns the active window for main video ACT PIIP Returns the active window for vide
194. ese settings are specific to a particular option card type slot combination C 3 3 Access Levels e Operator Command is available at the operator level log in e Advanced Command is available at the advanced operator level log in e Admin Command is available at the administrator level log in e Service Command is available at the service level log in C 8 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference The following tables define the serial commands associated with the Matrix StIM SIM projector ABL ARRAY BRIGHT COLOR LOC CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This command is used to set parameters that control how the Array Bright ColorLOC feature operates From this control you enable the mode in which you want to operate the feature target brightness target gamut update intervals and other miscellaneous parameters This command is persistent and will save the synchronize to this projector operation between power ups SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EABL Enable Array Bright ColorLOC 0 OFF 1 fixed mode uses CCA only 2 cool mode uses CCA and LED control 3 bright mode uses CCA and multi LED control BRGP Brightness Group Identifies a subset of all projectors in the array to be used in the Array BCLOC algorithm May be used to provide multiple groups of projectors with different color t
195. ess target for the array RGB Brightness Use this option to adjust the brightness of the projector array as a percentage of the target brightness This option also appears in the InfraRGB Lighting Mode menu Bright Color Group Identifies the BCLOC group to which the projector belongs The BCLOC group identifies a subset of projectors in the array that are used in the Array BCLOC algorithm and are included in the Array Capability data table 3 52 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Projector Color Adjustment ArrayLOC Use this menu to make ArrayLOC projector specific color adjustments These controls are used to fine tune the matching performed by ArrayLOC after the targets have been set through the Target Color Space menu Projector Color Adjustment Target Color Space User 1 z e Red Part Of Red 100 0 200 0 i Green Part Of Red Y V 100 0 100 0 These adjustments compensate for the Blue Part Of Red projection system as a whole including loss of brightness or color shift due to lens mirror and screen For example the mirror might not reflect blue 100 percent or the screen might absorb more blue Measure the output at the screen with a color meter and use this option to adjust the blue until you get _ Green Part Of Blue the array color target value at the screen Green Part Of Green Red Part Of Green Blue Part Of Green Blue Part Of Blue
196. et InfraRGB preset to All Channels IRC REDC report the current Red Power IRC IRGB 7 set InfraRGB preset to User 1 IRC GRN2 250 set User 2 Green Power to 250 ITG TEST PATTERN GREY CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Specify the grey level to use for the Grey flat field internal test pattern Range 0 1023 The level defaults to 512 on power up This command is on available while the grey test pattern is being displayed SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE ITG 512 Set test pattern grey to mid point ITP INTERNAL TEST PATTERN CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Puts a test pattern on the screen or queries the test pattern currently displayed Select which test pattern to display from the list 0 Off 4 Flat Grey 8 Color Bars 1 Grid 5 Black 11 Aspect Ratio 2 Grey Scale 16 6 Checker 12 Edge Blend 3 White 7 13 Point 14 Boresight SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable disable or change standard test patterns EXAMPLE ITP 0 Disable test patterns revert to previous Input signal ITP 1 Set test pattern to the grid pattern KCO KEYSTONE CURSOR OFFSET CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control offsets the 2D Keystone cursors from the edge of the image to
197. et the color temp setting to max drives for main video CHA CHANNEL CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Select the channel to use in the range 1 99 Switching channels will switch to the appropriate option card Input If the signal signature in the channel does not match the signal on the channel s Input the channel change will switch to the auto channel or to the channel that was defined for the signal signature that is on the channel s Input This command will fail if the data in the channel file does not match the current system hardware This command can also be used to copy delete and edit certain channel properties SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE COPY Make a copy of a channel and assign it a unique number optionally specify a new channel number D 16 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHA CHANNEL Cont d EXAMPLES CHA Get current active channel CHA 10 Set main to channel 10 CHA PIIP 99 Set main to channel 99 CHA COPY 1 Make a copy of channel 1 using the next free channel number CHA COPY 1 20 Make a copy of channel 1 and copy to channel 20 will fail if 20 already exists CHA DLET 0 Delete all unlocked channels CHA DLET 20 Delete channel 20 CLE COLOR ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Th
198. ev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE l 3 46 Table 3 5 Manual RGB Adjustment menu Option Description LM Green Part Of Blue Changes the power of the green LED for the blue color RGB Brightness Controls the overall brightness of the LEDs If ArrayLOC is enabled the adjustment must be made on the master projector Red Color Green Color Displays the color values as reported by the sensors Blue Color Copy Setting From Copies the Color Mode settings from an existing preset to the current preset Auto Color Enable Automatically select color based on slider being adjusted Diagnostics amp Calibration Configuration Make the necessary adjustment from the Diagnostics amp Calibration Configuration menu options described below Test Pattem Off Test Pattern Choose the desired internal test pattern to t 3 Freeze Image display or select Off to turn OFF a test pattern a Color Enahie Alternatively use the Test key for cycling E A through test patterns Input Level Detector Grey Level Level Detector Threshold Set the level of grey for displaying in the full a 8 Aspect Ratio Overlay gray field test pattern Test Pattern Color Swap Freeze Image Check this option to freeze an incoming image on a single frame in order to examine details For example in moving images it is sometimes difficult to observe artifacts such as external de interlacing resizing and signal noise Uncheck to return to normal
199. f blacks are gray select 2 7 5 IRE Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation e 0 IRE Used for DVD output with enhanced black SECAM most PAL standards and Japanese NTSC 7 5 IRE Used for most NTSC video signals For some types of video you can override the setting The control is disabled for other types of video and all graphics sources Generally if black appears crushed when brightness 50 choose 0 IRE If black appears excessively elevated use 7 5 IRE Color This slide bar adjusts the color saturation level Lower settings produce less saturated colors for example a setting of 0 produces a black and white image If the color level is too high colors will be overpowering and unrealistic Tint Adjusts the red green color hue for true color reproduction of video and HDTV signals For best results adjust tint while displaying an external test pattern It is recommended that tint remain at its default setting Filter The proper filter setting is automatically set for virtually all signals and rarely needs to be changed Override only if standard pixel tracking and phase adjustments do not adequately clear up a noisy video signal or if a graphics signal appears overly soft Both instances indicate that Filter may be set to the wrong option Sampling Mode Sets the color sampling mode for a digital signal to either YCbCr
200. f there is an AC power interruption while Auto Power Up is enabled the projector will resume operation in the same state as it left OFF If the light engine is on and an image showing when AC power is lost the projector will automatically power back up with the light engine on and Power Management Reserved an image will show when AC is restored sar Auto Shutdown Enable _ Auto Shutdown Enable When Auto Shutdown mode has been selected and no Turn Off Image After min projector activity has been seen for the activation time out _ Enter Standby After min period the projector will enter a power saving mode in which the light engine will dim and the shutter will close If this condition persists for an additional time out period the projector will automatically go to Standby mode The presence of any activity within this combined interval will cancel Auto Shutdown and return the projector to normal operation Turn OFF Image After min a This sets the activation interval in minutes for Auto Shutdown If all activity Input signals Web or Serial port activity key presses is lost for this length of time and Auto Shutdown is enabled an Auto Shutdown cycle will begin EM Stealth Mode Fan Assist Enter Standby After min This sets the interval in minutes between starting Auto Shutdown and entering Standby mode Once Auto Shutdown has been entered and all activity continues to be absent for this interval the projector
201. for a VCR source may be very different from those you 03 1 2 p5W 63 98kHz p60 02Hz choose for a high resolution computer source Once you have Chahneik Signal Horizontal Vertical adjusted a display parameter such as pixel tracking or contrast Slot Type Frequency Frequency Input i Interlaced p Progressive Figure 3 6 Channel List Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 11 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CHix IS TIE l all current settings are collectively stored in the projector s memory as a unique 2 digit channel such as 09 You can have numerous distinct channels available for the same input any of which can be selected by using the CHANNEL key followed by the 2 digit channel number Shown in Figure 3 6 is a sample list of channels available for Main Channel 03 NOTE The CHANNEL key may display a channel list or not depending on what you have defined for Display Channel List see Menu Preferences on page 3 33 discussed later in this section In order to access channels by using the CHANNEL key on the remote you must first create the channels See Creating a New Channel on page 3 12 Creating a New Channel To use a new source with the projector a new channel must be created so that the projector will respond to an Input signal from that source A new channel can be created automatically or it can be copied from an existing channel and then edited as necessary See Copy a Channel on page 3 14 When
202. form a Diagnostic Test using Interrogator l B 8 Click Interrogate to initiate the diagnostic test and download the diagnostic test results to your computer A Interrogator in Progress bar appears Once the download is complete a File Download window appears NOTE Once the Interrogate function begins you must allow it to run until completion Click Save to save the diagnostic test results file to your Network drive or hard drive Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHKISTIE Appendix B WebUI B 3 5 Admin Tab Users Under the Admin tab select the Users secondary tab Options are provided to add to and delete users from accessing the projector and change passwords NOTES 1 Do not use capitalization for usernames or passwords If capitalization is used for the username or password it will automatically convert it to lower case 2 Usernames can be a minimum of 4 and maximum of 32 characters Passwords can be a minimum of 4 and maximum of 128 characters Create a User Name and Password 1 Click Add User to open the Add User window axa ioe Toros sd 2 Type your username and password in the User name and Password fields respectively Re type Password 3 Re type your password in the Re type Password field Cancel 4 Click Ok to save Change Password 1 Select the user whose password you wish to change from the Presao CAME Users window De 2 Click Change Password to open the Password Change
203. g only a destination address will not have any source address Table C 7 Message for Specific Projector from a Specific Controller Dest Sre Code Data Examples Turn Projector 5 on Spwrl What is the contrast level in Projector 30 30con CON 127 Return Contrast from Projector 30 to Controller 2 30 2con 00002 00030con 127 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual C 7 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix C Serial Communication CH 1S TIE C 3 Description Of Control Types C 3 1 Subclasses e Power Down Controls These controls are accessible when the projector is in Standby power mode i e power off as well as when powered on e Power Up Controls These controls are only accessible when the system electronics are fully powered not necessarily lamp on C 3 2 Control Groups Unsaved Controls These controls are not saved to flash The settings are not maintained between power sessions Saved Controls These controls are saved to flash The settings are persistent between power sessions Preference Controls These controls are transferable from one projector to another Example NET SUBO projector subnet Configuration Controls These controls are projector specific settings They are non transferable between projectors Example NET ETHO projector IP address Channel Controls These settings are specific to a particular input signal Example BRT signal brightness Option Card Controls Th
204. g the IR Red Weight IR Green Weight and IR Blue Weight sliders specify the relative IR brightness of the red green and blue parts of the image The target weights are applied to all projectors in the array Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 65 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CHix IS TIE i 4 Observe the Effective IR Weight fields and change the IR Weight sliders until you are satisfied with the 3 66 relative IR brightness 5 Use the ArrayLOC Status to view the relative brightness and make adjustments as necessary To make adjustments to individual projectors go to a projector s menu and l 5 On the Main Menu gt Configuration gt InfraRGB gt InfraRGB Target amp Adjustments menu select Enabled from the IRLOC Mode drop down list On the Main Menu gt Configuration gt InfraRGB gt InfraRGB Target amp Adjustments menu use the IR Weight Adjustment sliders to adjust Red Green and Blue for that projector The IR Weight Adjustment settings are applied as a percentage of the IR Weight settings For example if IR Red Weight is set to 50 on the master projector and the IR Red Weight Adjustment is set to 10 percent then the effective IR weight will be 55 Observe the Effective IR Weight fields and change the IR Weight Adjustment sliders until you are satisfied with the relative IR brightness on this projector Use the IR Brightness Adjustment slider to adjust IR brightness for that projector
205. ghting Mode Choose an IR Red Weight setting This is available only for a user defined channel IR Green Weight Choose an IR Green Weight setting This is available only for a user defined channel IR Blue Weight Choose an IR Green Weight setting This is available only for a user defined channel IR Red Weight Adjustment Choose an adjustment value for the IR Red Weight IR Green Weight Adjustment Choose an adjustment value for the IR Green Weight IR Blue Weight Adjustment Choose an adjustment value for the IR Blue Weight Clear Adjustments Click this to reset all adjustments to 0 zero When prompted to confirm click Yes Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Copy Weight amp Adjustments From Select a channel to copy the weight and adjustments settings from A new user defined InfraRGB Target channel is automatically selected Reset Weight amp Adjustment To Default Click to reset all weight and adjustments settings to their default values IR Brightness Adjustment Choose an IR Brightness Adjustment Minimum RGB Brightness For Constant IR Choose the minimum RGB brightness necessary to keep the IR brightness constant This causes the projector to try to maintain a constant IR brightness even if ColorLOC changes the RGB Brightness down to the specified minimum This setting does not apply in interleaved mode because the projector can change the video source A
206. ghting Modes to Default 3 68 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation 3 4 6 Main Menu gt Status Access the read only Status window from the Main menu It lists a variety of details about the standard and optional components detected in the projector See the Status menu for versions of hardware and software installed the hours logged in total and for a specific period such as a rental period and for your projector model name and serial number In addition the Status menu identifies the current channel its location its frequencies and other details 3 4 7 Main Menu gt Secondary Input amp Switching Use the Secondary Input amp Switching menu see Figure 3 28 to enable and define how you want to use either the Picture in Picture PIP or Picture by Picture PBP image Most of the image adjustments work the same way as when you make adjustments to the primary image Secondary Image PIP PBP Main Imag Figure 3 28 PIP and PBP Examples The default is None Off until the secondary Input source is enabled See PIP Enable on page 3 70 NOTE 7o control the primary image access all picture controls through the Main menu To control the secondary image access picture controls through the Secondary Input amp Switching menu From the Secondary Input amp Switching menu if you choose either PIP or PBP you are limited to a maximum of 60 Hz each Matrix StIM SIM Use
207. gs gt Input Levels Menu on page 3 24 Advanced Imaging Settings Use the Advanced Image Settings submenu to make the adjustments necessary for lesser used but more specialized applications on your projector See Image Settings gt Advanced Image Settings Menu on page 3 26 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 21 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE l 3 22 Video Options Menu Image Settings This submenu is used with video sources only Video Options e Enable Decoder AGC 2 _ Enable Decoder AGC Automatic Gain Control AGC affects decoded video images only Enter a check mark default in most _ Input Video Black instances Activate the decoder s AGC circuit to ensure properly bright images Delete the check mark if a decoded video image exhibits strange color artifacts such as stripes in highly saturated colors indicating an incompatibility between this source and the AGC _ Film Mode Detect e Video Standard For most video standards the projector automatically she Cones detects the incoming horizontal and vertical Split Screen frequencies and sets the signal processing to the corresponding standard The current video standard name appears in the Video Options submenu and includes an A if it is auto detected Press ENTER to view or select a different video standard from those available to the projector any that are disabled have frequency characteristics that differ from those of the in
208. he Inputs Returns GIO STAT 0000000 All Inputs are low GIO STAT 1x01000 Set status of the GPOs 2 high 3 no change 4 Low 6 High 7 Low 8 Low 9 Low GIO STAT hxxlxxx 500 Set status of the GPOs 2 Pulse high 6 Pulse Low Use interval of 500 ms for each GIO CNFG ITOOOIO Set pins 2 3 and 8 to Input 4 6 7 and 9 to Output Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 29 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE GMS VDIC GROUPED INPUTS MODE DESCRIPTION Allows users to select a mode to group the last 3 BNC connectors Input 4 5 6 on a Video Decoder Input Card valid options are 0 3 CVBS sources 1 1 SVideo Source 1 CVBS source 2 1 YPrPb Component source SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a grouping mode for the last 3 BNC connectors on Video Decoder card in the selected Slot EXAMPLES GMS SL10 0 Use 3 BNC connectors for CVBS source GMS SL10 1 Use 3 BNC connectors for 1 SVideo and 1 CVBS sources GMS SL10 2 Use 3 BNC connectors for 1 YPbPr component source GMS SL10 Get the current mode setting GNB GREEN BLACK LEVEL CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Green black level is used to compensate for relative variations in the black levels between Red Green and Blue This is available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting achieves maximum contrast without crushing white or
209. he border width PBW to zero Valid options are 0 Black 5 Dark Magenta 10 Green 1 Dark Red 6 Dark Yellow 11 Blue 2 Dark Green 7 Dark Grey 12 Cyan 3 Dark Blue 8 Light Grey 13 Magenta 4 Dark Cyan 9 Red 14 Yellow 15 White SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PBC 0 Select black border PBW BORDER WIDTH CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Selects whether a border should be placed around the window Setting the width to zero 0 will remove the border Setting it to 1 will enable the border SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PBW 10 Select border width of 10 PDT PEAK DETECTOR CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the peak detector test mode This is used to aid in setup of Input levels For each color pixel values very near black will be displayed black pixel values very near peak level will be displayed full on All others will be displayed in mid level grey Input levels for each color should be adjusted so that black pixels in the image just turn black and full on pixels just turn full ON When adjustment is completed this control should be disabled to allow display of all grey levels This control takes place before the scaler deinterlacer SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES PDT 1 Turn
210. heck Main Menu gt Status ArrayLOC can only be disabled from the passcode protected Service menu Please contact Customer Support for more information Select Color Adjustment Select the output color adjustment most suited to this input signal Max Drives AII color adjustments are turned OFF allowing the projector to run at maximum brightness SD Video and HD Video Sets the output color to a specific standard value Adjusts the colors red green blue and white User Select of 4 user defined sets of color adjustments defined in the Configuration menu Color Temperature Allows you to specify a color temperature between 3200 and 9300 Expressed in degrees Kelvin 3200K 5400K etc Lower numbers appear reddish white and higher numbers appear bluish Standard settings are e 9300K is close to the white of many computer monitors e 6500K is the standard for color video in both standard and high definition forms e 5400K is a standard for graphics and black and white video e 3200K is useful if the projected image is to be filmed or shot as part of a studio set illuminated with incandescent lights For all color temperatures the color primaries red green and blue are unchanged and reflect the native colors of the projector Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 29 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation AccuFrame This menu lets you specify the settings for AccuFrame AccuFrame is used to reduce image artifacts
211. his defines the curve function and is defined differently based on the Curve Control RGCB 0 65535 RPBx RPCx RGB Curve Control Parameter C This defines the curve function and is defined differently based on the Curve Control RGCB 0 10000 defined with 3 decimal places IRCx IR Curve Control Sets curve data for currently selected preset Note each preset may be individually set using subcode RGCx where x is as for RGBx 1 Linear Curve 2 Gain Curve 3 Gamma Curve 4 Power Curve 5 Custom Curve future use IPAx IR Curve Control Parameter A This defines the curve function and is defined differently based on the Curve Control IRCB Note each preset may be individually configured using subcode IPAx IPBx RGB Curve Control Parameter B This defines the curve function and is defined differently based on the Curve Control IRCB Note each preset may be individually configured using subcode IPBx IPCx RGB Curve Control Parameter C This defines the curve function and is defined differently based on the Curve Control IRCB Note each preset may be individually configured using subcode RPCx COPY Copy RGB and IR brightness from preset to current Value 1 10 for source preset RSTL Reset current preset to default factory values Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 35 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE IFS INFRARGB Cont d RSTA Reset all presets t
212. ic number entry using the remote e When you are finished making your adjustment press EXIT to save and return to your presentation e Some settings automatically impose a test pattern or color change as part of making the adjustment Pressing EXIT saves the adjustment and automatically cancels the imposed test pattern or color change NOTES 1 You can still adjust a slidebar directly as usual if the display is turned OFF The slidebar just won t be visible see OSD On screen display on page 3 5 or Menu Preferences on page 3 33 2 If you have accessed the slidebar directly as described above it will disappear if it is not used within 5 seconds Check boxes A condition is present if an adjacent check box contains a check mark 9 Broadcast Keys To select or clear the check box highlight and press ENTER or Figure 3 3 Example of a Check Box highlight and use the RIGHT arrow key to select showing a check mark or LEFT arrow key to clear showing an empty check box If a check box is numbered enter its number to select or clear the check box See Figure 3 3 Drop down lists To see a list of options available for a given parameter e Highlight the menu option and press ENTER e Enter the applicable menu option number to open the drop down list e Use the UP arrow key or DOWN arrow key to navigate UP and DOWN within the drop down list Press ENTER to choose a highlighted option from the list e To quickly scroll through a list wi
213. ifications Do not operate the projector close to water such as near a swimming pool e Do not operate in extremely humid environments e Do not place the projector on an unstable cart stand or table A projector and cart combination must be used with care Sudden stops excessive force and uneven surfaces may cause the projector and cart combination to overturn SERVICING All servicing must be performed by CHRISTIE accredited service technicians Use replacement parts that are manufacturer approved only Use of any other part other than the ones specified by the manufacturer can result in fire electric shock or risk of personal injury and irreparable equipment damage DO NOT service the projector while it is still connected There are exposed voltages that could cause severe physical injuries and possibly death Always disconnect the projector and wait two minutes to allow the power supply capacitors to electrically discharge before removing the projector covers If any of the following conditions exist immediately disconnect the projector from the power outlet and consult a CHRISTIE accredited service technician eThe power cord is damaged The internal cooling fans do not turn ON when the projector is first powered up Liquid is spilled into the projector eThe projector is exposed to excessive moisture eThe projector is not operating normally or performance has significantly deteriorated in a short period of time
214. ifications at any time without notice Performance specifications are typical but may vary depending on conditions beyond Christie s control such as maintenance of the product in proper working conditions Performance specifications are based on information available at the time of printing Christie makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness for a particular purpose Christie will not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the performance or use of this material The product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components that can be recycled and reused This symbol X means that electrical and electronic equipment at their end of life should be disposed of separately from regular waste Please dispose of the product appropriately and according to local regulations In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used electrical and electronic products Please help us to conserve the environment we live in Canadian manufacturing facility is ISO 9001 and 14001 certified GENERAL WARRANTY STATEMENTS For complete information about Christie s limited warranty please contact your Christie dealer In addition to the other limitations that may be specified in Christie s limited warranty the warranty does not cover a Damage occurring during shipment in either direction
215. ighting mode code for small x in the subcode Daylight T Starlight Urban Cloudy Starlight Semiurban IR Only Moonlight User mode Halfmoon Alias to selected table Quartermoon SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Enable InfraRGB 0 OFF 1 ON ISSH InfraRGB channel FUTURE use ISSM InfraRGB source mode FUTURE use ISEQ InfraRGB Source Sequence identifies which frames are IR 1 Simultaneous RGB IR Main 2 Unused 3 Unused 4 Interleaved RGB Main IR Secondary requires DIPC 5 Interleaved RGB IR Main RGB IR Secondary requires DIPC ISLM InfraRGB lighting mode preset 1 daylight 6 quartermoon 2 urban 7 starlight 3 semiurban 8 cloudy starlight 4 moonlight 9 IR only 5 halfmoon 10 User RGB Brightness 0 1000 percentage with 1 decimal place IR Brightness 0 1000 percentage with 1 decimal place D 34 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 WwW CHKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference IFS INFRARGB Cont d RGCx RGB Curve Control Sets curve data for currently selected preset Note each preset may be individually set using subcode RGCx where x is as for RGBx 1 Linear Curve 2 Gain Curve 3 Gamma Curve 4 Power Curve 5 Custom Curve future use RPAx RGB Curve Control Parameter A This defines the curve function and is defined differently based on the Curve Control RGCB 0 1023 RGB Curve Control Parameter B T
216. ill result in death or serious injury A WARNING Warning symbols indicate a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury eae Caution symbols indicate a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury NOTICE Information provided with this heading alerts users to key information not related to personal injury 1 2 General Precautions A WARNING A WARNING The projector is a class 2M source of visible and invisible LED radiation Directly Viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments e g eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard Disconnect the AC cord before VE cell j disconnecting the light module from j the Projector Head Module PHM A CAUTION Power should always be disconnected from the illumination module before servicing to avoid the possibility of inadvertent exposure to visible and invisible LED radiation Figure 1 1 LED Caution Label Location NOTICE This projector must be operated in an environment that meets the operating range specification as listed in Operating Environment on page 7 6 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 1 1 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 1 Introduction CH IS TIE i 1 3 1 4 1 2 Purchase Record and Service Contacts Whether the projector is under warranty or the warranty has expired Christie s highly trained and exten
217. imal flare Adjust cross hair pattern II by adjusting the appropriate capscrew see Figure 2 7 Adjust until the cross hair image is in focus with minimal flare Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 2 Installation and Setup ie 10 11 12 Adjust cross hair pattern III by adjusting the appropriate capscrew see Figure 2 7 Adjust until the cross hair image is in focus with minimal flare Repeat steps 5 6 and 7 as required until all three cross hair patterns are in equal sharp focus If the boresight is acceptable see step 11 If the boresight does not appear to be converging to an acceptable level of image quality or if the lens will not focus over the correct range of throw distances then the boresight requires coarse adjustment see step 9 The original factory boresight can be recovered approximately by positioning the three setscrews see Figure 2 7 Position the setscrews flush with the front face of the lens mount plate and in contact with the inner lens mount plate see Figure 2 7 This may require adjusting both setscrews and capscrews Figure 2 8 Position Setscrew Flush If further action is required Repeat step 2 Lock the set screws and re check the boresight quality Tighten the setscrews enough to ensure they will not shift When the image is focused lock adjustments in place by tightening the adjustments until just tight 2 9 Adjust software to Optim
218. in place DYNF Apply a default table to use while running auto setup when a YNF filter is in place EXAMPLES CCD 0 Make new channels using the MAX drive table while running auto setup and YNF is out CCD DYNE 4 Make new channels using the HD table while running auto setup and YNF is in CCI INTERPOLATED COLOR CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control generates an output color map based on interpolating the values for the standard color temperatures in the range of 3200K 9300K It effectively allows you to adjust the color temperature of the image The selected output color table must be on Color Temperature to enable this control SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the interpolated color temperature for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the interpolated color temperature for main video PIIP Set the interpolated color temperature for main video EXAMPLE CCI 9300 Set the interpolated color temperature to 9300K for main video CCS SELECT OUTPUT COLOR CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Selects which of several predefined and 4 user defined color maps to use for a specific Input signal 0 MaxDrives All color adjustments are turned off allowing the projector to run at maximum brightness 1 Color Temperature This will allow you to specify a color temperature between 3200 and 9300 based on the setting of
219. in video to Test NAM MAIN Test Set channel name being used by main video to Test NAM C001 Test Set channel name for channel to Test NET NETWORK SETUP CONTROL GROUP Config Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Admin DESCRIPTION SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE PORT Set the PORT number SUBO Set the network subnet mask for the first ethernet controller EXAMPLES NET ETHO 192 168 1 35 Set new IP address on the first ethernet controller NET GATE 192 168 0 1 Set the gateway NET SUBO 255 255 255 0 Set the subnet mask on the first ethernet controller NET HOST MyHostName Set the host name NET DOMA MyDomainName Set the domain name NET ETHO Get IP address from first controller NET ETHO 192 168 1 35 NET ETH1 Get IP address from second controller NET ETH1 192 168 1 36 NET MACO Get MAC address from first controller NET MAC0 00 12 3F 7B 76 B4 NET GATE Get default gateway NET GATE 192 168 0 1 NET PORT 3002 Set the Port number NET PORT Get the Port number NET PORT 3002 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 45 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE NRB BLOCK ARTIFACT REDUCTION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Block Artifact Reduction BAR locates and reduces block edges produced by discrete cosine transform DCT bas
220. ing calibration Color adjustment default values are shown in the image above Auto Color Enable Check this option to enable system color to change based on the cursor s position in the Array Color Target menu e Red green blue part of red changes the system color to red e Red green blue part of green changes the system color to green e Red green blue part of blue changes the system color to blue e All other menu options change the system color to white Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 53 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation 3 54 The color resets automatically when you exit the menu Test Pattern Enable CHAISTIE Check this option to enable the automatic display of a flat white test pattern when you select the Array Color Target menu The test pattern is turned off automatically when you exit the menu Copy Adjustments From Use this drop down menu to copy the adjustment values from the selected color space to the current color space White Brightness Adjustment Use this option to adjust the RGB brightness for the projector ArrayLOC Status To open the review the capabilities of the specified group of projectors navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Status Total number of projectors in same Bright ColorLOC group Primary coordinates from White coordinates from Array Array Color Target menu Color Target menu Bright ColorLOC Arr
221. input slots See The currently selected input for the main image is highlighted Scroll UP or DOWN through the list Press ENTER to display the Input drop down list Scroll through the list to locate the input you require and press ENTER again to make the selection Press the appropriate SLOT key 1 4 to quickly display one of the 4 inputs connected to the projector for the Main image Press SLOT again to select a different input This will not bring up any menu selection and is only applicable for the Main image Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation To select an input using the menu system e Use the menu options Menu gt Secondary Input amp Switching gt Main Input and Menu gt Secondary Input amp Switching gt Secondary Input to select the source of the image for the main or secondary i e PIP image Dual Link DVI Input Card Slot 1 Input 2_ 4 PIP Enable Off 5 PIP Window Options 16 Secondary Size amp Position Secondary Image Settings 8 Fade Time 020 x 9 Frame Locking Frame Lock 10 Auto Input Searching CASS _ _ l Standby Active Loop Through _ With any of these methods the image will be displayed according to the following With any of these methods the image displays according to the following e If it is the first time you have used the source input or if you used the input but did not define a channe
222. int level on the video to the specified value in the range of 45 deg to 45 deg EXAMPLES TNT 40 Set tint level to 40 on main video TNT MAIN 40 Set tint level to 40 on main video TNT PIIP 20 Set tint level to 20 on main video TNT IN32 40 Set tint level to 40 on Slot 3 Input 2 TNT Returns the current tint level on main video TNT PIIP Returns the current tint level on main video TNT IN12 Returns the current tint level on Slot 1 Input 2 TPE TEST PATTERN ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Automatically select White test pattern based on the control being adjusted Certain controls that deal with color settings will enable white test pattern when entering OSD menus and disable when exiting the menu This control defines whether this happens There are some situations where the user may not want to automatically go to a white test pattern when the OSD menu is selected for example if they have specific content that they wish to evaluate 0 Disable automatic test pattern enable 1 Enable automatic test pattern enable D 68 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES TPE 0 Disable test pattern enable TPE Report state of test pattern enable TTM THIC TRANSMITTER MODE CONFIGURATION CONTROL GROUP
223. ion is corrected The error code displayed on the status panel on the projector must be cleared manually with from presentation level no OSD on screen If an error code recurs try resetting the projector by turning the projector OFF and ON A persistent error code may indicate that you need a Christie accredited service technician System Warnings Shows that a system malfunction exists A system warning message replaces the input signal message and disappears when the input signal status changes The projector will remain operational but the message show a possibly serious problem that must be reported to the manufacturer Reset the projector by powering it OFF and ON again cooling when necessary Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 6 1 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting CHix IS TIE i System Errors Shows that a serious malfunction exists and must be reported to the manufacturer as soon as possible The projector will no longer operate Reset the projector by powering it OFF and ON again cooling when necessary 6 2 1 LED Status Display On the Projector Projector status is indicated by a single three color LED adjacent to a 2 digit status display Refer to Table 6 1 for a description of LED variations that indicate operation status A solid red LED indicates a system error and the corresponding error code indicates what the error is Refer to Table 6 2 for a list of error codes Press to acknowledge and clear the e
224. ions Projector Address 0 Network Routing Separate z Ethernet Settings Broadcast Keys m Front IR Enabled ad Wired Keypad Enabled ad Serial Options NOTE The Synchronize Keys Test Pattern Color Communications Serial RS 232 IN Options Enable option lets you use the ArrayLOC network to eee N i forward IR remote keys from the master projector to all ee E the synched projectors in the ArrayLOC group See _ Serial Flow Control RS 2321N Software M Synchronize Keys Test Pattern Color Enable on page 3 EEUE TA ESA 8m1 56 _ Serial Protocol RS 232 IN Christie Protocol BA Baud Rate ae Figure 3 15 Serial Communication Options Determines the speed of communication to and from 3 P the projector on the RS 232 or RS 422 links The maximum rate for the RS 232 is 115200 for RS 422 it is 19200 Set the baud rate to match that of your controlling device such as your PC See the documentation for the controlling device to determine the baud rate In an existing network of projectors if you discover that a projector has a different baud rate use the pull down list and select the correct baud rate using the ENTER key Do not scroll this control with LEFT arrow key or RIGHT arrow key Serial communication is always 8 data bits no parity Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Serial Flow Control Determines whether software flo
225. ions of extreme keystone co ordinates and specific signal frequency a keystoned image may result that is outside the bandwidth limitations of the projector When attempting to apply the keystone settings a message will pop up on the OSD indicating that the bandwidth has been exceeded and the keystone cannot be applied The cursor co ordinates for keystone adjustment will remain at the failed keystone position This will allow the user to make minor changes and attempt to reapply the corner settings Either the co ordinates must be adjusted or the free run frequency must be changed to fall within the allowed bandwidth The Func Help key combination will immediately disable the Keystone Brightness Uniformity Edge Blending and Black Level Blending features This is helpful when in some extreme keystone configurations some image corruption may appear and or the menus may not be readable Although Func Help disables these features it will not overwrite their settings If keystone is simply enabled again the same image corruption may occur After pressing Func Help it is recommend to immediately Reset Keystone Settings which will set all keystone co ordinates to zero Brightness Uniformity Brightness Uniformity provides further Geometry amp Color refinement of displays already matched for their primary colors and overall light output eea Use the Brightness Uniformity menu 0 a ald options for basic adjustments so that no area Tes
226. is control allows the three primary colors red green and blue to be turned ON or OFF separately It is used to look at the colors one at a time or in pairs when doing convergence light measurements etc The list of values for this command are 0 White 4 Yellow 1 Red 5 Cyan 2 Green 6 Magenta 3 Blue SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES CLE 1 Display red portion of image only CLE 5 Display green and blue portion of image only CLE 0 Display image normally all primaries CLP CLAMPING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION For all analog signals a clamping pulse is generated that defines where in the signal a black reference can be found The Clamp Location sets the clamping pulse to one of three possible locations tip back porch amp tri level For most signals the correct position 1s backporch just after the sync pulse If the signal has no back porch and there is no sync pulse in the RG or B signals clamping can occur at the front or tip of the sync pulse For HDTV signals 10801 amp 720p the clamp must be moved past the positive pulse of the tri level sync pulse so the tri level option is correct For almost all other signals backporch is correct Sync tip is needed only if the backporch is too small For many signals this control will have no effect Change this setting only if the image appears unusually dim has horizon
227. is highlighted in channet Signal Horizontal ele the channel list or if the current channel is ne Type Frequency Frequency hidden the first channel in the list is eee highlighted 2 Channels created automatically p Progressive temporary do not appear in the channel list unless a parameter for the channel was changed See Creating a New Channel on page 3 12 Figure 3 7 Using a Channel 3 12 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Channel Setup Menu All available channels are listed in the Channel Setup menu which describes how each channel can be accessed and provides access for editing copying and deleting channels Press MENU 3 Channel Setup The Channel Setup menu displays The far left column lists channel numbers defined in sequential order unless you have deleted a channel See Delete a Channel on page 3 14 The values in the far right columns indicate e Horizontal and vertical frequencies or if there is a defined name for a channel appear here The H amp V frequencies will not appear if a name has been defined for the channel instead the name is only seen The H amp V frequencies are inserted as the name when the channel is first created The vertical frequency is displayed with the sync polarity e The remaining columns pertain to each signal type input number slot location a variety of icons indicating access to each channel and an abbreviated desc
228. isplay The Gamma control affects the shape of the curve determining what grey shades are displayed for a given amount of signal Input between minimum black and maximum white This is done by performing a linear transform from the user selected gamma channel setting The normal point is 0 meaning the selected gamma table is used unaltered If there is a lot of ambient light the image can become washed out making it difficult or impossible to see details in dark areas Increasing the gamma correction setting can compensate for this by transforming the curve towards a gamma of 1 0 Decreasing the control shall transform the gamma towards a gamma of 3 0 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the interpolated gamma level EXAMPLES GAM 100 Set gamma to 1 0 curve GAM Returns current gamma curve GIA ANALOG BNC GROUNDED INPUT SELECTION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the Input signal grounding method to single ended or differential Valid values are 0 Differential default 1 Single ended D 28 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference GIA ANALOG BNC GROUNDED INPUT SELECTION Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLxy Set the Input signal grounding method for the specified Slot and Input EXAMPLES GIA SL31 1 Set grounding on Slot 3 Input 1 to single ended
229. ives and black levels for each Auto Color Enable x of the 3 colors red green and blue ensure that BackPorch images from analog sources other than decoded 10 Input Peak Detector _ video have maximum contrast without crushing PE Colg Enans ie black or white By default and in an Auto Setup the projector automatically determines the best input levels by monitoring image content and adjusting the controls appropriately further adjustment is typically not required to obtain proper blacks or whites NOTE This automatic adjustment requires at least 6 12 consecutive white pixels in the image Without these pixels input levels may produce skewed colors particularly in non video images For a source exhibiting overly high black levels typically caused by a noisy source causing black level spikes use the Input Levels menu These adjustments serve as a calibration process compensating for differences in sources and cabling to perfect the source image input levels and eliminate overshoot and undershoot NOTES 1 nput Levels are of limited use with digital signals but do offer some ability to tweak poorly mastered source materials 2 Input levels apply for the current source only but for any color temperature used 3 Assuming that color temperature has been set up based on the internal test patterns you can then set up input levels for a given source so that it matches the color temperature of the intern
230. ixels in the image in order to use Auto Input Levels The monitor period will run for 10 seconds after being issued Auto setup or source switching will stop the level period To use this control turn the Auto Input Level feature ON wait for the blacklevel and drive values to stabilize and turn the Auto Input Level feature off or wait for the 10 seconds When the Auto Input Level feature is turned OFF the current drive and blacklevel values are maintained This control only applies to analog BNC or Dual DVI cards SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Perform auto Input level on the main image PIIP Perform auto Input level on the image EXAMPLES AIL 1 Perform auto Input level on the main image AIL PIIP 1 Perform auto Input level on the image Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 5 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE ALT ACTIVE LOOP THROUGH CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION In situations where a Twin HDMI Input card is being used to loop signals out to another projector this feature ensures that video signals continue to be looped out when the projector enters Standby power mode Note that when the projector is in Standby mode and this feature is enabled limited channel control is available inputs can be switched can perform Auto Setup and some limited input settings can be modified SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subc
231. ize amp Position Image Settings Channel Setup Configuration Status Secondary Input amp Switching Language English Test Pattern Off fa e Long menus have a scroll bar on the right Use the Arrow keys to scroll UP and DOWN through a menu Locked items or items that do not pertain to the current action or condition appear grayed and cannot be selected When finished with a function menu e Press EXIT to return to the previous screen OR e Press MENU to leave the menu system and return to the presentation NOTES 1 f there is no signal present all source dependent adjustments are disabled 2 After 15 minutes of inactivity the projector closes the menu and returns to the presentation 3 The Status menu is read only 3 2 2 On line Help Press the HELP button to display information about the current menu or highlighted option Press HELP again to exit Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Main Menu Size amp Position Image Settings Channel Setup Configuration Status Secondary Input amp Switching Language Test Pattern Use this menu to adjust settings affecting current image size and position such as horizontal and vertical placement blanking resizing and others 3 7 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 2 3 The Global Icon Menu options that include this icon apply globally Menu options without this icon apply to the selected channel only
232. ize Image NOTES 1 Refer to Section 3 for details on accessing and adjusting individual settings 2 Unless otherwise indicated instructions apply to all projector models in stand alone or multi projector configurations 1 Display an external signal 2 Select Screen Image Orientation in Configuration gt Output Options and change the orientation of the displayed image to suit the installation Assign projector ID number s 4 Modify options in the Main menu For example select Language to change the menu language 5 Enable Broadcast Keys in the Communications menu this lets you to switch between communicating with one or all projectors when connected serially 6 Select Auto Setup to automatically select the best settings for an incoming signal 7 Make sure that Processing Mode in mage Settings is correct for the selected source 8 Change Resize Presets if you want the image displayed at a resolution other than native 9 Adjust Pixel Phase and Pixel Tracking from the Size and Position menu to eliminate noise from the displayed image 10 Adjust H Position and V Position from the Size and Position menu to re center the image on screen 11 Adjust Size in Size and Position until the image is at the necessary width then adjust Vertical Stretch Adjusting one option may have an affect on the other repeat adjustment if necessary Adjust H Position and V Position again if required to center the image Matrix StIM SIM User Manual
233. ize the IR curve function Typically users will not change these settings Copy Lighting Mode From Copies the Lighting Mode from a selected Lighting Mode Reset Current Lighting Mode To Default Resets the current lighting mode to the default values for that lighting mode Reset All Lighting Modes To Default Resets all lighting modes to factory default values Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 63 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE 3 64 InfraRGB Target amp Adjustments Menu Use this menu to set InfraRGB InfraRGB target levels InfraRGB Target amp Adjustments IRLOC Mode _ IRLOC Mode E Choose Enabled on this list to activate IRLOC mode IR Brightness Target 4000 s g aS c i IR Brightness Target Choose the brightness target for IRLOC mode 100 00 ArrayLOC Status H 1 Green Weight 100 00 _ This shows the status of the 7 IR Blue Weight 100 00 ArrayLOC Effective IR Weight g Green Weight Adiustment 0 0 This shows the effective IR 0 IR Blue Weight Adjustment 0 0 weight relative IR brightness of the red green and blue parts of the image InfraRGB Target Choose the channel s that you want to control All Red Green w TT D wo n Blue or 6500K Equivalent You 5 Auto Color Enable T can also set your own weight 47 Test Pattern Enable E presets by choosing User IR 1 2 3 or4 Manual IR Power IR Red Weight Figure 3 27 Configure Li
234. k EM Network PHM Network EM Network EM Network PHM Network EM Network EM Network PHM Network EM Network EM Network PHM Network PHM Figure 3 24 Projectors in an EM Network Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 55 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE i e PHM Network All Ethernet messages related to ArrayLOC flow through the PHM Network port of the PHM EM Network EM Network PHM Network EM Network EM Network PHM Network EM Network EM Network PHM Network EM Network EM Network PHM Network EM Network EM Network PHM Network PHM Figure 3 25 Projectors in a PHM Network Synchronize Keys Test Pattern Color Enable Use the Synchronized option to set the projector to listen for remote keystrokes through the ArrayLOC network and the master projector All synchronized projectors respond to the same keystrokes Double key strokes may not register correctly use alternate key commands instead A synchronized projector automatically starts listening to its IR receiver if the master projector becomes unavailable for example if it goes into standby mode You can override the key synchronization by using the Proj key and projector address to communicate with a specific projector or you can use a wired remote with a specific projector Independent indicates that the projector listens to its own IR remote receiver It is the default option Change this setting for each pr
235. l Command Reference UID USER ID CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL None DESCRIPTION SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLES UID username password Login a user UID Logout the current user also happens automatically when a new user logs in UID Display the current logged in user and their access level UID username 01 non VBL VIDEO BLACK INPUT CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control affects the black level for video signals Most NTSC video standards include an offset to black which is useful for setting up CRT projectors Set this control to 7 5 IRE if the video black level seems excessively elevated Set to 0 IRE if video black levels are crushed This control applies to analog cards with YUV color space only Valid values are 0 OIRE 1 7 5 IRE SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Get the video black level for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the video black level for main video PIIP Set the video black level for main video EXAMPLES VBL 1 Set the video black level for main video to 7 5 IRE VBL MAIN 1 Set the video black level for main video to 7 5 IRE VBL IN32 0 Set the video black level for main video to 0 IRE VBL Returns the video black level on main video VRT VERTICAL POSITION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control sets the vertical po
236. l all networks Figure 3 16 Network Routing List Separate Select Separate factory default to keep RS 232 RS 422 and Ethernet messages on their respective paths instead of being broadcast to the other types of ports see 2 Installation and Setup RS 232 and RS 422 Joined Messages originating from an RS 232 or RS 422 controller will be relayed to all RS 232 or RS 422 ports Any Ethernet communication however will not RS 232 and Ethernet Joined Messages to and from the RS 232 ports will also be relayed to the Ethernet port and vice versa Any RS 422 communications will be isolated In the case of multiple Ethernet sessions over the single Ethernet connector input on the RS 232 port will be relayed to all Ethernet sessions however input from any Ethernet session will only be relayed to the RS 232 ports All Joined All messages reach all ports regardless of type In the case of multiple Ethernet sessions input on one Ethernet session will be relayed to all other Ethernet sessions as well as to the RS 232 and RS 422 ports Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 35 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE Ethernet Settings Access Main Menu gt Configuration gt Communication gt Ethernet Settings NOTE Recommended for Network Administrators only Communications IP Address Ethernet Settings Enter a valid and unique IP address for use on the IP Address i Be Ee Be network to which the projector is
237. l by adjusting anything the projector will recognize the new input signal based on its frequencies and polarities automatically displaying an image according to default settings for that signal In general the image from the new source will be as large as possible without losing its aspect ratio This and other default image settings depend on the incoming source If you used the source once before and changed a display parameter such as Contrast V Position etc then a channel was automatically created and still exists in projector memory Creating a New Channel on page 3 12 Using one of the input or slot keys will automatically recall this channel and all its setup parameters and will update the display accordingly If more than one channel exists for the input the image displays according to the setup parameters for the first channel with matching characteristics 3 3 2 Channels A channel is a collection of measurements locations and Current Channeli parameter settings that tailor the display of a signal to your specific needs Since input source types and applications can vary greatly you will likely want to adjust and define a wide laa 4 GR OP A LL variety of parameters such as brightness contrast size etc in m 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz order to customize and optimize the display from or for a 02 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz particular input source For example the display settings you choose
238. le You can select from one of the standard tables or select an arbitrary Gamma table that has been downloaded into the projector A separate PC utility is needed to do this The 2 22 table is a simple power curve The standard table is a modified 2 22 curve with an optimized linear portion in the low end of the curve This is the same as selecting a custom table and setting the function to be 2 22 and the slope to be 1 0 Selecting Gamma Function from the drop down list enables the Gamma Function and Gamma Slope controls Valid values are 0 Standard 1 2 22 2 Gamma Function SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE ns MATN EXAMPLES BGC 0 Set main video to the standard base gamma table BGC MAIN 0 Set main video to the standard base Gamma table BGC IN32 0 Set Slot 3 Input 2 to the standard base Gamma table BGF BASE GAMMA FUNCTION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Defines the gamma power curve to be used when the Gamma table value is set to Gamma Function This value combined with Gamma Slope setting determines the Gamma table to be used The curve is generally a power curve with a small linear segment at the bottom defined by the slope The valid range is 100 300 where 100 is 1 0 linear and 300 is a 3 00 power curve SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the base gamma curve for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the base gamma curve for main video PIIP Set the base gamma
239. led no border will be displayed PIP Border Color This control allows you to choose the color of the optional border around the picture in picture image The border can be disabled by setting the width to zero Secondary Size amp Position Most of the controls adjust the secondary image in the same fashion as the main image controls see 3 4 2 Main Menu gt Size and Position Menu on page 3 17 Keep Aspect On Auto Setup Ensures that Auto Setup for any source will maintain the input aspect ratio when the default size is calculated If disabled and the source is not a special case the video source where a default stretch is defined the source is scaled to fit the platform Secondary Blanking The controls adjust the secondary image in the same fashion as the main image controls see Blanking on page 3 19 Secondary Image Settings The controls adjust the secondary image in the same fashion as the main image controls see 3 4 3 Image Settings Menu on page 3 20 Secondary Video Options The controls adjust the secondary image in the same fashion as the main image controls see Video Options Menu on page 3 22 Secondary Input Levels The controls adjust the secondary image in the same fashion as the main image controls see mage Settings gt Input Levels Menu on page 3 24 Secondary Advanced Image Settings The controls adjust the secondary image in the same fashion as the main image controls see mage Settings gt Advanced Image Setting
240. lete this channel setup default Delete Channel Setup Cancel 3 14 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Delete Multiple Channels Section 3 Operation Highlight any channel in the Channel Setup menu and press ENTER to go to the Select Channel Operation submenu e Select Delete Unlocked Only and press ENTER to delete all unlocked channels e Select Delete All Channels to delete all channels even those that are locked In either case the current channel will remain but will be redefined from projector defaults NOTE For any deletion a window will appear to confirm the deletion of the desired channel Select Cancel from the menu default if you don t want to delete Editing a Channel 1 Press MENU from the presentation level to display the Main menu To display the Channel Setup menu press 3 or move the highlight to the Channel Setup option and press ENTER The Channel Setup menu appears 2 To edit parameters shown in the Channel Setup menu select the relevant channel and press ENTER The Channel Edit menu will appear similar to the image on the right 3 Review and edit channel settings as required See Table 3 3 for channel setting options Table 3 3 Channel Edit Options Option Description o fF NF DT gt YB Df Card Type H Frequency V Frequency Interlaced Sync Source Name Channel Slot Input In Menu Auto Select Locked Next Channel Channel
241. lifiers and elevators e Use an optical mirror for rear screen installations to shorten the optical light path and use less space in the projection room Ventilation NOTICE Do not obstruct the air exchange to the projector The projector vents provide ventilation both for intake and exhaust Do not block or cover these openings Do not install the projector near a radiator or heat register or within an enclosure Make sure there is a minimum clearance of 25cm 10 on the left right top and rear sides of the projector Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 2 1 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 2 Installation and Setup CH IS TIE i 2 1 3 Lifting Transporting and Mounting Tortel Mount the projector to a sturdy flat surface that fits the entire projector Use all four mounting points to secure the projector to the surface Maintain a minimum clearance of 25cm 10 around the projector called a stay out zone for air circulation and clearance for cable connections to the input panel Insufficient stay out zone clearance can cause the projector to overheat during operation and or place undue stress on source connections The projector should be lifted by 2 people Use a stable cart to transport the projector Refer to the drawings given for your specific projector model for the mounting hole location and other technical information and restrictions which may be useful during installation A S Figure 2 1 Mounting Hol
242. lt option RGB Brightness Target Use this option to adjust the target brightness for all projectors in this array RGB Brightness Use this option to adjust the brightness of the projector array as a percentage of the target brightness Managing Colors with ArrayLOC Matrix StIM projectors use ArrayLOC to display a reasonably saturated gamut at the maximum brightness that all the projectors in the array can support ArrayLOC monitors the projector array and adjusts settings automatically To manage color using ArrayLOC e Take Control of the Array on page 3 57 e Adjust Projected White and Primary Colors for the Array on page 3 58 e Fine tune Whites White Brightness or Primary Colors on page 3 59 e Fine tune Projector Colors With a Color Meter on page 3 60 NOTE ArrayLOC is enabled by default Take Control of the Array Configuration To make color adjustments across the array you must ArrayLOC make the projector you are working with the master a a a _ Bright ColorLOC Mode OE x projector Synchronize to This Projector gl 1 On the projector you want to work with access the ArrayLOC menu Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC Bright ColorLOC Configuration ETA OE 2 Check Synchronize to This Projector ee ee The current projector becomes the master _ ArrayLOC Status projector Changes you make in the Array Color arrayLOC Status Filter Target or ArrayLOC Configuration menus on the master projec
243. lt or customized location for the display Spicy Ener Me anee Q Serial ports E of all on screen menus _ Splash Screen Setup Startup amp No Signal To create a custom menu location OSD Transparency gd 1 Choose a preset that is closest to the erent O iene tase desired location x Splash Screen C Default Splash Screen 2 Adjust Horizontal Shift and Vertical Shift slide bars to move the menu to the desired location Cascading Menus d NOTE Avoid locations too close to a corner or edge to prevent cropping of larger menus Horizontal Shift And Vertical Shift Shift your menus as desired creating a customized menu location Display Automatic Message Boxes Check to enable message boxes that are directly triggered by user actions for example gamma or lens control message boxes Display User Message Boxes Check to enable message boxes that are not directly triggered by user actions for example signal information message boxes Display Error Messages Choose how you want to be notified of errors detected in either the incoming signal or projector Select Screen or All default to see brief on screen messages This is recommended during setup or testing of the projector Or select Serial Ports to receive messages using RS 232 or RS 422 serial communication only To hide error message displays such as during shows and presentations select Off or Serial Ports Splash Screen Setup Choose when to display
244. m To enter a number greater than 9 press O zero before pressing another number For example press O zero then 2 to enter the number 12 as a menu selection NOTE When entering numbers in a text field the 0 zero button acts as the number O zero See 3 2 5 Editing Text on page 3 9 Help Press HELP to display a list of context sensitive Help windows Press HELP again to close the Help window Menu Press MENU to enter or exit the projector menu system OSD On screen display Press OSD then the DOWN arrow to hide the projector menu system during use To see the menus again do one of the following e Press and hold OSD for 2 seconds e Press and release OSD followed immediately by UP arrow e Press OSD twice Invisible menus are fully functional enabling hidden access to numbered features and image adjustments by entering the corresponding sequence of key presses on the remote NOTE With OSD ON you can still hide error messages and slidebars by disabling these options in the Menu Preferences menu Shutter The shutter is open upon power up Press and hold SHUTTER to move between simulated shutter states in the order OPEN CLOSED WHITE OPEN Or press and release SHUTTER followed immediately by UP arrow CLOSED or DOWN arrow OPEN to guarantee the correct state Close the shutter to block the displayed image while maintaining access to projector functions A white shutter state allows you to view menus and im
245. m automatically when any of the values for Size Vertical Stretch H Position V Position or Blanking do not correspond to those for a preset option e Select Default for most sources factory default The image will be centered and displayed as large as possible depending on the type of source By default when displaying a new source your image will use as much of the projector display area as possible for the type of incoming source data but with minimal or no changes to aspect ratio Default If PC or non HDTV If video or 16 10 graphics If 4 3 or 5 4 graphics If HDTV anamorphic signal Image Image a fee na 1920 1920 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 17 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CHRISTIE e No Resizing displays the image in its native resolution which may or may not match the projector resolution For example for a source with a native resolution of 800 x 600 No Resizing in an SXGA projector will use the central 800 x 600 pixels and have a black border The black border areas are unused areas as shown below If 800 x 600 signal If HDTV No cropping of image If NTSC PAL SECAM variable borders If HDTV 1080i No cropping of image e Full Size uses all pixels for displaying the image regardless of source or original aspect ratio Incoming source material having a different aspect ratio than the project
246. m the projector will follow the reply There are 2 types of acknowledgements e SIMPLE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Insert a character just after the start code This will only return a This will only return a on success or a on failure NAK e FULL ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Insert a character just after the start code This will return the message sent as a reply This is a quick way to confirm success with set messages and 1s particularly useful with long distance communication links or where the projectors and or images are not visible from the controller Acknowledgements can also be a type of flow control e CHECKSUMS For maximum message integrity add a checksum character amp just after the start code You must then also include the correct checksum total 0 255 just before the end code Make sure to add a space before the calculated checksum to separate it from the last data parameter The checksum is the low order byte of the sum of the ASCII values of all characters between the and the beginning of the checksum but not including either It does include the space in front of the checksum Calculate the checksum for the above set contrast to 64 command as follows CHECKSUM EXAMPLE amp c 0 n 6 4 space 26h 63h 6Fh 6E h 36h 34h 20h 01FO0h FOh when only the low byte is used 240 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual C 5 020 100306 05
247. ma key 4 Gamma Settings menu 27 gamut threshold warning 50 gateway 36 general purpose input output see GPIO Geometry Correction menu 37 Index 1 Index GPIO 18 grey level 46 H HDMI output loop source 71 72 HDMI output options 31 help key 5 help accessing on line help 7 horizontal position 19 host name 36 I Image Settings menu 20 image setup 15 18 boresight alignment 16 images See also arrayLOC active window size 16 adjusting brightness uniformity 40 adjusting keystone distortions 38 Advanced Image Settings menu 26 aspect ratio 19 auto input level 24 automatic setup 16 black level blending 43 45 black levels and drives 24 blanking 19 blending edges 42 brightness 21 color space 21 conrtrast 20 Detail Settings menu 28 Gamma Settings menu 27 Image Settings menu 20 Input Levels menu 24 input peak detector 25 Noise Reduction Settings menu 28 orientation 31 pixel tracking 19 resizing 17 19 texture enhancement 28 Video Options menu 22 infrared settings InfraRGB menu 61 infraRGB source sequence 61 input cards 7 LED status indicators 7 settings 48 input drives 24 input key 4 input level detector 47 Input Levels menu 24 input peak detector 25 46 input specifications 8 9 input video black 22 inputs and channels 10 Channel Setup menu 13 channels 11 copying channels 14 Index 2 creating a channel 12 deleting channels 14 15 editing channels 15 signal types 13 switching inputs 10 u
248. mary Projector Capability Identifies the projector capability with respect to the array common color gamut as defined by Color Target and Brightness Target 100 indicates the projector meets the target A greater number indicates that the projector can exceed the target A smaller number indicates how much the projector falls short of meeting the target Enable Warning Check this option to enable warnings when either the projector brightness capability or color capability falls below the specified warning threshold Warning Brightness Threshold Set the Brightness Warning Threshold as a percentage of the brightness target When the common brightness reaches the warning level all projectors in the BCLOC group issue a warning message Projector fails to meet warning brightness threshold of xx capability xx Changing this option e Recalculates the internal brightness warning level e If warnings are enabled checks the current common brightness capability against the brightness warning level Warning Gamut Threshold Set the Warning Gamut Threshold as a percentage of the target gamut When the common gamut falls below this level all projectors in the BCLOC group issue a warning message Projector fails to meet warning gamut threshold of xx capability Rxx Gxx Bxx Changing this option e Recalculates the Internal gamut warning level e If warnings are enabled checks the current common gamut against the gam
249. mmended default mode The Bright mode is the same as Cool except multiple LEDs may operate at the same time This mode should provide brighter performance but it will also generate more heat in the system 1000 100 0 3 48 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation e In OFF mode the projector e Disables BCLOC Color control is done manually through Manual RGB Adjustment and manual color settings e Clears the flag to execute the Array BCLOC algorithm e Restores the LM color adjustment options on the Manual RGB Adjustment menu and the manual color adjustments e Ignores setting changes sent by a projector with the master flag set Synchronize to this Projector on page 3 49 e In Fixed mode the LED setting is derived from Manual RGB Adjustment Color Space correction is performed electronically to achieve the Target Color Space Synchronize to this Projector To broadcast the ArrayLOC settings to the projectors in your array you must define a projector as the master by checking the option Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Synchronize to This Projector The master projector has access to most settings under the Bright ColorLOC Configuration and Array Color Target submenus These settings are greyed out on the other projectors in the array to prevent conflicting information from being sent to the array You can change which projector is the master at an
250. more information see Creating a New Channel on page 3 12 and 3 4 1 Automatic Image Setup on page 3 16 3 From the Configuration gt InfraRGB menu set the Main Input to the Input Card and the Input on which the source of visible data is connected 4 Set the Secondary Input to the Input Card and the Input on which the source of IR data is connected 5 Select Enable InfraRGB from the Configuration gt InfraRGB menu 6 Select Interleaved RGB Main IR Secondary from the InfraRGB Source Sequence list The system will then attempt to interleave the signals 7 Select the lighting mode that is appropriate for your application using the Selected Lighting Mode list 8 The controls on the InfraRGB Target amp Adjustments menu can then be used to set the target IR brightness and target IR weight You can do this by adjusting the Manual IR Power setting or by using IRLOC NOTES 1 If the projector is to run in frame lock mode output frame rate locked to the input both inputs in Interleaved mode MUST have the same frame rate and should be locked together If not the image data on the secondary channel will eventually misalign with the primary channel and significant image artifacts will appear The projector software will check that the clock rates of the 2 inputs match and will not engage Interleaved mode if they are too far apart Secondary Frequency Mismatch error 2 If the frame rates of the 2 inputs cannot be guaranteed the pr
251. n the aspect ratio is maintained and that the pixel phase can be optimized described in Pixel Phase on page 3 19 Tracking determines the frequency of the pixel sampling clock indicated by the number of incoming pixels per line so that all pixels generated by a particular source are sampled NOTE By default the projector samples at the correct frequency for most sources For best results use a test pattern such as a smooth gray consisting of a clear pattern of black and white pixels or a similar half ON half OFF graphic image such as the Windows 2000 shutdown screen Adjust the slide bar until the vertical stripes broaden to the point where one large stripe fills the image If the image still exhibits some shimmer or noise adjust Pixel Phase as described in Pixel Phase on page 3 19 Pixel Phase Adjust Pixel Phase after Pixel Track Adjust pixel phase when the image usually from an RGB source still shows shimmer or noise after pixel tracking is optimized Pixel phase adjusts the phase of the pixel sampling clock relative to the incoming signal Adjust the slidebar until the image stabilizes and each pixel is clearly defined You may notice that you can stabilize the image at more than one point For example you may find that the image appearance at 11 is identical to the image appearance at 38 you can use either setting If some shimmer from a video or HDTV source persists use the Filter cont
252. nable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by main ASR PIIP 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by main ASR MAIN 0 Disable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by main ASR C001 0 Disable Auto Channel Select for channel 1 ASU AUTO SETUP CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control tells the projector to automatically adjust as many parameters as it can to produce the optimal setup for the current input NOTE If main and video are using the same channel the Auto Setup will act on both regardless of the sub code being used In some cases for analog video the user can select the format that best suits their source This selection helps the Auto Setup get the correct settings for the tracking and phase controls for analog sources that contain the same number of active lines but have a different aspect ratios All digital and decoder option cards do not allow options for auto setup since digital hardware provides enough information to perform the correct auto setup Analog PC graphics sources 4 5 wire sync present a list of formats based on the current active lines detected in the video Analog Video Sources 3 wire sync on green always have the options Default and Advanced Video sources use a look up table to determine their format based on video standards The Advanced Auto Setup selection measures the start pixel and sta
253. nd no eBenbue_7 uoneinbyuog oN uJ ed S L 6 ebenbue7 9 BulyoumMs X yndu Asepuodes 7 SNJE S 9 uoneinByuoyd y dnjes jouueuy e sBuines bewl z UOI SOd 8 ZIS nual ule Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 4 4 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Menu Tree Section 4 CHRISTIE 4 1 2 Menu Tree Continued Geometry and Color uwnjop MOY SULUNIOD e oL SMO Jeo dnyes Bulli dn u L G Y KA L sBunjes Bulpusjg 2407 yoe g JSH ss u y ug JYybly wopog ss u fug ye Woyog ssoujybug 4y dol ss uzyfug 427 doL ss u y ug woog ss uzyfug dol ss uz yfug 44y ss uzyfug y 7 ss u yf ug J9 U94 UIPIM pus g woog UIPIM puajg dol UIPIM puajg 4p UIPIM puajg 427 UISEd IS jqeu4 pu jg Jelg Bupu jg 19497 49e q OL GL vl l cl LL OL TN OAT OF CO OD g qeuz 104109 o jny woJj Buas Adog JO OD enig JOON Uda 10 00 pay gt sseujybug q9 juawusnipy ss uzyfug VUM WwoJ4 sjuawujsnipy Adog giqeuy weed S L jqeu4 10 09 ojny s NeJap o syuawysnfpe juano JaSOY syu w zsnfpy 12919 SHUM JO Hed sng SHUM JO Hed UBOID SHUM JO Hed Psy anig JO Wed UddI anid JO Wed poy ng jo Ped nig u 19 JO Ped nig u 19 JO Wed poy UBB JO WE U29319 pay jo Wed ani pay jo Wed U29319 Pay JO Wed psy g0eds 1
254. nd structure NOTES 1 Input Condition The Output field contains 7 blocks which refer to the 7 I O pins on the x xTx x x x x Be GPIO connector Pin 1 12V and Pin 5 Ground These are not a th included 2 Clicking a block toggles between H L and X See Figure B 8 See Appendix D Serial Command Reference for detailed information NOTE Zhe contents of the Serial Representation box are read only e Click the Help button for a description of special RTE commands available for adding loops and delays to the command sequence Figure i Pi Output elper B 10 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHic IS TIE Appendix B WebUI e Click the Test button to test the entered command string NOTE f the test passed or failed a green or red icon appears to the right side of the Test button C 10 Click Finish to create the added event NOTES 1 The added event appears in the RTE Listing window 2 To activate or deactivate 1 or more RTEs listed in the RTE Listing window select or clear each check box in the Active column accordingly RTE Listing T RTE Daly Scheduled Even HBG OT E RTE 2 Week Scheduled Eve zooso9na ozoz o T RTE 3 Monthly Scheduled Event 2009 09 04 04 04 04 Status Idle Idle RTE 4 No Signal System Event No Signal dle RTE 5 LXLHLXL GPIO Event LXLHLXL Idle Add a System Event 1 Click Add to open the RTE Wizard 2 Select the System Eve
255. ned by the scaling and keystone warp is applied to the signal NOTE Frame locking on projectors in a ArrayLOC network can be controlled from one projector See Synchronize Frame Delay on page 3 56 When Synchronize Frame Delay is used the master projector sets the frame delay for the synched projectors in the array Actual Frame Delay Indicates the dynamically calculated effective minimum frame delay for the projector The calculated delay is affected by image shift scaling warp keystone applied and format For example the minimum latency can vary based on the amount of scaling applied to the image When using keystone or warping an additional latency 1s required depending on the amount of warp Free Run Frequency This control sets the output video vertical frequency when Frame Locking 1s set to Free Run HDMI Output Loop Source The HDMI output options are e Choose Direct Loop to directly pass through the HDMI input signals from the same Twin HDMI input card The Input1 signal is looped to Output1 and the Input2 signal is looped to Output2 e Choose Main Secondary Loop to loop the main amp secondary video to the outputs regardless of which card these signals originate from The main video signal is looped to Output1 and the secondary video signal is looped to Output2 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 31 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE l Power Management Auto Power Up Configuration I
256. ngs associated with them Proj Press PROJ to access a specific projector within a group of projectors or to confirm if the local projector 1s listening The number in the Enter Number window indicates which projector is currently listening to commands and will match the projector address defined in the Configuration gt Communications menu The Proj check box read only shows whether or not the projector physically connected to a remote is listening to commands from that remote A check mark means that the connected projector is listening if there is no check mark you are communicating with a different projector To control a specific projector with the remote press PROJ and then enter the 3 digit number assigned to the projector you want to use If you switch to a projector other than the one you are currently using the check mark will disappear To broadcast to multiple projectors press PROJ twice without entering a projector number Remote commands will then affect all projectors present NOTES The projector address can be set in the Configuration gt Communications menu Enter Press ENTER to select a highlighted item to toggle a check box or to accept a parameter adjustment and return to the previous menu or image Exit Press EXIT to return to the previous level the previous menu NOTE Exit does not save changes within text editing boxes including number editing of a slidebar value or within drop down lists It acts as a
257. nlock the channel being used by main MLK C001 0 Unlock channel 1 MNR MOSQUITO NOISE REDUCTION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Mosquito Noise Reduction MNR dynamically adapts to image content effectively reducing mosquito artifacts around sharp edges in DCT based compression SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE Set the mosquito noise reduction for Slot x Input y EXAMPLE MNR 32 Set the mosquito noise reduction to mid point for main video MNU MENU SETTINGS AND CONFIGURATION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set menu type view OSD state read menu structure SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt View change the current state of the OSD 0 presentation 1 main 2 submenu EXAMPLE MNU MNU 0 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 43 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE MSH MENU SHIFT HORIZONTAL CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Change the horizontal position of the main menu If the position is not from one of the preset positions MSP will be changed to Custom SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt View set the horizontal position of the main menu EXAMPLES MSH Get current horizontal position of main menu MSH 50 Set main menu horizontal position to 50 pixels from left edge
258. nt state of the projector Test Steps forward through all internal test patterns After stepping past the last test pattern you will return to the current input Press TEST and then cycle by pressing the LEFT or RIGHT arrow keys to cycle in either direction through the test patterns Press EXIT to return to the current input Auto Initiates an automated process in which the projector optimizes critical display parameters such as size position pixel tracking etc for the current source These parameters are listed in Table 3 1 An Auto Setup can save time in perfecting a display before you make adjustments as required Table 3 1 Auto Setup OPTIMIZES SETS TO DEFAULT NOTE You must have an unlocked channel present to use Auto Setup Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 3 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 3 4 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i The Best Auto Setup will be obtained under the following conditions e Input levels It is best to have an image with saturated very bright colors e Phase High contrast edges are needed To determine the active window size e Video images should have whites and blacks in the image e Wide range video images should have content including white that extends to all edges of the image Channel Select a specific source setup channel defined and stored in projector memory To select a channel press CHANNEL and enter a 2 digit channel number or if there is a list displayed highlight the de
259. nt tab 3 Select a type of event from the System Event drop down list RTE Wizard Scheduled Event System Event GPIO Event Function Key Event DMX Channel Event System Event Boot up Power Error ss C000 Signal S S Description hi _ p Input Change Channel Change Command String Portions mst a Help a Serial Representation KE EZE NOTE Depending on the selection made additional selections are made available in the second drop down list located underneath i e Input Change gt Input 1 Slot 1 Add a GPIO Event RTE Wizard 1 Click Add to open the RTE Wizard LS E EE GEO Even 2 Select the GPIO Event tab Sa 3 For the GPIO Event option define the Input es Condition field as required The Input Condition ivi sss field contains 7 blocks which refer to the 7 I O Command String GPIO Output Helper Help pins on the GPIO connector Pin 1 12V and Pin 5 Ground are not included or changed Clicking 2 Jaa block toggles between H L and X See Appendix C Cancel Finish e D Serial Command Reference for detailed information 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix B WebUI CH 1S TIE Add a Function Key Event 1 Click Add to open the RTE Wizard oF emm 2 Select the Function Key Event tab Function Key Event 3 Select a Func function key from the drop down list See Section 3 Operation for detailed Description information Command String Se
260. o ACT IN12 Returns the active window for Slot 1 Input 2 ADR ADDRESS CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set Query Device Address on ASCII Protocol network Required only for RS 232 connections that are daisy chained to allow directed messages SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Valid Address range is 0 to 999 Reserved broadcast address is 65535 EXAMPLES 65535 ADR 0 Set all devices to address 0 0 ADR 5 Set first device at address 0 to address to 5 65535 1001 ADR Query address for all devices and return results to address 1001 Expected response to previous query 01001 OOOOSADR 005 AGC AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Enable disable the Automatic Gain Control This control allows the decoder to automatically track the sync amplitude of the incoming signal Turn this control OFF if you are experiencing strange color artifacts indicating an incompatibility between the source and the AGC SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the AGC on Slot x Input y to the specified state of either enable or disable RIAN Seaton coat onmainimgs PIIP Set automatic gain control on main image DE Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference AGC AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL Cont d EXAMPLES AGC 1 Enabl
261. o Fine Tuning of Projected Colors Managing Colors with ArrayLOC A14 in Section 3 Does clearing the very large PCA adjustments resolve the problem Is the Adjustment Interval set to an appropriate value Menu ee ene ne Do the mismatched projectors Do the mismatched projectors gt Configuration P a fo P E N A change brightness when another change color when another projector gt ArrayLOC a colors projector takes control of the array and takes control of the array and gt Array Color poma changes the RGB Brightness Target changes the Array Color Target Target Are there any projectors ie E Yes with very different color Target Gamuts the Common capabilities than the others Gamut should be close to the listed projector capabilities rather than the Target Gamut Proceed to Take c 1 Se Olen E ATAY Is the Is the Common Gamut Set the Array Color Target Gamut reasonably close to the LE EOE La 0 Tarcet Camut Colors with ArrayLOC tne arget Gamut in Section 3 Bright ColorLOC Array Status Target Gamut X 800 330 160 800 125 000 lt Target Common Gamut 687 306 193 738 150 34 313 329 Flags ProjiD Group Int Age Wy WY 1 211 1 1 185 748 696 8 0 211 1 1 193 741 123 4 2 211 1 1 188 745 778 5 3 211 1 1 181 749 700 9 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 6 11 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting Trees 6 6 9 Bright ColorL
262. o default factory values EXAMPLES IFS SLCT 1 Enable InfraRGB IFS ISLM 4 Select lighting mode preset 4 moonlight IFS RGBB Get current RGB lighting brightness percent 10 IFS RGBB 250 Set RGB lighting brightness to 25 IFS IRDB 1000 Set IR lighting brightness to 100 IFS RGBX 500 Set RGB lighting brightness on User preset to 50 IFS COPY 5 Copy lighting mode preset 5 halfmoon to current IFS RSTL Reset current preset to default IFS RSTA Reset all presets to default IFS RGCB 2 Set RGB Curve control to Gain Curve IFS RPCB 2200 Set RGB Curve parameter C for current to 2 200 INM CHANNEL IN MENU CONTROL GROUP Channel SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Determine whether the channel should be visible in the Channel List which is available by pressing the Channel key on the remote s keypad SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE COxx Toggle In Menu for channel xx channel number from 01 to 99 MAIN Toggle In Menu for the channel being used by main PIIP Toggle In Menu for the channel being used by main EXAMPLES INM Get channel in menu state for channel used by main INM MAIN Get channel in menu state for channel used by main INM PIIP Get channel in menu state for channel used by main INM 1 Show in menu for the channel being used by main INM PIIP 1 Show in menu for the channel being used by main INM MAIN 0 Hide in
263. o either YCbCr 4 4 4 RGB or YCbCr 4 2 2 Although the proper sampling mode is determined automatically by the projector you can override the setting Valid values are 0 YCbCr 4 4 4 or RGB 1 YCbCr 4 2 2 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 61 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE SMP SAMPLING MODE Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the sampling mode on Slot x Input y PIIP Set the sampling mode on main video EXAMPLES SMP 1 Set sampling mode to YCbCr422 on main video SMP MAIN 0 Set sampling mode to YCbCr444 on main video SMP PIIP 1 Set sampling mode to YCbCr422 on main video SMP IN32 1 Set sampling mode to YCbCr422 on Slot 3 Input 2 SMP Returns the current sampling mode value on main video SMP PIIP Returns the current sampling mode value on main video SMP IN12 Returns the current sampling mode value on Slot 1 Input 2 SOR SCREEN ORIENTATION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Selects the orientation of the displayed image It can be displayed normally inverted horizontally inverted vertically or inverted in both directions as required by the projector installation Valid values are 0 Front Projection 1 Rear Projection 2 Front Projection Inverted 3 Rear Projection Inverted SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE farsi O EXAMPLE SPS SPLASH SCREEN CONTROL GROUP Prefe
264. ocument specify which subcodes are applicable to each function C 2 6 Flow Control Normally messages can be sent to the projector before processing of earlier messages is complete the projector will just store messages in a buffer until ready to process However if a series of messages is sent it is possible that the projector may not be able to process them as fast as they arrive and the buffer will become full If this happens the projector will send the 13h Xoff code to instruct the controller or any devices preparing to transmit to cease transmission At this point the controller must respond immediately and send no more than 10 extra characters or they may be lost 1 e the projector is able to accommodate the receipt of up to 10 more bytes after it sends 13h Xoff When the buffer is once again available the projector will send a 11h Xon command to resume transmission NOTE Xon and Xoff controls apply to both directions of communication The projector will not send more than 3 characters after it has received a 13h Xoff code C 6 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Appendix C Serial Communication C 2 7 Network Operation Up to 1000 projectors can be linked together in a chain with the OUT port on one connected to the IN port on the next A controller connected to the IN port on the first projector can control them all either by broadcasting messages which have no addre
265. ode gt Enable or disable active loop through EXAMPLES ALT 1 Enables Standby active loop through ALT 0 Disables Standby active loop through ALT Gets the current Standby active loop through setting APJ ACTIVE PROJECTOR CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Temporarily enable or disable the IR and wired keypad Inputs to a specific projector in a network of projectors When a projector is disabled the only key that works is PROJ The next time the projector is powered up again it will revert to fully enabled The built in keypad will always be fully functional This control does not overwrite the Front IR Back IR and Wired Keypad settings SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set 0 to temporarily disable keypad access to this projector EXAMPLES APJ 1 Projector is active keypads are enabled APJ 0 Projector is not active keypads are temporarily disabled APJ Is the projector keypad active or not APW AUTO POWER UP CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION When the A C switch is turned ON the projector will automatically change from Stand by Mode to Power ON Mode The projector will switch the lamp s on without waiting for further user actions SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set to 1 to enable D 6 EXAMPLES APW 0 Projector will remain in Standby Mode until the use
266. ojector e Projector Head Module PHM with attached Illumination Module LM e Electronics Module EM e Warranty Card e Web Registration Form e Line Cord rated North American NOTE Each projection system requires a User Kit P N 125 107109 xx If you did not receive a User Kit or if you want to purchase additional kits you can order them separately Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 Installation and Setup This section explains how to install connect and optimize the projector display Pre Installation Considerations When designing a projection room for either a permanent or temporary installation consider positioning the projector and screen for maximum audience coverage and space efficiency For example placing the screen along the larger wall in a rectangular room reduces audience coverage Installation Considerations Operating single or multiple units e Room size Lighting and audience seating Distance between the audience and the display e Angle from which the display is viewed e Ambient temperature must stay below 40 C 95 F Changes in temperature can cause drifts in the projector circuitry which may affect performance Keep the projector away from heating and air conditioning vents e Keep the projector away from all devices radiating electromagnetic energy For example motors and transformers slide projectors speakers power amp
267. ojector can run in Interleaved mode if Frame lock is turned off In this case the output frame rate is preset to a free run frequency value that may be set by the user typically 60Hz Interleaved Mode Error Conditions When interleaved mode is activated a pop up menu with the title bar InfraRGB may appear in the top right corner of the screen This menu will be displayed when interleave mode does not engage properly The reasons interleave did not engage should be displayed in this pop up menu and may include e Missing Secondary Signal The input card and the input selected as Secondary Input is not providing video data Check the input e Secondary Frequency Mismatch When running frame locked mode the primary and secondary frame rates must match Please correct this condition or run in free run mode Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 67 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE l Invalid Frequency The net output frame rate of the interleaved signal is out of range This means that the net output frame rate is greater than 120Hz or less than 96Hz Please correct this condition or run in free run mode e Cable Configuration does not support this mode To run interleaved mode a dual link DVI cable is required for the connection between the EM and PHM A single link cable cannot be used To Choose a Video Mode 1 To turn IR ON select the InfraRGB menu then select Enable InfraRGB 2 On the InfraRGB menu select
268. ojector individually NOTE 4ArrayLOC network communication overrides RS 232 serial communication for keys Synchronize Frame Delay Use the Synchronized option to synch the frame delay on all the synched projectors in the ArrayLOC group Set the delay value in Set Array Frame Delay NOTE To use this synchronization feature set FrameLocking to FrameLOCK See Frame Locking on page 3 31 Independent is the default option Change this setting for each projector individually Set Array Frame Delay This option indicates the current frame delay for all the synched projectors in the ArrayLOC group Use this control on the master projector to adjust the frame delay for the synched projectors in the ArrayLOC group Set the value equal to or higher than the reported Minimum Array Frame Delay value Setting the value lower than the reported minimum may result in tearing artifacts 3 56 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Minimum Array Frame Delay Indicates the largest minimum frame delay reported for the ArrayLOC group The value is the largest of the reported minimum frame delay required to render the display without tearing artifacts on each projector in the ArrayLOC group Synchronize RGB Brightness Use the Synchronized option to synch the RGB brightness for all the synched projectors in the Array LOC group Change this setting for each projector individually Synchronized is the defau
269. ond projector for this shared edge 3 42 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation 5 Re adjust width both projectors until the overly bright band at the midpoint of the overlapping blends disappears or just changes to very light gray For the shared edge use the same Blend Width setting on each projector NOTE f the best blend appears to be between 2 settings choose the wider setting for both projectors Check the blend and adjust as required e To lighten the overall blend increase the Blend Midpoint in both projectors e To darken the overall blend decrease the Blend Midpoint in both projectors To fine tune the amount of mid gray intensity as opposed to black white in the blend adjust Blend Shape in both projectors 7 Repeat with remaining projectors overlaps 8 Check completed display wall with the desired external signal 9 Ifnecessary adjust the mechanical alignment to maintain perfect pixel on pixel alignment over time In applications where you are projecting only white or light images the Blend Width may be slightly higher set according to how much overlap you have between images NOTE Recommended overlap is 12 5 25 Array Color Target See Array Color Target on page 3 51 Projector Color Adjustment See Projector Color Adjustment on page 3 53 Black Level Blending Geometry amp Color Brightens the center regions to match i Black Lev
270. ontinuous grayscale Set Level Detector Threshold to near black such as 200 Adjust Offsets to minimize area of black stripe Set Level Detector Threshold to near white such as 800 AE OR Adjust Gains to minimize area of white stripe Level Detector Threshold Input Level Value defines the value to be used by the Input Level Detector in recognizing blacks and whites See Input Level Detector above Aspect Ratio Overlay Check this box to display an overlay pattern over the image The overlay shows the boxes corresponding to the size and shape of different aspect ratios Test Pattern Color Swap This function swaps the green and red color when drawing the Grid test pattern and may be helpful when adjusting convergence on the projector Freeze Image During Auto Setup If selected this will hide temporary image artifacts that may appear during the auto setup procedure Advanced Diagnostics Diagnostics amp Calibration Allows for the setting of advanced controls which may cause image disruption including the possible Advanced Diagnostics Output Peak Detector E loss of the OSD menus These disruptions are only temporary pressing EXIT to exit the menu will restore Output Level Detector a the settings and allow normal operation _ Level Detector Threshold 2048 2 Be Output Peak Detector i Light Engine Test Pattern No test pattern This is an aid for setting up the input levels It causes the data to be pro
271. op Left 2 Bottom Left 3 Bottom Right SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE esmae O EXAMPLE PPS SWAP CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control swaps the current main and Inputs It will swap the Inputs regardless if there are valid signals on either of the Inputs SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PPS Swap Inputs PRT SERIAL PORT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Status DESCRIPTION Gets the current serial port being used or gets a list of all serial ports available on the device SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES PRT Gets current serial port PRT L Gets list of ports Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 51 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE PTL SERIAL PROTOCOL CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Set the protocol for a serial communications port SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE PRTA Set the protocol on port A RS 232 In pass through PRTB Set the protocol on port B RS 232 Out PRTC Set the protocol on port C RS 422 EXAMPLES PTL PRTA RAW Set protocol on port A to a pass through raw data protocol PTL PRTA CHRISTIE Set protocol on port A to a Christie Digital serial protocol PTL PRTA Get protocol PTL PRTA RAW PVP VERTICAL POSITION CONTROL G
272. options in Configuration gt Communications See Communications on page 3 34 Set Configuration gt Communications gt Network Routing see Network Routing on page 3 35 e To relay commands to all projectors set Network Routing to All Join e To isolate just RS422 communications select RS232 and Ethernet Joined Only projector 3 will respond to the RS422 controller e To isolate just Ethernet communications select RS232 and RS422 Joined only projector 1 will respond using Ethernet PROJ 1 GIREN R8232 ooo O n 1 Separate CATS 2 RS232 and Rs422 joined 3 RS232 and Ethernet joined gt 4 All joined 2 12 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHKISTIE 2 6 3 RS 232 Network Section 2 Installation and Setup In the RS 232 network the controller can communicate with the first projector and the command can be relayed to each serially connected projector NOTICE Using the wrong type of serial cable can damage the projector e Connect the controller to one projector using serial cable between the PC and the RS232 IN port on the Electronic Module e Connect a serial cable between the RS232 OUT connector of the first projector Electronics Module and the RS232 IN connector of the next projector Electronics Module Connect the remaining projectors RS232 communication cables must be good quality and no more than 25 feet in length e Set the RS 232 serial options in
273. or D cy Air Exhaust RECESS aon A E 001 100704 xx 001 100585 xx OUT 8 RS232 i 5 rs O IN DMD Dw ETITI 001 111093 xx D oooooooooo 001 100585 xx O 0 GPIO EF RS422 002 100005 xx Oo 0 Wired IR Keypad A 2 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix B Web User Interface B 1 Logging On IMPORTANT Before logging on to the system ensure that you select the appropriate language required Your language selection only affects the web user interface The language used by the projector s on screen display OSD is not affected See Figure B 1 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address in the address bar assigned to your projector 2 Select the appropriate language from the Language drop down list located in the upper left hand corner See Figure B 1 3 Type your user name and password in the User Name and Password see Figure B 2 fields respectively Both entries are case sensitive Login User Name O English v Password ay Figure B 1 Language drop down list Figure B 2 Login 4 Click the Login button The Main window appears G H CHA IS TIE Logout DHS tmn Pon Projector Information Power On Lamp On Shutter Open OSD On Shutter mJ See Date 2010 04 15 Time 13 00 30 Active Input Window IP Address 192 168 230 164 1920x1200 MAC Address 00 1A D7 00 32 6E Matrix StIM SIM User Manual B 1 020
274. or will be stretched for display e Full Width fills the projector display from left to right without changing the original aspect ratio of the image Depending on the source data at the top and bottom may be discarded cropped or the display may have black borders at the top and bottom called letterboxed incoming anamorphic i o i 1920 if video Image 1920 Full Width fills the display from top to bottom Depending on the source this may create borders incoming anamorphic if video 1200 Image 1200 Image Cropped 1920 Cropped 1920 e Anamorphic displays an anamorphic image in its native 16 9 aspect ratio The image will fill the screen from side to side and be centered between black bars at top and bottom Size Controls both the image width and height maintaining the current aspect ratio of the displayed signal data Vertical Stretch For non HDTV anamorphic only 1200 Adjusts the height of the image while keeping the width constant Use Vertical Stretch to change the aspect ratio of the display 3 18 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Pixel Track Steady flickering or several soft vertical stripes or bands across the entire image indicates poor pixel tracking Proper pixel tracking ensures that the image quality is consistent across the scree
275. ormat and code Opening and closing round brackets parentheses surround each message see Table C Table C 1 Message Formats SOURCE MESSAGE FORMAT FUNCTION EXAMPLES From Controller Code Data SET set contrast of main image to 500 CON500 or CON 500 Code Subcode Data SET set contrast of image to 500 CON PIIP500 or CON PIIP 500 From Controller Code REQUEST what is current contrast CON or CON Code Subcode REQUEST what is contrast of image CON PIIP or CON PHP Matrix StIM SIM User Manual C 1 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix C Serial Communication CH 1S TIE Table C 1 Message Formats SOURCE MESSAGE FORMAT FUNCTION EXAMPLES From Projector Code Data REPLY contrast is 500 CON 500 Code Subcode Data REPLY contrast is 500 CON PIP 500 C 2 1 Basic Message Structure The following component fields comprise a standard ASCII message Optional fields such as extra characters for special modes restrictions or added functionality are shown in italics with the exception of Notes Start and End of Message Every message begins with the left bracket character and ends with the right bracket character NOTE f the start character left bracket is received before an end character of the previous message the partial previous message is discarded Prefix Characters Optional For acknowledgement that the projector has responded and or to maximize message
276. orth America and Japan 3 SECAM 1s a format found primarily in France Eastern Europe and much of Africa 4 NTSC44 is a tape only standard and is usually used with hybrid signals used to provide compatibility with video material of another TV format without a complete translation 5 PAL M is a format found primarily in Brazil 6 PAL NC 1s a format found primarily in Argentina and Chile and some other Latin American countries 7 PAL 60 Only those standards that have similar horizontal and vertical frequencies to the current Input source are enabled SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE Set the video standard on Slot Input y to the specified value in the range of known video standards MAIN Set the video standard on the main video to the specified value in the range of known video standards PIIP Set the video standard on the main video to the specified value in the range of known video standards EXAMPLES STD 0 Set video standard to 0 PAL on main video STD MAIN 1 Set video standard to 1 NTSC_M on main video STD PIP 0 Set video standard to 0 PAL on main video STD IN32 3 Set video standard to 3 NTSC 4 43 on Slot 3 Input 2 STD Returns the current video standard on main video STD PIIP Returns the current video standard value on main video STD IN12 Returns the current video standard value on Slot 1 Input 2 SZP SIZE PRESETS CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS
277. ow Options Secondary Size amp Position Secondary Image Settings Fade Time Frame Locking Auto Input Searching HDMI Output Loop Source Standby Active Loop Through o 0 00 1 50 Frame Lock z E Main Secondary Loop m 0 20 Figure 3 29 Input Switching amp PIP Menu Set the location of the PIP secondary image in the display PIP Window Size Secondary PIP Image Adjust through PIP menu Figure 3 30 Picture In Picture Controls both the image width and height maintaining the current aspect ratio of the displayed signal data PIP H Position Moves the image right or left within the area of available pixels NOTE The value shown represents where the approximate center of the image lies in relation to the total number of pixels available horizontally This varies widely according to the signal watch the image while adjusting PIP V Position Moves the image up or down within the area of available pixels NOTE The value shown represents where the approximate center of the image lies in relation to the total number of pixels available vertically This varies widely according to the signal watch the image while adjusting Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation PIP Border Width Enables the optional border around the PIP image When enabled a one pixel wide border will surround the PIP image When disab
278. pixels in the surrounding borders are turned off Specify the active input window size by adjusting one or more Blank settings Figure 3 8 For example if you have blanked cropped 100 pixels from both the left and right edges of an incoming source of 1400 x 1050 the remaining active input window will be reduced to 1200 x 1050 Blanking Top Bottom Left and Right ___ Example incoming image Crop the image so that unwanted edges are removed from the display changed to black Blanking defines the size of the Active Input window or area of interest Range of adjustment depends on the source E image E Blankin EE pixels resolution and other factors NOTE Blanking a PIP image resembles zoom For example left Blanking zooms the right side of the PIP image Right Blanking zooms the left side There are no black bars Blanking Blanking 2 Bottom Blank 3 Left Blank 2 Bottom Blank 3 Left Blank 4 Right Blank No PIP blanking Figure 3 10 Blanking of a PIP Image 3 4 3 Image Settings Menu Use the Image Settings menu to alter your main image without affecting its size or position Changes made are applied immediately and are saved when you exit the menu press EXIT or MENU Options not available for the projector model or source are disabled and appear dim gray Image color is managed by ArrayLOC see ArrayLOC Menu on page 3 48 and Managing Colors with ArrayLOC on page 3 57
279. projector to assure complete safety at all times 5 3 1 WARNINGS AND SAFETY GUIDELINES NNT Do not look directly into the projector lens The high brightness of this projector could cause permanent eye damage For protection keep all projector shielding intact during operation The projector is a class 2M source of visible and invisible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard Always power down the projector and disconnect before servicing Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 5 1 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 5 Maintenance CH 1S TIE i 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 5 5 2 LABELS AND MARKINGS Observe and follow all warnings and instructions marked on the projector The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle tells the user of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the projector The lightning flash and arrowhead symbol within the equilateral triangle A tells the user of dangerous voltage not insulated within the projector s enclosure that is of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock INSTRUCTIONS Read all operating instructions prior to using the projector PROJECTOR LOCATION Operate the projector in an environment that meets the operating range specified in Section 7 Spec
280. ptics In rear screen applications where space behind the projector is limited a mirror may be used to fold the optical path The position of the projector and mirror must be accurately set if considering this type of installation contact Christie Customer Support for assistance Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 2 15 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 2 Installation and Setup 2 8 3 Boresight Alignment Advanced 2 16 l Display the Boresight Test Pattern by pressing the Test key on the remote keypad then use the Left arrow key to cycle to Boresight Focus the image on the cross hair pattern at the image center Evaluate the focus on cross hair image I and II If all three images are in focus no further action is required If boresight is required see step 3 If boresight is required see Figure 2 6 to understand how the adjustment screws on the lens mount affect the corresponding cross hairs on the test pattern CHRISTIE Figure 2 5 Boresight Pattern Use a 5mm Allen key to loosen the 3 locking setscrews on the lens mount see Figure 2 7 NOTE The setscrews must be backed out several turns so that they do not contact the inner lens mount plate Figure 2 6 Cross Hair Pattern Capscrew etscrew Figure 2 7 Screw Locations Fine tune the focus of cross hair pattern I by adjusting the appropriate capscrew see Figure 2 7 Adjust until the cross hair image is in focus with min
281. put red gain settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLE ROG SL10 10 Set a red gain offset to 10 on Slot 1 ROO RED ODD PIXEL OFFSET CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adds an offset to Input red black level settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLE ROO SL10 10 Set a red gain offset to 10 on Slot 1 ROR RGB QUANTIZATION RANGE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Select RGB quantization range 0 full 0 255 1 limited 16 235 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the RGB quantization range for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the RGB quantization range for main video PIIP Set the RGB quantization range for main video Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 57 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE ROR RGB QUANTIZATION RANGE Cont d EXAMPLE RQR 1 Set RGB quantiza
282. r Manual 3 69 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation 3 70 The following section describes each option found in and stemming from the Secondary Input amp Switching menu Main Input From the list of active Inputs select one to be used as the Primary or Main image Secondary Input From the list of active inputs select one to be used as the secondary or PIP Swap Main amp Secondary inputs Toggle the current secondary input s relationship so that the primary Main input becomes the secondary and the secondary input becomes the primary Swapping is available only when PIP or PBP is enabled NOTE There may be a slight delay when swapping the Primary and Secondary images PIP Enable Short cut Press PIP on the IR remote if the Secondary Input amp Switching menu is not present Toggle between displaying 2 input sources at once main and secondary images or the primary or main input source only PIP Window Options Set the location of the PIP secondary image in the display You can adjust the following PIP Position Presets _h 2 ni 4 3 6 T 8 9 Primary Image Adjust through Main menu navigation CHRISTIE Main Menu Main Input secondary Input Secondary Input amp Switching Analog BNC Input Card Slot 3 Input 1 8 Analog BNC Input Card Slot 3 Input 1 Swap Main amp Secondary inputs PIP Enable Picture In Picture z PIP Wind
283. r presses the power key APW 1 Projector will auto power up when A C power is switched on Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference ARO ASPECT RATIO OVERLAY CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enables or disables Aspect Ratio layer over Image layer SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES ARO 1 Turns ON Aspect Ratio Overlay ARO 0 Turns OFF Aspect Ratio Overlay ASH AUTO SHUTDOWN CONTROL GROUP Saved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION When Auto Shutdown Mode has been selected and no projector activity has been seen for the activation time out period the projector will enter a Power Saving mode in which the lamps will dim and the shutter close If this condition persists for an additional time out period the projector will automatically go to standby The presence of any activity within this is combined interval will cancel Auto Shutdown and return the projector to normal operation SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable or disable Auto Shutdown Operation SBTO Set the uninterrupted time out period that must elapse before projector will enter Standby Mode The second time out period or Standby time out ALTO Set the uninterrupted time out period that must elapse time of activity loss until Auto Shutdown is activated The first time out
284. racking to 600 on main video PXT PIIP 600 Set pixel tracking to 600 on main video PXT IN32 600 Set pixel tracking to 600 on Slot 3 Input 2 PXT Returns the pixel tracking value on main video PXT PIIP Returns the pixel tracking value on main video PXT IN12 Returns the pixel tracking value on Slot 1 Input 2 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 53 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE RAL REMOTE ACCESS LEVEL CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Admin DESCRIPTION Set the remote serial protocol access level for a serial communications port NOTE Valid selections are 0 No Access 1 Login Required 2 Free Access Default value is 1 Login required SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the access level on Ethernet all ports PRTA Set the access level on port A RS 232 In PRTB Set the access level on port B RS 232 Out PRTC Set the access level on port C RS 422 EXAMPLES RAL 0 Disable remote serial protocol access level for all Ethernet ports RAL Get access level for Ethernet ports RAL 0 RAL PRTA 2 Set remote serial protocol access level on port A RS 232 In to free access RAL PRTA Get access level RAL PRTA 2 RBL RIGHT BLANKING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the number of lines to blank turn to black at the right of th
285. red Adjust pixel tracking phase and filter Noise is very common on YPbPr signals from a DVD player 2 Make Sure the video input is terminated 75 ohms If it is the last connection in a loop through chain the video input must be terminated at the last source input only 3 The input signal and or signal cables carrying the input signal may be of poor quality 6 6 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 6 Troubleshooting 4 Ifthe distance between the input source device and the projector is greater than 25 feet signal amplification conditioning may be required 5 Ifthe source is a VCR or off air broadcast detail may be set too high 6 6 ArrayLOC 6 6 1 Cannot Find Color Adjustment Controls Use the color adjustment options under the ArrayLOC menu access Main menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC Color Adjustments by X Y and Color Saturation options are not available for general use They are part of the passcode protected Service menu 6 6 2 Color Image Settings Are Greyed Out To enable ArrayLOC access Main menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Bright ColorLOC Mode and set to Fixed Cool or Bright If ArrayLOC is enabled e ArrayLOC handles brightness and color settings and overrides other color settings for example Advanced Image Settings gt Color Settings e Main menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target color settings are available for the master proj
286. rence SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Upload a User Splash Screen logo bitmap and configure splash screen display options SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt View Set option indicating when a logo is displayed Valid values are 0 Always OFF 1 Display on Startup only 2 Display on Startup and when there is no Signal View Set which logo to display Valid values are 0 Default Splash Screen 1 User Splash Screen D 62 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference SPS SPLASH SCREEN Cont d EXAMPLES SPS Get the display option If 0 logo is always OFF 1 logo is displayed at start up etc SPS 2 Set the display option Logo will be displayed when there is no signal SPS SLCT 0 Use Christie logo SPT SPLIT SCREEN CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Status DESCRIPTION Split screen enable control Allows a snap shot of the main image to be presented on the right side of the screen to allow evaluation of advanced image processing features All resizing controls are honoured on both images However image processing controls only happen on the left side image Changing Inputs channels or test patterns will disable this control Operation must be disabled prior to enabling this control Valid options are 0 OFF 1 Side 2 Top SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE
287. rences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a green gain offset for the second A to D EXAMPLE GOG SL10 10 Set a green gain offset to 10 on Slot 1 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 31 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE GOO GREEN ODD PIXEL OFFSET DESCRIPTION Adds an offset to Input green black level settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLE HDC DHDC DUAL LINK CONFIGURATION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Select whether to use the 2 Inputs as separate Inputs or combined as a dual link Select Automatic to let the card decide based on the Input signal If the card cannot determine this it will assume 2 single links Valid values are 0 Automatic 1 2 Single Links 2 Dual Link SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EXAMPLES HDC SL10 0 Use Automatic detection for DHDIC on Slot 1 HDC SL40 1 Use 2 Single Links for DHDIC on Slot 4 HDC SL10 2 Use Dual link for DHDIC on Slot 1
288. results use the same projector model and type throughout your display wall Figure 3 22 Edge Blending Concept In addition avoid high gain screens whenever possible the optical performance of such screens demands minimal image offset so projectors must be located very close to one another Proj 2 1 Proj 2 2 Proj 2 1 Proj 2 2 Edge blending software controls are located in the Edge Blending submenu which can be accessed using Configuration gt Geometry amp Color gt Edge Blending The Advanced Edge Blending option opens to the second page of the Edge Blending submenu Edge Blending Menu Canaan amp Color Use edge blending controls to set the precise Edge Blending width shape and midpoint you need to blend San overlapping edges together smoothly Test Pattern NOTE For information about advanced blending of complex configurations for example with spherical screens see the TWIST User Manual 020 1 001 43 xx Top Blend Width Bottom Blend Width Left Blend Width Right Blend Width Blend Width Determines how much area is used for blending along an overlapping edge Slide bar values Silla Doel represent the number of pixels used for the Advanced Edge Blending blend For example _ Full Screen Eye Motion Filter e A setting of 8 creates a blended edge 8 __Eye Motion Filter pixels wide _ Reset Edge Blending Settings e A setting of 0 signifies no blending For best results in most application
289. rial Representation Add a DMX Channel Event RTE Wizard 1 Click Add to open the RTE Wizard 2 Select the DMX Channel Event tab DMX 56 3 Select a DMX channel DMX 56 to DMX 61 m from the drop down list See Section 3 Operation for detailed information Command String GPIO Output Helper Help Serial Representation B 3 7 Add a Serial Command 1 Enter a serial command in the Serial Command field NOTE For serial commands see Appendix D Serial Command Reference 2 Click Send to add the serial command B 3 8 About Tabbed Page Provides information about the projector s software version model serial number and license information NOTE The information provided on the Version and License tabs are read only B 12 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Appendix C Serial Communication This document describes the serial communication protocol consisting of ASCII text messages used to control a Matrix StIM projector remotely C 1 Connection and Use Once you have connected your computer to either the RS 232 IN or RS 422 IN port depending on which standard is supported by your computer or to the ETHERNET port on a projector you can remotely access projector controls and image setups issue commands or queries and receive replies Use these bi directional messages to e Control multiple projectors e Obtain a projector s status report e Diagnose performance problems
290. ription of each signal type e A Channel Setup Icon legend is provided as a reference NOTE Use the UP arrow key and DOWN arrow key to see the remaining channels not visible in the initial display of the Channel list E nea Channel Setup 1 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz Appears in Chan list 2 41 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz 3 ne P p5W 63 98kHz p60 02Hz Locked T Slot Input Signal Horizontal Vertical Type Frequency Frequency Channel Setup Icons i Interlaced Auto source p Progressive An unlocked auto source that appears in the channel list A locked auto source that appears in the channel list Signal Type The Channel list or the Channel Setup menu identifies the signal type for each channel The abbreviations are defined in Table 3 2 These abbreviations are preceded by either an i interlaced signals or p progressive signal Table 3 2 Abbreviations for Signal Type Abbrev Signal Type NOS awit Composite wie on HCnput sc Syneon green wie sw SeparateHVGwie OOOO 5WR oo Separate H V swapped 5 wire Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 13 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE i Table 3 2 Abbreviations for Signal Type Abbrev Signal Type DSDI Digital Dual Link HD SDI DVI Digital DVI The first 5 items in Table 3 2 are analog RGB with various sync combinations indicating Sync Source when editing the channel Copy a Chann
291. rojector believes it is displaying Main Menu Configuration mone Service Configuration Array CLOC Configuration Communications Se orion ol ye Com x 211 i t Sew RS 252 IN Optens icasi tere i gt Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting Trees This is an advanced procedure intended only for users who desire to control or monitor their array brightness in specific units for example lumens ft L etc Users who want the ArrayLOC Setting the projectors to operate as bright as possible do not need to use this procedure RGB Brightness Target Unit This procedure requires an external light meter Step 1 Take Control of the Array Main Menu Configuration i ArrayLOc Go to the Main gt Configuration 4 gt ArrayLOC 13 menu reserved vat Select a projector you wish to adjust first T2 Synchronize to This Projector _ l ae i 3 Bright ColorLOC Configuration Set this projector to Synchronize to This Me 4 Array Color Target Projector by checking the box This is the starting point for controlling ArrayLOC 15 Projector Color Adjustment oon sf Select the Array Color Target 4 9 _ArrayLOC Configuration j submenu and proceed to step 2 emee 12 Reserved 13 ArrayLOC Step 2 Setting the RGB Brightness Target Main Menu Configuration Set the RGB Brightness Target to a value ArrayLOC approxima
292. rol 1s increasing and likewise a linear transform toward a gamma of 3 0 as the control is decreasing The control should only be adjusted to compensate for ambient conditions To correct a particular source only use the Gamma control Gamma gt gt Select the base gamma table for a given source Select from one 5 z of the standard tables a custom gamma function or select an ee arbitrary gamma table that has been downloaded to the projector ACELE Q A O NOTE 4 separate PC utility is needed to do this a i a The 2 22 curve 1s a power curve typically used to encode graphics Signal Input Level Signal Input Level and video sources see Figure 3 14 The standard curve auto setup default is a modified 2 22 curve with a small linear section in the black that enhances the detail in darker areas of the projected content Typically standard or 2 22 is used for all sources Alternatively if neither default is ideal apply a simple gamma curve by defining a custom power function and slope Select Gamma Function to enable the function and slope controls For more complex non standard gamma curves a user defined curve created externally and downloaded to the projector can be used requires separate PC based Arbitrary Gamma software application to create the table and the Web UI to download it Figure 3 14 Gamma Curve NOTE f any of thes
293. rol to remove high frequency noise from the signal H Position Move the image right or left within the area of available pixels NOTE The value shown represents where the approximate center of the image lies in relation to the total number of pixels available horizontally This varies widely according to the signal therefore watch the image while adjusting V Position Move the image up or down within the area of available pixels NOTE The value shown represents where the approximate center of the image lies in relation to the total number of pixels available vertically This varies widely according to the signal watch the image while adjusting Keep Aspect on Auto Setup Ensures that auto setup for any source will maintain the input aspect ratio when the default size is calculated If disabled and the source is not a special case video source where a default stretch is defined the source is scaled to fit the platform Blanking Size amp Position Active Input Window Blanking This read only value indicates the current size of your Active Input Window 720x576 displayed data or region of interest as defined by the _ Top Blank 0 blanking controls By default the projector l i Bottom Blank automatically determines what portion of its full Left Blank Right Blank Figure 3 8 Full Width Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 19 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CHRISTIE resolution to use and
294. round color changes to the target color being adjusted for example Target Red x invokes a red background All other menu options change the system color to white as long as Test Pattern Enable is checked 4 Navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt Communication Note the IDs of the projectors you want to fine tune 5 To adjust white color and brightness settings repeat for each projector that needs adjustment a Press PROJ lt PROJECTOR ID gt on the remote The remote directs commands to the specified projector only b Use the White Brightness Adjustment to roughly match the white brightness of the array A higher value makes the projector image brighter c Adjust the Red Part of White Green Part of White and Blue Part of White to match the white color to other projectors in the array d Readjust the White Brightness Adjustment control if matching white colors revealed mismatched white brightness 6 Navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt Communication Note the IDs of the projectors you want to fine tune 7 To adjust color primary settings repeat for each projector that needs adjusting a Press PROJ lt PROJECTOR ID gt on the remote The remote directs commands to the specified projector b Adjust the XXX Part of YYY controls where and YYY is the color being adjusted and XXX and YYY are not the same color ie non dominant colors Negative values for the non dominant colors are permitted Adjusting XXX
295. rror code Table 6 1 LED Operational Status Codes LED Status 2 Character Display Description li ll Solid yellow Fg Failsafe mode EM in fail safe mode refer to the Visual Environments Projector Software Upgrade instruction sheet 020 100443 xx A moving up and down Brief cool down period BO Booting when power first applied When powering ON booting the projector the LED B1 Boot phase 1 starting main script will go through phases Solid green B2 Boot phase 2 starting projector code Powered ON B3 Boot phase 3 about to initialize connections Normal operations EM ON e SH Shutter Mode active EM Keypad command sent Command received Flashing green System error see 6 2 2 Error Codes Solid Red e Key press error Flashing red e Wrong protocol sent eee oe 6 2 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 6 Troubleshooting 6 2 2 Error Codes If the status display window shows one of the codes in the Error Codes table you may need a Christie accredited service technician to repair the component identified by the error code Error codes are displayed in a three phase format e First 2 digits represent the component or error category e Second 2 digits represent the specific problem e Display off This cycle repeats The LED will be red while the error code 1s displayed Acknowledge and clear the error by pressing EXIT twice when at the presentation level
296. rt line whereas Default uses the table values as is SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Perform a standard Auto Setup on the main video PIIP Perform a standard Auto Setup on the picture in picture video EXAMPLES ASU Perform standard Auto Setup on main video ASU MAIN Perform standard Auto Setup on main video ASU PIIP Perform standard Auto Setup on main video D 8 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference BBL BOTTOM BLANKING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the number of lines to blank turn to black at the bottom of the image This can be used to blank out any unwanted data near the bottom edge of the image A positive amount of blanking makes the image smaller A negative amount of blanking makes the image larger Negative blanking is only applicable to analog signals when the Auto Setup has not been able to set the image size correctly It is preferable not to use negative blanking but to run Auto Setup again ensuring that the content has active pixels on each edge of the image The maximum amount of bottom blanking allowed is half the image height minus 10 For negative blanking the image size can only be increased to the limit of the sync SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the bottom blanking for Slot X Input Y MAIN Set the bottom blanking for the main image PIIP Set the bot
297. s on page 2 7 Status Display The two digit status display window displays the current status of the projector If there is an error during operation an error code number will display During normal operation ON will appear in the window Status LED Located next to the two digit status display is a single LED that illuminates one of three colors to convey the current status of the system A solid red LED shows a system error and the corresponding error code will display in the status display See 6 2 System Warnings Errors on page 6 1 for a description of LED variations Press Exit twice on the keypad to acknowledge and clear the error 1 4 3 IR Sensor The projector has a front IR sensor that is optimally placed to receive transmissions from the IR remote from up to 100 feet away regardless of the projector configuration For uninterrupted communications with the projector it is important to keep the transmission path to this sensor unobstructed at all times and to point the IR remote directly at the projector or center of the screen in rear screen applications 1 4 4 Image Processing A Dual Image Processing Card DIPC provides an interleaved InfraRGB mode allowing simultaneous display of 2 image sources 1 channel RGB and the other channel IR A 120Hz frame rate capability supports two 60Hz image sources IRGB source and IIR source or 2 RGB sources Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 1 3 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 1
298. s use a blend width of 12 25 for example with a screen size of 1920 x 1200 230 480 pixels NOTE Ranges 0 960 horizontal 0 600 vertical Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 41 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE l Show Blending Overlap Turns your defined blend width area to solid gray so that if needed simply overlapping the gray bars can seamlessly align 2 adjacent images Clear the Show Blending Overlap check box to reactivate the blend effect Other Functions For convenience the Edge Blending submenu also includes related options for enabling a test pattern Such functions duplicate those provided elsewhere in the menu system Advanced Edge Blending Controls SPARE Use advanced edge blending controls to Advanced Edge Blending more finely control the blend curve Enable Advanced Curve ad _ Blend Shape Left Blend Shape Determines the rate of roll off across the blend width 1 e how quickly the white levels across the blend change from light and dark Increasing the Blend Shape setting accelerates the rate of change at both extremes so that less of the region appears mid gray Decreasing the Blend Shape setting slows the rate of change so that more of the region appears mid gray For most applications this subtle control is best left close to 50 Left Blend Midpoint Right Blend Shape Right Blend Midpoint Top Blend Shape Top Blend Midpoint Bottom Blend Shape 2 a 4
299. s Menu on page 3 26 Fade Time Controls the amount of time in seconds it takes to fade between images on a source switch It also fades in the PIP and OSD 1f possible Frame Locking Enable or disable Frame Lock When set to Frame Lock output image frames are locked to the input if possible When Locked the output is always locked to the primary input never the PIP image Free Run sets the output to close to 60Hz for all sources Auto Input Searching When enabled the system will continually search for the next valid signal when no signal is present or when loss of sync occurs on the current user selected input In the case of multiple signals to choose from the order is based on slot followed by inputs on that slot Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 71 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CHix IS TIE i HDMI Output Loop Source This control is used to configure the HDMI output options Selecting Direct Loop will directly pass through the HDMI Input signals on the same Twin HDMI Input Card the Input signal is looped to Output1 and the Input2 signal is looped to Output2 Selecting Main Secondary Loop will loop the Main amp PIP video to the outputs regardless from which card these signals originate The Main video signal is looped to Output1 and the PIP video signal is looped to Output2 Selecting Disable will shut OFF the HDMI outputs completely Standby Active Loop Through Select the check box to allow an incoming
300. se 6 1 Troubleshooting Guidelines Read understand and observe all warnings and precautions when diagnosing and servicing the projector Ensure that the projector is plugged in Ensure that cables are connected and not damaged Power OFF the projector wait 90 seconds to allow for cooling and Power ON the projector Check for a normal power up sequence Check the projector status for error conditions and correct any issues if possible See 6 2 System Warnings Errors Check source reliability Switch sources if possible Use RS 232 serial communications to communicate with the projector during diagnosis 6 2 System Warnings Errors When the projector finds a system malfunction it displays a System Warning or a System Error message Status and error information is available through LEDs on the input panel of the projector See 6 2 1 LED Status Display On the Projector Status page in the menu system access Main menu gt Status Status page on the web UI access Main tab gt Status page and click on any category with a yellow or red indicator For more information see Appendix B Web User Interface On screen error messages access Main gt Configuration gt Menu Preferences gt Display Error Messages All NOTE Display Error Messages must be set to Screen or All for System messages to appear on screen The status pages in the OSD menu system and the web UI update automatically when the error condit
301. se uug 74617 pioys 1y 10 99 9q 2497 JO N9 98q 19497 Nd no Jojo9 8q yee Nd no Y Z soisoubeig pasueapy ssauppy 2eW weu uewoq we u SOH Aemayes ysel ouqnNsS SSOJPPV dl sbulyes jyousey 3 9 G Y HOd d L 2 jqeu4 JOjOD eb jqeu4 JOjOD oyny Z A SHUM OL X SUM A ng x ng A Uu J9 X USBI A Pee xX Pey a0eds 10 09 ple JInzeJ dw JOJOD yu wu snfpy JOJOD 99 9S A X Aq syu wzsnfpy 10109 mMm vt O or 0 Oo N p jes13 U JUSLUYSNIPY Y je713 u seopeog e dnoid 10100 4469 Z spo DO VO OO UBUg uoneinbyu0g DO TO GARY jqeu4 JojoD ony 4 woJ4 Buiyas Adoy z4 JO OD eng JO OD usa JO OD peYy ss u yfug GOu LL onig Jo Wed U39819 WIOL ng JO Wed psy NWT onig jo Wed anig NWI Uds9JID Jo Weg anig NWI Uda JO Ped poy NI u 19 JO ed UdBdIH WI poy jo Wed aniq NWT pey JO WEY UsaIH WI pay jo Wed psy NI po JOJO TNO TO OR OO juawysn py 10109 paoueApy a ul pebbnyid spyeo yoyew zey sodA YM pail aq IM NU W peg yndu ONg Boyeuy pie ndul WGH UML ped yndu GS GH lend pied yndu Jeapoosq O0 PIA sbul jas pied uodo Y A gt an ysn pY 3q01 S p97 VL sonsoubeiq peoueapy EL dn s ojny unng ewj z J4 71 dems 1410 09 wayed Se
302. seeeeeeeeeeeees 2 5 IV Olan TAG PLO COL an E E EE nee ove es nase cuns E TE E 2 6 2o G0 i 6 HDS 0 Ue 6 oc eRe ee NY eee wee ONT Ee eOSTNNNE TNT Hae NNT wee ONT ESE en EAN 2 7 LEDS ee A E AS A A E E 2 7 DPD ANYO e a E E E E EA E EE A 2 7 Dual Link Digital Video Input DVI Input Card ccc ccccccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 TVn IN a cece EA nse ce eons EET A E E EEES 2 8 Analog BNC Input Card ccccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEES 2 8 Diar D HD S DLHO CA e E E E EEEE E E 2 9 VO Decode ETP a E er ere eee kee nen ere 2 9 LATON 0 ON MNS CCN IA aceasta segues esti E linn oats aa cee nilegte etauncticanseas 2 9 DANG Omi CES TS proto to AL nsee E E EA 2 10 242 T rnine the Projector ON csssewaescdaasaesoawssagscsoneneaenaaosyndssaenganacsdaasoeamedonceoaceeennanenszausaousensaneas 2 10 24 5 Disconnecting the projector from AC ssassn isr resse sred need n rar E ea E aa 2 10 29 Communicating With the Proj CClOF caserne ea a a a iaai i 2 10 2 6 Projector Network Setup for External Communication cccccccsssessssssessssssseesseeseeeeeeens 2 11 20nd Tote me is C COMM nde eeann 2 11 ZZ IG NG OW OK aE E E E E EE E A 2 12 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Table of Contents CHAISTIE Des I NEW OT rarest cos sect E E cn suneunee snes 2 13 2 6 4 Mixed Serial Network RS 232 and RS 422 ooo ccccccccceeesssssesessssnneeeeeeeee
303. sensor not fonctionne 1 ENBlue thermistor overemp or snsornotTineoning 1a EMIR termistor overemp or sensor vot fonctionne o e e oe a oo C EM PHM Firmware mismatch upgrade required Image processor card is missing or not seated correctly 6 3 Power 6 3 1 Projector Does Not Power ON 1 Ensure that the projector is plugged in 2 Ensure that cables are connected and not damaged 6 4 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 6 Troubleshooting 6 4 Light Module 6 4 1 Light Module Suddenly Goes OFF 1 Check the shutter setting if status display shows SH then the shutter may be active Toggle through shutter modes In gray shutter mode it should be possible to display menus 2 Verify that the RGB Brightness is set sufficiently higher than 0 to ensure a visible image 3 The DMD may be overheated Check for an alarm condition 6 5 Displays 6 5 1 The Projector is ON but There is No Display 1 Make sure the lens cover is removed from the lens 2 Make sure the correct display button is selected in the channel setups 3 Make sure AC power is connected 4 Is an active source connected properly Check the cable connections and make sure that the alternative source is selected Make sure that the DVI cable from the PHM to the EM is connected N Are the test patterns accessible If so check source connections again 6 5 2 The Display is Jittery or Unstable 1 Ifth
304. sical injuries and possibly death Always disconnect the projector and wait two minutes to allow the power supply capacitors to electrically discharge before removing the projector covers Power should always be disconnected from the illumination module before servicing to avoid the possibility of inadvertent exposure to visible and invisible LED radiation Directly viewing the illumination module optical output through certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard The Light Module is a non serviceable part of the projector and must be replaced Contact customer support to arrange a replacement 5 5 Lens Replacement The projector is a class 2M source of visible and invisible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard Lenses are easily replaced on the Matrix StIM See 2 2 2 Installing the Lens on page 2 3 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 5 3 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE 6 Troubleshooting If the projector is not operating properly record the symptoms and use this section as a guide If a solution to the problem cannot be found contact your dealer for assistance NOTE A Christie accredited service technician is required when opening an enclosure to diagnose any probable cau
305. sing channels 12 installation considerations folded optics 15 image setup 15 18 minimum clearance 2 mounting 2 screen size and type 2 ventilation 1 Interconnections 1 IP address 36 IR 36 J joined network routing 35 K keep aspect on auto setup 19 71 keypad see remote control keystone correction see geometry correction keystone distortions adjusting 38 L language 72 language projector menus 30 large menu font 33 laser pointer 6 LED lookup table 2 See also error code lookup table LED status indicators input cards 7 LED strobe adjust 48 lens adjusting focus 15 specifications 3 7 lens cleaning 19 level detector threshold 47 light engine test pattern 47 light module replacing 3 logo file uploading web UI 7 M MAC address 36 main input 70 main input infraRGB 61 Main menu 7 maintenance maintenance cleaning 3 managing colors with arrayLOC 57 60 master projector 57 master projector see synchronize to this pro jector CHRISTIE menu key 5 menu location 33 Menu Preferences Menu 33 Menu Tree 1 6 menu type 34 menus see OSD menus minimum array frame delay 57 minimum brightness 49 minimum gamut 50 mosquito noise reduction 28 mounting projectors 2 mounting specifications 5 N network example 55 56 network routing 35 Noise Reduction Settings menu 28 number keys 5 O on screen display see OSD optical alignment 15 optics 15 option card settings 48 orientation 31
306. sired channel number and press ENTER The display automatically changes and updates according to the setup parameters defined for that channel For more information see 3 3 Using Inputs and Channels on page 3 10 NOTES 1 4 new channel is automatically created when you adjust an image from a new source 2 Channel key behavior during a presentation depends on whether the Display Channel List option is enabled in Menu Preferences You can use a scrollable list of channels when you press Channel or you can enter the channel number without on screen feedback For more information see Menu Preferences on page 3 33 Slot 1 2 3 and 4 Press a SLOT key to select the input card in that slot Press the SLOT key again to display the next active INPUT on the card Press a different SLOT key to select a different input card For more information see Using Inputs and Channels on page 3 10 Input Displays all inputs in all slots both active and inactive Press INPUT once and scroll through the list to select an input for the main image Press INPUT again and select the secondary image For more information see Using Inputs and Channels on page 3 10 PIP Switches the secondary image Picture In Picture or Picture By Picture ON or OFF Swap Swaps between the main and secondary images Contrast Changes the level of peak white in your images Use the LEFT RIGHT arrow key until you reach the desired level of contrast For best results start lo
307. sition of the image SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the vertical position for the main image EXAMPLE VRT 500 Set vertical position to 500 on main video VRT Returns the vertical position value on main video Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 71 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE VST VERTICAL STRETCH CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Use Vertical Stretch to adjust the height of the image while keeping the width constant This controls how much the image is electronically stretched vertically As it does not affect the horizontal width it changes the aspect ratio of the image 1000 is the neutral position where no stretching is done Vertical Scale VST Value 1000 SIZ Value 1000 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the vertical stretch for the main image EXAMPLES VST 500 Set vertical stretch to 500 on main video VST Returns the vertical stretch value on main video WRP WARP KEYSTONE CONTROL GROUP Configuration Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This serial command will control the writing and reading of 2D keystone maps warp maps edge blend map uniformity maps and associated parameters NOTE The commands below are used from the OSD only and are not highly applicable for use from Serial Commands If they are set they
308. sive factory and dealer service network is always available to quickly diagnose and correct projector malfunctions Complete service manuals and updates are available for all projectors If a problem is encountered with any part of the projector contact your dealer Usually servicing is performed on site If you have purchased the projector fill out the information below and keep with your records Table 1 1 Purchase Record Dealer Dealer or Christie Sales Service Contact Phone Number Projector Serial Number Purchase Date Installation Date The serial number can be found on the license label located on the back of the projector Table 1 2 Ethernet Settings Default Gateway Projector IP Address Projector Overview The Matrix SUM and Matrix SIM are professional quality WUXGA data projectors 7 featuring the latest in DLP display technology to achieve Light Module s gt high brightness high resolution video projection images These projectors use Christie s exclusive KORE electronics and firmware to accept data graphics and video input signals for projection onto front or rear lt IR Remote Sensor projection screens The modular i design of the Matrix StIM SIM projectors makes them an ideal choice for the demanding needs of simulation applications as well as 24 7 command and control centers telecommunications surveillance and broadcasting applications A Projection head Module Lense
309. so be selected in the projector s menu see Section 3 Operation The remaining LEDs are each associated with one of the inputs and indicate a valid signal has been detected on that input Video Decoder Input 108 310101 01 4 Pr R Sy 5 Y G 6 Pb B Sc CVBS CVBS CVBS 2 4 Power Connection Do not operate if the AC supply and cord are not within the specified voltage and power range The North American rated line cord is supplied with this projector For all other regions use only a regionally approved line cord power plug and socket Do not use a damaged line cord The projector is a class 2M source of visible and invisible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 2 9 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 2 Installation and Setup CH IS TIE l 2 4 1 Connecting the projector to AC The input voltage to the projector must be capable of 100 240 VAC Use only a correctly rated line cord NOTE Do not use a line cord or AC supply not in the specified voltage and power range See Section 7 Specifications for projector power requirements 1 Connect an approved line cord to the projector AC receptacle located on the Light Module NOTE Use only the line cord supplied with the projector or a power cord of correct ratings that comply with regional standards
310. ss and are thus seen by all projectors or by directing messages to specific projector addresses To work with a specific projector in a group the projectors must first be assigned a unique I D either a projector number or an Ethernet IP address Insert the number of the target projector between the starting C and the 3 character ASCII code Table C 5 Message for Specific Projector Addr Code Data Each projector compares the message address with its own address and if matching responds and processes the message If the address does not match the message is passed on until it reaches the intended projector Although messages without an address are always broadcast you can also broadcast by including the reply destination address 65535 This ensures that replies go to a specific controller address rather than being broadcast The projector will also include its address Table C 6 Message for Projector from a Specific Controller Dest Sre Code Data If you have more than one controller on a network ensure to include both a source address and a destination address With a single controller on the network its address is never required Place the source address between the destination address and 3 character code including a space before and after as shown NOTE Replies from a projector do not contain an address unless the request message includes both a destination address and a source address i e a reply to a request havin
311. stance measured from your projector to the screen This calculation determines 1f there is enough room to install your projector with a desired screen size and if the image will be of the right size for your screen To estimate the throw distance take the horizontal width of the screen and multiply it by the lens throw ratio The result determines approximately the distance the projector should be positioned from the screen to project a focused image large enough to fill the screen For example using a 1 2 1 1 6 1 zoom lens set at its widest 1 2 1 throw ratio throw distance would roughly be 1 2 x screen width IMPORTANT Use the lens and screen size to calculate the precise throw distance Due to lens manufacturing tolerances for lens focal length actual throw distance can vary 2 between lenses with the same nominal throw ratio Table 2 1 Lens Types Offsets and Throw Distances a Lens Offset Percentage Offset Pixels Specified Throw Distance a Distance Range ia S AR C ae of me te fat rar rsa isa 138 1656 59 23 18 sa 075 5076 0536 134 1608 pe NOTES 1 Offsets are subject to 7 centering tolerance 2 Image size outside the specified width range may result in reduced image quality 3 Throw distance is measured from the marked exit pupil position on the lens to the screen Throw ratio is defined as Throw Ratio throw distance 2 screen width 4 100 offset is defined as having all pixels shifted be
312. such as smearing and double image perception in high speed simulation environments Enable AccuFrame Check this option to enable AccuFrame AccuFrame Strength CHRISTIE Advanced Image Settings AccuFrame Enable AccuFrame gf 50 Controls the effect of AccuFrame Higher values reduce artifacts but also reduce image brightness 3 4 4 Main Menu gt Channel Setup Allows you to select a predefined channel see Channel Setup Menu on page 3 13 3 4 5 Main Menu gt Configuration Use the Configuration menu to define general operating parameters and communications with other projectors and equipment and to access other advanced processing and image adjustments affecting overall performance The Configuration menu provides access to diagnostics calibration tools and the Service submenu password protected The first 6 options in the Configuration menu are explained in the following section Language Choose the available language to use in the projector menus The change will take effect immediately 3 30 Main Menu Configuration Language Jere Output Options Power Management Date amp Time Menu Preferences Communications Geometry amp Color Diagnostics amp Calibration Service Option Card Settings ArrayLOC InffaRGB Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Output Options Screen Image Orientation Configuration
313. t 0 3 at 0 offset Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 7 3 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 7 Specifications 7 4 Power Requirements AXGENERAL MATRIX STIM Voltage Range 90 240VAC nominal Line Frequency 50 60Hz nominal Typical Current Consumption 4A 100V normal brightness one input Maximum Current Consumption 5 9A 100V maximum brightness multiple inputs and external accessories CHRISTIE NOTE Use of Manual RGB Adjustment to change projector brightness may increase power consumption beyond typical power consumption 2 Maximum power consumption includes provision for additional input cards and external accessories at maximum brightness 7 5 Light Module 3XPT120 LED MODULES MTBF 50 000 hours 7 6 Physical Specifications Maximum Product Dimensions L x W x H Projector Head Module Assembly with LM 219 mm x 467 mm x 286 mm 8 6 x 18 4 x 11 3 Electronic Module 426 mm x 426 mm x 169 mm 16 8 x 16 8 x 6 7 Product Weight Projector Head Module Assembly and Light Module 15 9 kg 35 1b Electronic Module 4 4 kg 9 7 1b 7 4 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 7 Specifications 7 6 1 Projector Dimensions and Mounting Information
314. t Pattern appears brighter than another In the 3 Coarse Adjustment Brightness Uniformity menu enable the Brightness Uniformity Enable check box to access a multitude of adjustments for light Lr clei output control in specific areas throughout Left Side the image Your settings apply as long as the _ Bottom Left Corner Brightness Uniformity Enable check box is Di Tan Right Corer enabled Right Side While making adjustments enable the Bottom Right Corner Coarse Adjustment check box to apply Brightness Uniformity settings with a large eae granularity Coarse Adjustment helps Right Center identify brightness changes and accelerates _ Overall Gain projector response time while adjusting _ Full Screen Eye Motion Filter settings To disable the Brightness Uniformity function delete the Brightness Uniformity Enable check mark Eye Motion Filter Reset Brightness Uniformity Settings To correct brightness uniformity for a complex screen setup see the TWIST User Manual 020 100143 xx When used to refine screens already matched for their primary colors and overall light output proper adjustment of Brightness Uniformity can create an exceptionally smooth screen in which e No area of the screen appears brighter than another e Light output from one screen closely matches adjacent screens Although the Brightness Uniformity control can be used for a stand alone projector it is particularly useful for setting up
315. t no flow control on port A FLW PRTA 1 Set flow control on port A to software FLW PRTA Get flow control FLW PRTA 001 Software D 26 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference FMD FILM MODE DETECT CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enable or disable film motion detection This is only available for interlaced or segmented frame sources Valid values are 0 Disabled 1 Auto 2 PsF SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the film mode detect for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the film mode detect for main video PIIP Set the film mode detect for main video EXAMPLE FMD 1 Enable Auto Film mode detect for Main video FRD FRAME DELAY CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Delays the output signal timing relative to the Input signal timing by a fraction of a frame and up to several frames The minimum latency can vary based on the amount of scaling applied to the image When using keystone or warping an additional latency is required depending on the amount of warp The control is only available when the Input signal is frame locked In free run mode or in cases where the signal cannot be frame locked the minimum latency defined by the scaling and keystoned warp is applied to the signal The value used is a 1 1000th of a frame For example 1000 equals 1
316. t you wish to backup Gamma Properties section is enabled when you select a Gamma file type from the Upload section Upgrade button refer to the Visual Environments Projector Software Upgrade instruction sheet P N 020 100443 xx This button is disabled if the projector is not in Standby mode Upload section allows you to select the file and file type that you wish to upload Sync button is used to set the projector date and time to match that on your computer Hide button allows you to disable the display of the help text Upload a Logo File or Gamma File IMPORTANT The projector must be powered on to enable the Upload drop down list 1 Select the file type Logo or Gamma from the Upload drop down list NOTES 1 f you select a Logo file type it MUST be a 24 bit bitmap file This enables the Logo Position and Background Color section Proceed to step 3a 2 If you select a Gamma file type it must be a csv file with 1024 values all colors same or 1024 x 3 for individual colors This enables the Gamma Properties section Proceed to step 4a Matrix StIM SIM User Manual B 7 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix B WebUI CHRISTIE a Enter the Logo position for the X and Y fields Click the Color square to open the Choose Background Color window choose the desired background color from the color palette and click OK The color square changes to the selected color c Click the Upload button to display th
317. ta logging EXAMPLES DLG1 Set current logging level to 1 DLG Get current logging level Response is DLG 001 DTL DETAIL CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control adjusts the sharpness of the image The sharpness detail enhancement applied is based on adaptive horizontal vertical and diagonal large edge and small edge enhancement processes Setting detail above the halfway point can introduce noise in the image lower settings can improve a noisy signal This command does not take effect unless the minimum change required in the DTT control is reached SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the detail for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the detail for main video PIIP Set the detail for main video Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 21 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE DTL DETAIL EXAMPLE DTL 50 Set the detail to mid point for Main video DTO DETAIL OVERSHOOT CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Detail overshoot undershoot control is provided to minimize ringing on the enhanced edges detail and texture effects SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE Set the detail overshoot for Slot x Input y EXAMPLE DTO 50 Set the detail overshoot to mid point for Main video DTT DETAIL THRESHOLD CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEV
318. tal streaks or shows significant color drift Value Range 0 sync tip 1 backporch 2 tri level Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 17 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE CLP CLAMPING Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the black level clamping for Slot x Input y Set the black level clamping for main video Set the black level clamping for main video EXAMPLES CLP 0 Set the black level clamping for main video to sync tip CLP MAIN 0 Set the black level clamping for main video to sync tip CLP IN32 0 Set the black level clamping for Slot 3 Input 2 to sync tip CLR COLOR CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control adjusts the saturation amount of color in a video image SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the color saturation on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 0 1000 MAIN Set the color saturation on the main video to the specified value in the range 0 1000 PIIP Set the color saturation on the main video to the specified value in the range of 0 1000 EXAMPLES CLR 500 Set color saturation to 500 on main video CLR MAIN 500 Set color saturation to 500 on main video CLR 250 Set color saturation to 250 on main video CLR IN32 100 Set color saturation to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 CLR Returns the current color saturation value on main video
319. tely half the brightness of the fi Alay Color Target dimmest projector in the array Target Color Space User 1 Select a desired unit for the RGB Target Brightness The range of the RGB Brightness Target Set the value to approximately half of the SN ato E00 white brightness capability WY of the projector flagged w in the Array Status For example if one wished to control the array brightness in ft L and wanted to control the brightness in steps of 0 1 ft L then a unit of Ensure the Array Capability shows 0 4 fe would be appropriate W100 0 This indicates that the array brightness is equal to the RGB Brightness Target After completing step 3 with this unit if an array brightness of 8 0 ft L was desired then the RGB Brightness Target would be set to Note the RGB Brightness Target value it 80 8 0 0 1 will be used to calculate the expected brightness in step 3 Select While Pot gt a Yitvte to Color Temperature os While Color Temperature y Copy White Point From 6500 K D655 gt Auto Color Enable gt a Move to the the ArrayLOC Projector Color Adjustments PCA menu Test Pattern Enable gt a RGB Brightness Target 1000 Display a white test pattern on the projector Main Menu Configuration Calculate the Expected Brightness by ArrayLOC converting the RGB Brightness Target Projector Color Adjustment value from step 2A into the desired unit 1 Target Color Space a
320. tem 15 Auto Color Enable Du AVOM Enone os If you wish the image to be as bright as RGB Brightness Target co possible set the RGB Brightness Target to a large number such as 1000 Adjust the color of white in the image by selecting the desired White Point When a preset non User color space is selected the white point is fixed at 6500 K D65 Tesi Pattem Enable Us vie To create a color space with preset primaries but a different white point select a RGB Bngtiness Target User Write 4 User color space then Copy Color Space From the desired preset color space The User color space white point can then be adjusted as described in step 2D ArrayLOC Bright ColorLOC Tuning Guide Follow this procedure only if the brightness or color matching between projectors running ArrayLOC does not meet your satisfaction Before continuing check that the mismatched projectors are properly running ArrayLOC by verifying their projector address appears listed in the Array Status display Step 1 Go to the ArrayLOC Menu Go to the Main gt Configuration 4 gt ArrayLOC 13 menu This is the starting point for controlling ArrayLOc Main Menu Configuration Projector Color Adjustments are specific to each projector so changes can be made without Synchronize to This Projector __ taking control of the array by leaving Bright ColorLOC Configuration box unchecked Array Color Taraet l Proje
321. th ColorLOC When Bright ColorLOC is OFF or in Fixed mode these adjustments can be used to define the color gamut In Cool or Bright mode the projector automatically moderates the LED power level to maintain the color gamut selected through the Array Color Target menu See 3 4 10 How Color Settings Interact in a StIM Array on page 3 72 LM Red Part Of Blue LM Green Part Of Blue 955 m o 100 0 a0 RGB Brightness 100 0 Red Color 000 y 0 000 Y Green Color 000 y 0 000 Y I gt lt II gt lt II gt lt ll 1 0 1 0 Blue Color et y 0 000Y 44 Native ss ative v ee Copy Setting From IMPORTANT Only Christie accredited service technicians should attempt this procedure For general use adjust color and brightness using ArrayLOC Table 3 5 Manual RGB Adjustment menu Option Description Color Mode Use this list to select the color mode Native EBU or User Color presets which control the LM LED power settings for each color The settings for Native mode are locked LM Red Part Of Red LM Green Part Of Red LM Blue Part Of Red LM Green Part of Green LM Red Part Of Green LM Blue Part Of Green LM Blue Part of Blue LM Red Part of Blue Changes the power of the blue LED for the green color Changes the power of the blue LED for the blue color Changes the power of the red LED for the blue color Changes the power of the red LED for the green color Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 45 020 100306 05 R
322. the Color Temperature control Color temperature is expressed in degrees Kelvin 3200 5400 etc Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 15 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE CCS SELECT OUTPUT COLOR Cont d Lower numbers give a reddish white higher numbers appear bluish There are 4 standard settings 9300K is close to the white of many computer monitors 6500K is the standard for color video in both standard and high definition forms 5400K is a standard for graphics and black and white video 3200K is useful if the projected image is to be filmed or shot as part of a studio set that is illuminated with incandescent lights For all color temperatures the color primaries red green amp blue are unchanged and reflect the native colors of the projector 2 SD Video Optimized for SD video This will allow you to adjust the color of red green and blue as well as the color white 3 HD Video Optimized for HD video This will allow you to adjust the color of red green and blue as well as the color of white 4 User 1 Selects a user defined sets of color adjustments 5 User 2 Selects a user defined sets of color adjustments 6 User 3 Selects a user defined sets of color adjustments 7 User 4 Selects a user defined sets of color adjustments The set of 4 User Defined settings are defined in the configuration menu SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE ns EXAMPLE CCS 0 S
323. the screen This band represents the last band of the grayscale pattern which should be 100 white or the current color if a certain color is enabled 5 Check the black band and adjust the black level slidebar if necessary NOTE Adjusting the black levels affects the gain Only adjust when necessary 6 Repeat Steps 3 5 with the 2 remaining primary colors When each primary color shows one optimized black band and white or colored band the Input levels for this source are correctly set Upon exiting the Input Levels menu the Peak Detector check box will clear Input Levels Auto Input Level Red lt Pr gt Blacklevel Red lt Pr gt Input Drive Green lt Y gt Blacklevel Green lt Y gt Input Drive Blue lt Pb gt Blacklevel Blue lt Pb gt Input Drive Auto Color Enable i 2 SA 4 5 6 8 9 Clamp Location Input Peak Detector Color Enable BackPorch z White z Adjust corresponding blacklevel red green or blue until one black band appears Adjust corresponding Input drive red green or blue until one bright band appears Figure 3 12 Adjusting Input Levels Using the Peak Detector Select which color or colors you want to see in the display useful while working with color temperature white levels or input levels NOTES 1 nput levels apply for the current source only but for any color temperature used 2 If color temperature is set up based on the internal test patterns
324. though color space for these analog signals is automatically determined by the projector you may wish to override this and manually set a specific color space NOTE For some signals the color space function is entirely automatic and the drop down list is disabled The current color space appears in the Image Settings menu Press ENTER to select a different option e Select RGB unless you are using component video e Select YCbCr SDTV ITU R BT 601 with a standard definition televised signal SDTV e Select YCbCr HDTV ITU R BT 709 with a high definition televised signal HDTV NOTE When certain RGB signals are first connected the projector may not recognize them as RGB and will incorrectly decode their color information as YCbCr video These signals can include e RGB signals in NTSC PAL SECAM frequency ranges e Scan doubled sync on green e Scan quadrupled sync on green For these signals change the color Space to RGB and then define a new channel for future use Video Options This submenu is used with video sources only See Video Options Menu on page 3 22 Input Levels Only experienced users should use the Input Levels submenu With Auto Setup the projector automatically determines the best input levels by monitoring image content and adjusting the controls appropriately further adjustment is typically not required to obtain proper blacks or whites Use this menu to manually adjust blacks and whites See Jmage Settin
325. thout first pulling it down highlight the menu option and use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key Press ENTER when the desired choice appears Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation e Press the LEFT arrow key backward or the RIGHT arrow key forward to jump between pages in an extra long drop down list e While in a drop down list press EXIT to cancel any change 3 2 5 Editing Text Activate the Edit Window To enter or edit text within a text field highlight the desired menu option such as a Channel name and press ENTER to activate its adjacent edit window Any previously entered text is displayed with its first character highlighted in a square cursor signifying that this character is ready for editing Navigate Within the Edit Window Press the RIGHT arrow key to move the cursor forward character by character or LEFT arrow key to Cursor highlight Move with AZ move the cursor backwards as desired Show Edit a character To edit a highlighted character use the UP and A DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the alphabet a z numbers 0 9 AON Scroll alphabet Press space and punctuation dash or _ underscore available When the numbers etc _ to select and character you need is highlighted press the RIGHT arrow key to select iai it The cursor moves to the next available character within the current l text field Figure 3 4 Entering Text N
326. tings such as bits parity and stop bits are grouped together into one selection PRTA Set the mode on port A RS 232 In EXAMPLES MDE PRTA 8N1 Set mode on port A to 8 bit no parity 1 stop bit MDE PRTA 7E1 Set mode on port A to 7 bit even parity 1 stop bit MDE PRTA 701 Set mode on port A to 7 bit odd parity 1 stop bit MDE PRTA Get mode MDE PRTA 8N1 MFT MENU FONT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the font size used by OSD SUBGODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt View Set Choose large font or small font as the font used by OSD EXAMPLES MFT Get current font option used by the OSD 0 is small font 1 is large font MFT 1 Use large font as the OSD font D 42 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHAKISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference MLK CHANNEL MEMORY LOCK CONTROL GROUP Channel SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Lock the channel being used by main PIIP Lock the channel being used by main EXAMPLES MLK get channel locked state for channel used by main MLK MAIN Get channel locked state for channel used by main MLK PIIP Get channel locked state for channel used by main MLK 1 Lock the channel being used by main MLK PIIP 1 Lock the channel being used by main MLK MAIN 0 U
327. tion range to limited RTE REAL TIME EVENTS CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Real time events allow custom user actions to occur based on a system trigger There are various triggers in the system such as power up channel change errors or based on time Time can be absolute e g 12 00 00 on December 25 2008 or relative e g 5 hours and 30 minutes from now Special Function keys can also be used as a trigger An example would be pressing FUNC 1 on the remote Events can also be connected to external hardware triggers via the General Purpose IO port GPIO EVENTS Single Occurrence Events RTE T YYYY MM DD HH MM SS S description command Daily Occurring Event RTE T YYYY MM DD HH MM SS YYYY MM DD D R description command Where the first date and time is the start date and occurrence time The second date is the end date R is the Repeat Every interval i e repeat every R days Weekly Occurring Event RTE T YYYY MM DD HH MM SS YYYY MM DD W R D description command Where the first date and time is the start date and occurrence time The second date is the end date R is the Repeat Every interval 1 e repeat every R weeks D is the weekday or weekdays that the command should run on M Monday W Wednesday F Friday Su Sunday Tu Tuesday Th Thursday S Saturday ILE MT will run on Monday and Tuesday TTh will run on Tuesday and Thursday MTW
328. tment Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Configuration Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration 125 000 150 34 329 A12 A13 A14 C4 Proceed to Take Control of the Array Set the Array Color Target Managing Colors with ArrayLOC in Section 3 Is the array RGB Brightness setting appropriate Are there any projectors 3 brightness capabilities Check lens for dust dirt Check screen gain with excessively low white CHRISTIE Menu gt Status Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Color Saturation Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Advanced Color Adjustment Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt ArrayLOC Service Proceed to Fine Tuning of Projected Colors Managing Colors with ArrayLOC in Section 3 The unit of the RGB Brightness Target value can be set using the PCA White Brightness Adjustment See Setting the RGB Brightness Target Unit Unless the array is being deliberately dimmed the RGB Brightness NOT the RGB Brightness Target should be set to 100 See page 3 11 c5 Troubleshooting Tree Array Colors Yes No Does increasing the f White Brightness Adjustment on the problem projectors improve their performance Yes Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHA IS TI
329. tment lets you adjust each projector output so that it represents the color target Adjustments compensate for projector to projector differences and for the projection system as a whole including loss of brightness or color shift due to lens mirror and screen For example the mirror might not reflect blue 100 percent or the screen might absorb more blue You can measure the output at the screen with a color meter and use this option to increase the blue until you get the array color target value at the screen See Projector Color Adjustment on page 3 43 This menu is also available under Configuration gt Geometry amp Color Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Projector Color Adjustment gt White Brightness Adjustment lets you turn the brightness target adjustment into a meaningful number for example a number that relates to Ft L See 6 6 10 Array Status Decoder amp Setting the RGB Brightness Target Unit on page 6 13 in the troubleshooting section Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE 4 Menu Tree Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 4 1 Menu Tree Section 4 CHRISTIE Menu Tree 4 1 Inyes dw 10 09 Z yu wsnfpy 10 09 9 9S 1 4 UonoN 944 9 J 4 UOON 944 UBEJIS N4 G p n s y p uononp y sioN O Nbsoyy UONONPSY pejy yolg Z uononp y SION sbul JaS uonanp y sioy epuos g p
330. tom blanking for the image EXAMPLES BBL 40 Set bottom blanking to 40 on main video BBL MAIN 40 Set bottom blanking to 40 on main video BBL PIIP 40 Set bottom blanking to 40 on video BBL IN32 40 Set bottom blanking to 40 on Slot 3 Input 2 BBL Returns the bottom blanking value on main video BBL PIIP Returns the bottom blanking value on video BBL IN12 Returns the bottom blanking value on Slot 1 Input 2 BDR BAUD RATE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Set the baud rate for a serial communications port For RS 232 IN and RS 232 OUT the default is 115200 For RS 422 the default is 19200 The default communications settings for all ports is 8 data bits no parity Valid baud rates with the values to select them are 0 1200 4 38400 1 2400 5 57600 2 9600 6 115200 3 19200 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE PRTA Set the baud rate on port A RS 232 IN PRTB Set the baud rate on port B RS 232 OUT PRTC Set the baud rate on port C RS 422 EXAMPLES BDR PRTA 6 Set baud rate on port A to 115200 bits per second BDR PRTA Get baud rate BDR PRTA 115200 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 9 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CH ISTIE BGC BASE GAMMA CURVE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control lets you select the Gamma tab
331. tor are broadcast to the other projectors in the array ArrayLOC Configuration 1000 100 0 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 57 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CHix IS TIE i 3 58 Adjust Projected White and Primary Colors for the Array User defined target color spaces allow color primaries and white points to be adjusted independently For example you can select the target color space User 1 copy the values from the target color space Factory leave the color primaries and adjust only the white point All the settings for a user defined color space are editable 1 Navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target 2 In Target Color Space select one of the User settings to modify NOTE 70o use another color space as a starting point select a source color space from the Copy Color Space From list When using Maximum as a starting point the values reflect a color space larger than capable for the best array color saturation The values may not reflect real world colors 3 Check both Auto Color Enable and Test Pattern Enable the system background color changes to the target color being adjusted for example Target Red x invokes a red background All other menu options change the system color to white as long as Test Pattern Enable is checked 4 Adjust the color primaries for example Target Red x and Target Red y for the color space 5 To adjust white in the imag
332. tsenmnntanentnetennimietirnerebes 6 7 6 64 Invalid Target Gam t yellow alert wcsscucssvsscecesiensdavedeedncdstnesendadarcnisenesssaieteesncasuniaundadandeieeks 6 7 6 6 5 Unable to Achieve Target Brightness Gamut yellow alert oo ceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 7 6 6 6 Troubleshooting Tree Color And Brightness Array 0000000nnnnnsnssnsssssnnnonssnssnnnsnssnnsnnns 6 9 6 6 7 Troubleshooting Tree Array Brightness ccccssccscccceeecccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 10 6 6 8 Troubleshooting Tree Array Colors ccccccccccccccccccccccee cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 11 6 6 9 Bright ColorLOC Setup and Walkthrough ceecsseecccceececeeccceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 12 6 6 10 Array Status Decoder amp Setting the RGB Brightness Target Unit cc ccceeeees 6 13 7 Specifications TW Ts SOM LAW OLY E E E E E E E 7 1 EN Ee a E OE IA AEEA ag sea TEE EN N EA T 7 1 7 1 2 Environmental RE CUAL ONG siscsnesactesesinncansnsieacswaesesoneacenncuesednneneauseadannaansonsaunseacessnaneeeceoneeeass 7 1 Ta Meg a a I accede IE PE ou ge ana es de erica dante eects ee eee ead ears E E A 7 1 7 1 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility 00 0 0 cccccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeaeeessseseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaeaaeaeeesseeeeeeees 7 2 Mg MAMAN TAY espns paneer betes a career A E E E A as dsnnee rade osa baeusseguenedsatnet ce 7 2 12s AE SIM SIM CCI IC AUOING cyrri i E E EA EE ES 7 2 PED DN eee E A E EE E E A 7 2 Teg L A E N
333. ty and no more than 25 feet in length e Set the serial options in Configuration gt Communications See Communications on page 3 34 e Set Configuration gt Communications gt Network Routing to one RS232 and RS422 Joined See Network Routing on page 3 35 fol f i i le a 4 9 l l S S RS232 OUT s i MASSEN RS232 IN RS422 K p o e A R5232 out RS232 IN bd gt of aaar ar AUNTY A 1 Separate gt 2 RS232 and Rs422 joined 3 RS232 and Ethernet joined 4 All joined Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 2 Installation and Setup 2 7 Projector Network Setup for ArrayLOC Communication See the Integration Guide for detailed information about arrayLOC setup 2 8 Setting up the Image 2 8 1 Adjusting the Projection Lens NOTICE Lock lens adjustments to prevent unnecessary tampering Loosen the adjustment locks on the lens barrel before making adjustments 2 8 2 Adjusting Image Geometry and Optical Alignment Only perform image alignment once the projector is fully assembled and powered up in its final location Basic image alignment ensures the image reflected from the DMD is parallel to and well centered with the lens and screen This initial optical alignment is the foundation for optimizing images on the screen and must be completed before fin
334. ursor Offsets Horizontal keystone is used to correct a keystoned image shape in which the left and right borders of the image are unequal in length and the top and bottom are slanted to one of the sides See Figure 3 18 Figure 3 17 Vertical Keystone Figure 3 18 Horizontal Keystone Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 3 37 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE e 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets Use these settings to move the cursor in from the corner point when a projector is overshooting and the cursors Geometry Correction for adjustment are not visible Move the cursors in from wit at htactedintat hn a the corners and make the keystone adjustments in the 0 ae O 5 pn O normal way _ Offset Bottom i e e e e Offset Left Adjusting an Image for Keystone Distortion Offset Right 1 Enable keystone adjustments by selecting Keystone from the Geometry Correction drop Figure 3 19 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets down list NOTE This will enable the controls for performing 1D or 2D keystone adjustments 2 Select a Test Pattern NOTE The Grid test pattern is recommended 3 Perform coarse keystone adjustment by using the Horizontal or Vertical Adjust setting Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to make the adjustment NOTE f Vertical Keystone adjustments have been made starting to do any Horizontal Keystone adjustments will erase the Vertical settings and vice versa NOTE The corner
335. ut warning level Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Array Color Target Use this menu on the master projector to set the color target for the projector array The settings apply to the projectors belonging to the same Brightness ColorLOC group which are set to synchronize with the group These settings are enabled on master projectors only Choose Maximum to view the common color gamut values for the array NOTE 1 The recommended procedure for setting the color target for a projector array follows the description of the menu items 2 If you are setting up a single projector create an array of one and make it the master to enable the color controls Target Color Space ArrayLOC Section 3 Operation Array Color Target User 1 LEERSE Target Red x Target Red y Target Green x Target Green y Target Blue x Target Blue y Copy Color Space From select White Point 0 000 0 800 0 000 0 800 k 0 210 es 0 000 0 300 8 Eon 0 000 0 800 nd oh 0 000 0 800 pe 0 000 0 800 0 313 0 329 Maximum z 6500 K D65 z Sets the color space for the projector array Changing this option displays the red green blue x y associated with the selected option zl Selecting one of the user defined color spaces displays the last saved values Auto Color Enable ad Test Pattern Enable d Array Capability _ RGB Brightness Target sao
336. uto Color Enable When this check box is selected selecting a specific black level or drive will automatically enable the corresponding color in the display Clear the check box to see all colors Test Pattern Enable Select this check box to enable the automatic display of a flat white test pattern when you select the Array Color Target menu The test pattern is turned off automatically when you exit the menu Manual IR Power Choose InfraRGB Preset and then choose a Preset option The selected preset sets the values for the IR Manual Power slider controls You can use these controls with IRLOC disabled IR Manual Red Power Controls the IR LED brightness in response to red content Range is 0 to 255 IR Manual Green Power Controls the IR LED brightness in response to green content Range is 0 to 255 IR Manual Blue Power Controls the IR LED brightness in response to blue content Range is 0 to 255 Managing InfraRGB with IRLOC Matrix StIM projectors use IRLOC to maintain the target IR brightness and target IR weight across an array of projectors To make InfraRGB adjustments across the array from the master projector l On the Main Menu gt Configuration gt InfraRGB gt InfraRGB Target amp Adjustments menu select Enabled from the IRLOC Mode drop down list Select an IR brightness target from the IR Brightness Target slider This specifies the target that you want all projectors in the array to aim for Usin
337. w and increase so that whites remain bright but are not distorted or tinted and light areas do not become fully white 1 e crushed Conversely low contrast causes dim images Bright Increases or decreases the black level in the image Use the LEFT RIGHT arrow key until you reach the desired level of brightness For best results start high and decrease so that dark areas do not become fully black 1 e crushed Conversely overly high brightness changes black to dark gray causing washed out images Gamma Determines how gray shades are displayed between minimum input black and maximum input white for a given amount of signal The proper setting helps maintain optimized blacks and whites while ensuring a smooth transition for the in between values used in grays Unlike brightness and contrast controls the overall tone of an image can be lightened or darkened without changing the 2 extremes and your images will be Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation more vibrant yet with good detail in dark areas when using the Gamma control The nominal setting for Gamma Correction of 0 is correct for most signals and conditions If excess ambient light washes out the image and it becomes difficult or impossible to see details in dark areas increase the gamma correction setting to compensate Number Keys Press 1 to 9 to enter a value in a text box or to select a menu ite
338. w control or no flow control is used when transmitting and receiving data on the serial port Serial Mode Select the serial data mode The mode includes the number of bits the parity and the number of stop bits Serial Protocol Select the protocol used on the serial communications port Projector Address Enter a number up to 3 digits in length such as 001 to assign or change a number to the projector currently in use If the current projector already has a number assigned that number will appear here Numerical identity for projectors enables you to communicate with a single projector within a multiple projector application see the PROJ key described in 3 7 Using the IR Remote on page 3 1 If you make a mistake in assigning or changing the projector number press EXIT to cancel NOTE When multiple projectors are being used and you want to adjust the color for individual projectors to create a seamless image you must assign different numbers for each projector to allow switching back and forth between them while adjustments are being made Network Routing NOTE Not applicable for stand alone i Networks Do not communicate with one another projectors or simple seria I networks with on mee 5282 and RS422 Joined Serial networks are joined but Ethernet is isolated ss ESAE SEAE RS 232 and Eithemet are joined but RS 422 is isolated one type of controller and linking All Joined Network communications trave
339. will only be applied on Power up or if applying them from the OSD SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Select Warping mode 0 disabled 1 2D keystone 2 TWIST maps KRST Reset keystone settings to zero EXAMPLES WRP SLCT 0 Warping disabled WRP SLCT 1 Use 2D keystone mode WRP SLCT 2 Use TWIST map 1 D 72 Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CHRISTIE Numerics 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets menu 38 A accessories 7 AccuFrame 30 active window size 16 adaptive contrast video options 23 Advanced Diagnostics menu 47 See also diagnostics and calibration Advanced Edge Blending menu 42 Advanced Image Settings menu 26 all joined network 35 array capability 51 58 Array Color Target menu 51 array status filter 55 array LOC adjusting projector array colors 58 Array Color Target menu 51 ArrayLOC Configuration menu 55 ArrayLOC menu 48 ArrayLOC status 54 Bright ColorLOC Configuration menu 49 color adjustment guides 60 color settings interactions 72 control array 57 fine tune projector color 59 fine tune projector color meter 60 managing colors 57 60 Projector Color Adjustment menu 53 arrayLOC network 55 arrow keys 6 aspect ratio overlay 47 aspect ratio secondary window 71 auto color enable 53 auto color enable black levels and drives 25 auto input level 24 auto input searching 71 auto key 3 auto power up 32 auto shutdown enable 32 automatic image setup 16 B back porch 25
340. with may have one or more subcodes that will allow you to select a specific source image channel or subfunction The Subcode is represented by a 4 character ASCII code A Z upper or lowercase and 0 9 This Subcode appears immediately after the Function code with a character to separate the code and subcode If there is no Subcode the plus sign is also omitted In messages sent to the projector that do have a subcode a space between the subcode and the first parameter or special character is optional Request Reply Symbols If the controller is requesting information from the projector a question mark appears directly after the Function code If the projector is replying an P exclamation mark appears directly after the Function code For Set type messages sent to the projector neither of these characters appear Data directly follows the code and subcode Other Special Functions Optional To add functionality to the current message include one or more of the following special characters between the Function code Subcode and the first parameter If more than one add them in any order See C 2 6 Flow Control gt i oane SSS Data The value for a given projector state such as ON or OFF appears in ASCII decimal format directly after the request reply symbol You can add an optional space after the symbol 1 e before the data in a set message but data in replies follow the
341. xel Tracking must be set correctly before adjusting Pixel Phase Pixel Phase can only be set on Analog Input cards The range is 0 31 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the pixel phase for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the pixel phase for the main image PIIP Set the pixel phase for the image EXAMPLES PXP 16 Set pixel phase to 16 on main video PXP MAIN 16 Set pixel phase to 16 on main video PXP PIIP 16 Set pixel phase to 16 on main video PXP IN32 16 Set pixel phase to 16 on Slot 3 Input 2 PXP Returns the pixel phase value on main video PXP PIIP Returns the pixel phase value on main video PXP IN12 Returns the pixel phase value on Slot 1 Input 2 PXT PIXEL TRACKING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Pixel Tracking adjusts the position of the pixel sampling clock to match the Input signal It can only be set on Analog Input cards If adjusted incorrectly flickering or vertical bars of noise appear across the image Adjust Pixel Tracking so that the noise either disappears or fills the image If it fills the image use Pixel Phase to eliminate the noise The range is 600 3000 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the pixel tracking for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the pixel tracking for the main image PIIP Set the pixel tracking for the main image EXAMPLES PXT 600 Set pixel tracking to 600 on main video PXT MAIN 600 Set pixel t
342. xtraneous light would detract from the scenario when the scene involves IR SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE ESM 1 Enable EM stealth mode ESM Report the stealth mode value FAD FADE TIME CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Controls the amount of time it takes to fade between images on a source switch SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Time in hundredths of a second to allow the fade Range 0 150 where 150 1 5 seconds 1 10ms 0 off EXAMPLE FAD 100 Fade for 1 second FAS FAN ASSIST SWITCH CONTROL GROUP Saved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the ability for all fans to operate at maximum speed during a thermal over temp condition SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES FAS 1 Turn ON fan assist FAS 0 Turn OFF fan assist FIL FILTER CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Apply an internal Low Pass Filter to the current Input signal before the A D conversion in analog cards This removes high frequency noise from Input signals HDTV is typically used for 720p and 10801 video sources The high bandwidth filter should be used for 1080p or higher frequency sources Valid values are Matrix StIM SIM User Manual D 25 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Appendix D Serial Comm
343. y default ArrayLOC is enabled and configured a Bright to automatically display a moderately saturated a gamut at the maximum brightness the array can Synchronize to This Projector m support 3 Bright ColorLOC Configuration For an overview of projector and source color settings see 3 4 10 How Color Settings Interact in _ Array Color Target a SUM Array on page 3 72 Projector Color Adjustment For an annotated walkthrough for setting up ArrayLOC and fine tuning the setup see 6 6 9 iia ate econ Bright ColorLOC Setup and Walkthrough on z ArrayLOC Status page 6 12 in the troubleshooting section ArrayLOC Configuration NOTE While working in the ArrayLOC menus and submenus ArrayLOC displays a warning popup on the affected projector if adjusted settings fall outside the range the system can adjust for Warnings include e Minimum brightness not met BCLOC disabled Minimum brightness not met Warning Min Gamut not met BCLOC disabled e Min Gamut not met Warning Bright ColorLOC Mode Use this option to set the Bright ColorLOC mode e In ALL modes except OFF the projector e Sets the flag to execute the Array BCLOC algorithm In Cool or Bright mode the LM color adjustment options on the Manual RGB Adjustment menu are disabled e Cool mode LED control performed by BCLOC Color Space Correction is also performed electronically to achieve the target color space e Bright mode This is the reco
344. y time by checking the Synchronize to This Projector option on another projector The previous master projector automatically releases the setting See ArrayLOC Status on page 3 54 See Bright ColorLOC Configuration gt Bright ColorLOC Array Status to check projector information A projector with BrightColorLOC mode turned OFF ignores BCLOC changes from master projectors If at some point you are working with another projector within your array or group and decide to make some setting changes you may not be able to do so as some settings will be locked grayed out because their projectors may not be the current master You can however select the new projector as the master as described above and make your required changes The previous master projector will relinquish control Bright ColorLOC Configuration Use the Bright ColorLOC Configuration menu to assess and work with the capabilities of the projectors in the group or array ArrayLOC Bright ColorLOC Configuration Minimum Brightness 20 R Minimum Brightness m l Minimum Gamut o i Use this option to set the minimum Projector Capability R107 7 131 4 brightness as a percentage of the target B103 3 W100 0 brightness that the array will target and to 3 Enable Warnings ou set the threshold for alerts from projectors _ Warning Brightness Threshold 20 that cannot achieve the minimum Projectors Warning Gamut Threshold 20 that fall below the minimum
345. yond the axis 5 Offsets are measured from optical lens centre which may not coincide with mechanical centre offset is defined as of pixels of offset half vertical panel resolution oa Offset Projector Vertical and Horizontal Position The projection lens and the screen type determine the vertical and horizontal position of your projector in relation to the screen Ideally you should position the projector perpendicular to the screen to make the image appear rectangular instead of keystoned trapezoidal You can offset vertical position of the image move it above or below the optical axis by adjusting the lens mount The type of projection lens you install determines the amount of available vertical offset Vertical offset can be expressed as the percent of half the image height or the number of pixels of shift from lens center NOTES 1 Offsets are subject to 7 centering tolerance Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 2 5 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 2 Installation and Setup CH IS TIE i of pixels of offset 100 2 2 Offset _ offset nS defi ned as Offset half vertical panel resolution The horizontal position of the image can also be offset moved to the left or right of optical center by adjusting the lens mount The amount of horizontal offset available depends on the lens installed and if the image has already been vertically offset Horizontal offset can be expressed as the percent of h
346. you can set up input levels for a given source so that it matches the color temperature of the internal test patterns Image Settings gt Advanced Image Settings Menu Image Settings Use the Advanced Image Settings submenu to make the adjustments Advanced Image Settings necessary for lesser used but more specialized applications on your _ Gamma Settings projector 3 26 Detail Settings Noise Reduction Settings Color Settings AccuFrame Figure 3 13 Advanced Image Settings Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Gamma Settings The system offers 2 types of gamma correction Gamma correction can be applied to a specific source to correct for luma encoding This is a channel setting and reapplied every time the same signal is detected This is the Gamma control On the other hand the system also provides a global Gamma Correction control The global control offers an offset applied to all channels This offset is used to compensate for changes in ambient conditions such as ambient light in the room and projected material Advanced Image Settings Gamma Settings o Gamma Correction wae re Gamma Gamma Function z O Gamma Function 1 00 Tie Gamma Slope 0 016 oii Gamma Correction Applies a global offset to all gamma settings for each channel It affects the shape of the curve by performing a linear transform toward a gamma curve of 1 0 while the cont
347. zardous substances RoHS in electrical and electronic equipment and the applicable official amendment s e EU Directive 2002 96 EC on waste and electrical and electronic equipment WEEE and the applicable official amendment s e Japanese industrial standard JIS C 0950 2005 on marking for the presence of specific chemical substances for electrical and electronic equipment e China Ministry of Information Industry Order No 39 02 2006 on the control of pollution caused by electronic information products hazardous substances concentration limits SJ T11363 2006 and the applicable product marking requirement SJ T 11364 2006 7 1 3 Emissions e FCC Code of Federal Regulations Title 47 Part 15 Conducted and Radiated Emissions Class A e EN55022 CISPR 22 for Information Technology Equipment Conducted and Radiated Class A e EN61000 3 2 Induced Harmonic Distortion e EN61000 3 3 Induced Voltage Fluctuations Flicker Matrix StIM SIM User Manual 7 1 020 100306 05 Rev 1 03 2012 Section 7 Specifications CHRISTIE 7 1 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility e FCC CFR47 Part 15 Subpart B Class A Unintentional Radiators e CISPR 22 2005 Modified EN55022 2006 Class A Information Technology Equipment e CISPR 24 1997 Modified A1 2001 A2 2002 EN55024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 EMC Requirements Information Technology Equipment 7 1 5 Immunity e EN55024 specific to Information Technology Equipment all parts

Matrix StIM/SIM User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents